Pioneer AVIC Z2 Powerful HDD Navigation and Advanced User Manual

HDD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER

AVIC-Z2

Operation Manual

Notice to all users:

This software requires that the navigation system is properly connected to your vehicle’s

parking brake and depending on your vehicle, additional installation may be required. For

more information, please contact your Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at

(800) 421-1404.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 1 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

The screens shown in the examples may differ from the actual screens.

The actual screens may be changed without notice for performance and function

improvements.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 2 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Introduction

Manual Overview

This manual provides important information you need to make full use of your new navigation system.

The beginning sections outline the navigation system and describe its basic operation. The later sec-

tions describe the details of the navigation functions.

Chapters 10 to 16 describe how to operate the AV functions. Please read these chapters when you use

a disc in the built-in DVD drive or operate the Pioneer audio equipment connected to the navigation sys-

tem.

How to use this manual

Be sure to read the following descriptions

License Agreement (Page 5 to 11)

This provides a license agreement of this software. Be sure to read this before using the software.

About the Data for the Map Database (Page 11)

This provides the date when the Map Database was recorded.

This provides the copyright of the Map Database.

About Gracenote

(Page 11)

This provides a license agreement and copyright of the Gracenote

music recognition service. Be sure

to read this before using this navigation system.

Finding the operation procedure from what you want to do

When you have decided what you want to do, you can find the page you need from the “Table of Con-

tents”.

Finding the operation procedure from a menu name

If you want to check the meaning of each item displayed on the screen, you will find the necessary page

from the “Display Information” at the end of the manual.

Glossary

See the glossary to find the meaning of a term.

Index

The section at the end of this manual provides an index. See each term to find the main pages where it

is stated.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 1 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Overview for each chapter

Before Using the System

For safety reasons, it is particularly important that you fully understand your naviga-

tion system before using it. Be sure to read this chapter.

Basic Operation

Please read this section if you want to operate the navigation system immediately.

It will explain the basics of this system.

This section describes the basic operations for navigation.

How to Read the Map Display

This section describes how to read the map screen, and the method of changing map view or

map scale.

Modifying Map Configurations

The behavior of your navigation system depends on the map display and guidance settings. If

you need to change any of the current settings, read the relevant section of this chapter.

Setting a Route to Your Destination

This section describes various ways to search for a destination, edit the current route condi-

tions and operate the route during route guidance.

Registering and Editing Locations

You can register and edit the points on the map. This chapter describes how to register a

home location, favorite location or other location, and how to edit the entry in “Address

Book”.

Using Traffic Information

When Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is connected to the navigation system,

the system can acquire traffic information and perform navigation using the traffic informa-

tion. This chapter describes ways of viewing traffic icons that are displayed on the map and

operation related traffic information.

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

When Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is connected to the navigation system,

variety of information other than traffic can be acquired. The navigation system can also reg-

ister emergency information. This chapter describes ways of the information acquired with

XM satellite radio, registration of emergency information.

Using Hands-free Phoning

When you are using a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth

technology by connecting the

Bluetooth unit (sold separately) to the navigation system, you can operate your cellular

phone hands-free. This chapter describes the operations related to hands-free phoning.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 2 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

The behavior of your navigation system depends a number of general settings for navigation

functions. If you need to change any of the initial settings (default settings), read the relevant

section of this chapter.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

This section describes how to use DVD-Videos, CDs, MP3 discs, and the radio.

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

You can record a music CD to the hard disk drive in the navigation system. This chapter

describes recording music and playing back the recorded music.

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

This chapter describes the audio source operations that can be used when an XM satellite

radio tuner or SIRIUS satellite radio tuner is connected.

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod

, TV)

This chapter describes the audio source operations that can be used when Pioneer audio

equipment featuring IP-BUS (Multi-CD player, iPod adapter, TV tuner) is connected.

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

This chapter describes the audio source operations that can be used when connecting AV

equipment with an RCA connector (AV input), future Pioneer devices (external unit ), or aux-

iliary equipment (AUX).

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

Using the audio source, various audio-visual settings are available to suit your tastes. This

chapter describes how to change the settings.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

This section describes navigation operations, such as searching the destination and per-

forming audio operations by voice.

Appendix

Please read the appendix to learn more about your navigation system and information such

as the availability of after-care. Please see “Display Information” at the end of this manual

to check the details for each item on the menu.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 3 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Terminology

Before moving on, take a few minutes to read the following information about the conventions used in

this manual. They will help you greatly as you learn how to use your new equipment.

• Hardware buttons on your navigation system are described in ALL CAPITAL, BOLD lettering:

e.g.)

MAP button, MENU button.

• Items in the different menus or touch keys available on the screen are described in brackets [ ] and

bold:

e.g.)

[Destination], [Settings].

• Extra information, alternative usages and other notes are presented like this:

e.g.)

❒ Touch keys which are not available at this time are grayed out.

• References to sections that describe information related to the current topics are indicated like this:

e.g.)

➲ Setting the Route Options ➞ Page 34

The tab on the right corner indicates which operation the description is related to: Nav-

igation operation or AV (Audio Visual) source operation.

For example, “NAVI” indicates that the description is related to the operation for navi-

gation control.

“NAVI/AV” indicates that the description is related to both operation for navigation

control and AV control.

About the definition of terminology

“Front Display” and “Rear Display”

In this manual, the screen that is attached to the body of this navigation unit will be referred to as the

“Front Display”. Any additional optional screen that is purchased for use in conjunction with this navi-

gation unit will be referred to as the “Rear Display”.

“Video image”

“Video image” in this manual indicates the moving image from DVD-Video in the built-in DVD drive or

from the equipment that is connected to this system with an AV-BUS or RCA cable, such as a TV tuner

or general-purpose AV equipment.

Color difference of the map display between day and night

The examples in this manual are illustrated using the daytime display. When driving at night, the colors

you see may differ from those shown.

Night display

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 4 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

License Agreement

PIONEER AVIC-Z2 - for U.S.A.

THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU,

AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER ELECTRON-

ICS (USA) INC. (“PIONEER”). PLEASE READ THE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT

CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE

INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY

USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIO-

NEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND

BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE

SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED

BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER(S) (“SUPPLIERS”),

AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV-

ERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’ SEPARATE TERMS,

WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT

(Refer to page 9). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH

ALL OF THESE TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE

PIONEER PRODUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFT-

WARE, AND ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN

FIVE (5) DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS,

TO THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM

WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF THE

SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR

CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREEMENT.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE

Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non

exclusive license to use the software installed on

the Pioneer products (the “Software”) and the

related documentation solely for your own per-

sonal use or for internal use by your business,

only on such Pioneer products.

You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,

port, modify or make derivative works of the Soft-

ware. You shall not loan, rent, disclose, publish,

sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market or other-

wise transfer the Software or use it in any manner

not expressly authorized by this agreement. You

shall not derive or attempt to derive the source

code or structure of all or any portion of the Soft-

ware by reverse engineering, disassembly,

decompilation, or any other means. You shall not

use the Software to operate a service bureau or

for any other use involving the processing of data

for other persons or entities.

Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-

right, trade secret, patent and other proprietary

ownership rights in the Software. The Software is

copyrighted and may not be copied, even if modi-

fied or merged with other products. You shall not

alter or remove any copyright notice or propri-

etary legend contained in or on the Software.

You may transfer all of your license rights in the

Software, the related documentation and a copy

of this License Agreement to another party, pro-

vided that the party reads and agrees to accept

the terms and conditions of this License Agree-

ment.

2. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY

The Software and related documentation are pro-

vided to you “AS IS”. PIONEER AND ITS LICEN-

SOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2 and 3,

Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be collectively

referred to as “Pioneer”) MAKES AND YOU

RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFTWARE,

WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND ALL

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT-

NESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR

THE SOFTWARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED.

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLU-

SION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. The Software is

complex and may contain some nonconformities,

defects or errors. Pioneer does not warrant that

the Software will meet your needs or expecta-

tions, that operation of the Software will be error

free or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities

can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer

does not make any representations or warranties

regarding the use or results of the use of the Soft-

ware in terms of its accuracy, reliability or other-

wise.

3. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR

ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS INCURRED BY

YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COM-

PENSATORY, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,

CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES,

LOST PROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES OR

BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR

COMMITMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH ANY

BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAM-

AGES) RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR

INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIO-

NEER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR

SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD

OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 5 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVID-

UALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING

WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT,

BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT

LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER

TORTS. IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER

OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS

AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON

WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR

INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER’S

LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT

(50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE

ENCLOSED PIONEER PRODUCT.

Some states do not allow the exclusion or limita-

tion of incidental or consequential damages, so

the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to

you. This warranty disclaimer and limitation of lia-

bility shall not be applicable to the extent that

they are prohibited by any applicable federal,

state or local law which provides that such a dis-

claimer or limitation cannot be waived or pre-

empted.

4. EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES

You agree and certify that neither the Software

nor any other technical data received from Pio-

neer, nor the direct product thereof, will be

exported outside the United States except as

authorized and as permitted by the laws and reg-

ulations of the United States. If the Software has

been rightfully obtained by you outside of the

United States, you agree that you will not re-

export the Software nor any other technical data

received from Pioneer, nor the direct product

thereof, except as permitted by the laws and reg-

ulations of the United States and the laws and

regulations of the jurisdiction in which you

obtained the Software.

5. TERMINATION

This Agreement is effective until terminated. You

may terminate it at any time by destroying the

Software. The Agreement also will terminate if

you do not comply with any terms or conditions of

this Agreement. Upon such termination, you

agree to destroy the Software.

6. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS

If the Software is being acquired by or on behalf

of the United States government or any other

entity seeking or applying rights similar to those

customarily claimed by the United States govern-

ment, the Data is licensed with “Limited Rights”.

Utilization of the Software is subject to the

restrictions specified in the “Rights in Technical

Data” clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, or the

equivalent clause for non-defense agencies. Pio-

neer Electronics (USA) Inc., 2265 East 220th

Street, Long Beach, CA 90810.

7. MISCELLANEOUS

This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer

and you regarding its subject matter. No change

in this Agreement shall be effective unless

agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer retailers

do not have the authority to change this Agree-

ment. This Agreement shall be governed by and

construed in accordance with the internal laws of

the State of California. If any provision of this

Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable,

the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall

remain in full force and effect.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 6 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

PIONEER AVIC-Z2 - for Canada

THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU,

AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER ELECTRON-

ICS OF CANADA, INC. (“PIONEER”). PLEASE

READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS

AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE

SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER

PRODUCTS. BY USING THE SOFTWARE

INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU

AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS

AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A

DATABASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUP-

PLIER(S) (“SUPPLIERS”), AND YOUR USE OF

THE DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLI-

ERS’ SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE

ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT (Refer to page

9). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE

TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PROD-

UCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND ANY

WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS OF

RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO THE AUTHO-

RIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM WHICH YOU

PURCHASED THEM. USE OF THE SOFTWARE

SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR CONSENT TO

THE LICENSE AGREEMENT.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE

Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, nonex-

clusive license to use the software installed on

the Pioneer products (the “Software”) and the

related documentation solely for your own per-

sonal use or for internal use by your business,

only on such Pioneer products.

You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,

port, modify or make derivative works of the Soft-

ware. You shall not loan, rent, disclose, publish,

sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market or other-

wise transfer the Software or use it in any manner

not expressly authorized by this agreement. You

shall not derive, or attempt to derive, the source

code or structure of all or any portion of the Soft-

ware by reverse engineering, disassembly,

decompilation, or any other means. You shall not

use the Software to operate a service bureau or

for any other use involving the processing of data

for other persons or entities.

Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-

right, trade secret, patent and other proprietary

ownership rights in the Software. The Software is

copyrighted and may not be copied, even if modi-

fied or merged with other products. You shall not

alter or remove any copyright notice or propri-

etary legend contained in or on the Software.

You may transfer all of your license rights in the

Software, the related documentation and a copy

of this License Agreement to another party, pro-

vided that the party reads and agrees to accept

the terms and conditions of this License Agree-

ment.

2. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY

The Software and related documentation are pro-

vided to you “AS IS”. PIONEER AND ITS LICEN-

SOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2 and 3,

Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be collectively

referred to as “Pioneer”) MAKES AND YOU

RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFTWARE,

WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND ALL

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT-

NESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR

THE SOFTWARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED.

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLU-

SION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. The Software is

complex and may contain some nonconformities,

defects or errors. Pioneer does not warrant that

the Software will meet your needs or expecta-

tions, that operation of the Software will be error-

free or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities

can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer

does not make any representations or warranties

regarding the use or results of the use of the Soft-

ware in terms of its accuracy, reliability or other-

wise.

3. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR

ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS INCURRED BY

YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COM-

PENSATORY, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,

CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES,

LOST PROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES OR

BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR

COMMITMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH ANY

BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAM-

AGES) RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR

INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIO-

NEER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR

SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD

OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES

TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVID-

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 7 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

UALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING

WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT,

BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT

LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER

TORTS. IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER

OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS

AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON

WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR

INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER’S

LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT

(50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE

ENCLOSED PIONEER PRODUCT.

Some states do not allow the exclusion or limita-

tion of incidental or consequential damages, so

the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to

you. This warranty disclaimer and limitation of lia-

bility shall not be applicable to the extent that

they are prohibited by any applicable federal,

state or local law which provides that such a dis-

claimer or limitation cannot be waived or pre-

empted.

4. EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES

You agree and certify that neither the Software

nor any other technical data received from Pio-

neer, nor the direct product thereof, will be

exported outside Canada except as authorized

and as permitted by the laws and regulations of

Canada. If the Software has been rightfully

obtained by you outside of Canada, you agree

that you will not re-export the Software nor any

other technical data received from Pioneer, nor

the direct product thereof, except as permitted by

the laws and regulations of Canada and the laws

and regulations of the jurisdiction in which you

obtained the Software.

5. TERMINATION

This Agreement is effective until terminated. You

may terminate it at any time by destroying the

Software. The Agreement also will terminate if

you do not comply with any terms or conditions of

this Agreement. Upon such termination, you

agree to destroy the Software.

6. MISCELLANEOUS

This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer

and you regarding its subject matter. No change

in this Agreement shall be effective unless

agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer retailers

do not have the authority to change this Agree-

ment. This Agreement shall be governed by and

construed in accordance with the internal laws of

the Province of Ontario and the federal laws of

Canada applicable therein. If any provision of this

Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable,

the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall

remain in full force and effect.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 8 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Terms and Conditions for the

Tele Atlas Data

THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT (THE “AGREE-

MENT”) BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, AND

TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA, INC. (“Tele

Atlas”). BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE

ATLAS DATA, YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS AND

CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.

1. Grant of License.

Tele Atlas grants you a non-transferable, non-

exclusive license to use the map data and busi-

ness points of interest information (the “POIs”),

(together, the “Data”) contained on these discs,

solely for personal, non-commercial use and not

to operate a service bureau or for any other use

involving the processing of data of other persons

or entities. You may make one (1) copy of the

Data for archival or backup purposes only but you

may not otherwise copy, reproduce, modify, make

derivative works, derive the structure of or reverse

engineer the Data. The Data contains confiden-

tial and proprietary information and materials,

and may contain trade secrets, so you agree to

hold the Data in confidence and in trust and not

to disclose the Data or any portions in any form,

including by renting, leasing, publishing, leasing,

sublicensing or transferring the Data to any third

party. You are prohibited from removing or

obscuring any copyright, trademark notice or

restrictive legend.

2. Ownership.

The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its

licensors and they retain all ownership rights in

the Data. You agree not to alter, remove, obliter-

ate, or obscure any copyright notice or proprie-

tary legend contained in or on the Data.

3. Warranty Disclaimer.

THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND

“WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS” AND TELE ATLAS

AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL

WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUD-

ING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WAR-

RANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,

MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY,

ACCURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTIC-

ULAR PURPOSE. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN

ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED BY TELE

ATLAS OR ANY OF ITS AGENTS, EMPLOYEES OR

THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS SHALL CREATE A

WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO

RELY ON ANY SUCH ADVICE OR INFORMATION.

THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES IS AN

ESSENTIAL CONDITION OF THE AGREEMENT.

4. Limitation of Liability.

TELE ATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR

ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL,

INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING

OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT, INCLUDING LOST

PROFITS OR COSTS OF COVER, LOSS OF USE

OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE,

REGARDLESS OF WHETHER YOU WERE

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAM-

AGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE

CONTRARY CONTAINED HEREIN, TELE ATLAS

SHALL HAVE NO MONETARY LIABILITY TO YOU

FOR ANY CAUSE (REGARDLESS OF THE FORM

OF ACTION) UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS

AGREEMENT.

5. Termination.

This Agreement will terminate immediately and

automatically, without notice, if you breach any

term of this Agreement. You agree that in the

event of termination of the Agreement, you shall

return the Data (including all documentation and

all copies) to Tele Atlas and its suppliers.

6. Indemnity.

You agree to indemnify, defend and hold Tele

Atlas, its Licensors, and its Suppliers (including

their respective licensors, suppliers, assignees,

subsidiaries, affiliated companies, and the

respective officers, directors, employees, share-

holders, agents and representatives) free and

harmless from and against any liability, loss,

injury (including injuries resulting in death),

demand, action, cost, expense, or claim of any

kind or character, including but not limited to

attorney's fees, arising out of or in connection

with any use or possession by you of the Data.

7. U.S. Government Rights.

If you are an agency, department, or other entity

of the United States Government, or funded in

whole or in part by the United States Govern-

ment, then use, duplication, reproduction,

release, modification, disclosure or transfer of

this commercial product and accompanying doc-

umentation, is restricted in accordance with the

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 9 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

LIMITED or RESTRICTED rights as described in

DFARS 252.227-7014(a)(1) (JUN 1995) (DOD com-

mercial computer software definition), DFARS

227.7202-1 (DOD policy on commercial computer

software), FAR 52.227-19 (JUN 1987) (commercial

computer software clause for civilian agencies),

DFARS 252.227-7015 (NOV 1995) (DOD technical

data – commercial items clause); FAR 52.227-14

Alternates I, II, and III (JUN 1987) (civilian agency

technical data and noncommercial computer

software clause); and/or FAR 12.211 and FAR

12.212 (commercial item acquisitions), as appli-

cable. In case of conflict between any of the FAR

and DFARS provisions listed herein and this

License, the construction that provides greater

limitations on the Government’s rights shall con-

trol. Contractor/manufacturer is Tele Atlas North

America, Inc., 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH

03766-1445. Phone: 603.643. 0330. The Data is

RESERVED. For purpose of any public disclosure

provision under any federal, state or local law, it

is agreed that the Data is a trade secret and a

proprietary commercial product and not subject

to disclosure.

If you are an agency, department, or other entity

of any State government, the United States Gov-

ernment or any other public entity or funded in

whole or in part by the United States Govern-

ment, then you hereby agree to protect the Data

from public disclosure and to consider the Data

exempt from any statute, law, regulation, or code,

including any Sunshine Act, Public Records Act,

Freedom of Information Act, or equivalent, which

permits public access and/or reproduction or use

of the Data. In the event that such exemption is

challenged under any such laws, this Agreement

shall be considered breached and any and all

right to retain any copies or to use of the Data

shall be terminated and considered immediately

null and void. Any copies of the Data held by you

shall immediately be destroyed. If any court of

competent jurisdiction considers this clause void

and unenforceable, in whole or in part, for any

reason, this Agreement shall be considered ter-

minated and null and void, in its entirety, and any

and all copies of the Data shall immediately be

destroyed.

8. Additional Provisions with respect to

Canadian Data only.

a. No Creation of Mailing Lists.

You are prohibited from using the POIs (i) to

create mailing lists or (ii) for other such similar

uses.

b. Compliance.

You will use the POIs in compliance with all

applicable federal, state and local laws, rules

and regulations.

c. Indemnification.

You shall indemnify and hold infoUSA, Inc.

harmless against all third party claims or liabil-

ity which are based in whole or in part of the

users failure to comply with such laws, rules

and regulations or which result from the use of

the POIs through you.

d. Warranty.

In addition to the Warranties contained in the

Agreement, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT THE

POIS ARE LICENSED ON AN “AS IS” BASIS

WITHOUT GUARANTEE, AND THERE ARE NO

OTHER WARRANTIES MADE WHETHER,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT

LIMITATION, ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FIT-

NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

e. POIs Segregation.

You are prohibited from combining or merging

the POIs with any other POI data. The POIs

shall be maintained in such a way that they are

separately identifiable from all other POI data

at all times.

9. Miscellaneous.

This is the exclusive and complete Agreement

between Tele Atlas and you regarding its subject

matter. Nothing in this Agreement shall create a

joint venture, partnership or principal-agent rela-

tionship between Tele Atlas and you. The internal

laws of California shall govern this Agreement

and you consent to the jurisdiction of the North-

ern District of California or the State of California

for the County of Santa Clara. Sections 2 – 4 and

7 – 11 shall survive the expiration or termination

of this Agreement. This Agreement may be

amended, altered, or modified only by Tele Atlas.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 10 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

You may not assign any part of this Agreement

without Tele Atlas’ prior written consent. You

acknowledge and understand that the Data may

be subject to restrictions on exportation and

agree to comply with any applicable export laws.

In the event that any provision or part of a provi-

sion of this Agreement is determined to be

invalid, illegal, or unenforceable, such provision

or part thereof shall be stricken from this Agree-

ment and the remainder of this Agreement shall

be valid, legal, and enforceable to the maximum

extent possible. Any notice under this Agreement

shall be delivered by courier to Tele Atlas North

America, Inc., Attention Contracts Department,

11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766 USA. The

covenants and obligations undertaken by you

herein are intended for the direct benefit of Tele

Atlas and may be enforced by Tele Atlas directly

against you.

About the Data for the Map

Database

• This database was developed and recorded up

to April 2006. Changes to streets/highways

made after that time may not be reflected in

this database.

• It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use

any part or the whole of this map in any form

without permission from the copyright owner.

• If the local traffic regulations or conditions

deviate from this data, follow the local traffic

regulations (such as signs, indications, etc.)

and conditions (such as construction, weather,

etc.).

• The traffic regulation data used in the map

database applies only to standard sized pas-

senger vehicles. Note that regulations for

larger vehicles, motorbikes, and other non-

standard vehicles are not included in the data-

base.

“NOTICE

rial is proprietary and the subject of copyright protection

and other intellectual property rights owned or licensed

to Tele Atlas. Tele Atlas is an authorized distributor of

selected Statistics Canada computer files under Agree-

ment number 6776 and is an authorized distributor of

selected Geomatics Canada computer files. The product

includes information copied with permission from Cana-

dian authorities, including © Canada Post Corporation.

The use of this material is subject to the terms of a

License Agreement. You will be held liable for any unau-

thorized copying or disclosure of this material.”

About Gracenote

Music recognition technology and related data are pro-

vided by Gracenote

. Gracenote is the industry standard

in music recognition technology and related content

delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copy-

may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents:

#5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,

#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and

other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied

under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:

#6,304,523. Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade-

marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,

and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of

Gracenote.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 11 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

End-User License Agreement

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES

ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS

BELOW.

Gracenote

MusicID

This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of

Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from

Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this appli-

cation to do online disc identification and obtain music-

related information, including name, artist, track, and

title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers

(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions.

You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the

intended End-User functions of this device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own

personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to

assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Soft-

ware or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU

AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,

THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERV-

ERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote

Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If

your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all

use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the

Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under

no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any

payment to you for any information that you provide. You

agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under

this Agreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique identifier

to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a

randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the

Gracenote MusicID service to count queries without

knowing anything about who you are. For more informa-

tion, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy

for the Gracenote MusicID Service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote

Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no

representations or warranties, express or implied,

regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in

the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to

delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change

data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems suf-

ficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software

or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of

Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninter-

rupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with

new enhanced or additional data types or categories that

Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to dis-

continue its online services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT-

NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-

INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT

THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE

OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE

SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE

FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES

OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

Other Precautions

• Part of the data cannot be acquired. The con-

tents of the data in the Gracenote

Database

included in the hard disk drive are not 100%

guaranteed.

•The Gracenote

Database included in the hard

disk drive contains the titles for the 300 000

most frequently accessed albums worldwide

as of November 2006.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 12 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Table of Contents

Introduction

Manual Overview 1

How to use this manual 1

Overview for each chapter 2

Terminology 4

About the definition of terminology 4

Color difference of the map display between day

and night 4

License Agreement 5

PIONEER AVIC-Z2 - for U.S.A. 5

PIONEER AVIC-Z2 - for Canada 7

Terms and Conditions for the Tele Atlas Data 9

About the Data for the Map Database 11

About Gracenote® 11

End-User License Agreement 12

Other Precautions 12

Table of Contents 13

Chapter 1

Before Using the System

Important Safety Information 19

Additional Safety Information 20

To ensure safe driving 20

Features (Characteristics of this software) 21

About XM NavTraffic Service and Pioneer

Navigation 22

Notes for Hard Disk Drive 22

Recording equipment and copyright 22

Notes when writing data to the hard disk drive at

low temperature 23

Points about recording 23

Data saved or recorded by the customer 23

Failure to operate 23

After-sales service for Pioneer products 23

Visit Our Website 23

Chapter 2

Basic Operation

Flow from Startup to Termination 25

How to Use Navigation Menu Screens 26

Displaying the Navigation menu 26

Navigation menu overview 26

Basic Navigation 27

Calculating your destination by using Address

Search 28

Checking and modifying the route 32

When the route guidance starts 33

Canceling the Route Guidance 33

Modifying the Route Calculation Conditions 34

Items that users can operate 34

Checking the Current Route 35

Checking the passing streets with a list 35

Checking the entire route overview on the

map 36

Editing Waypoints 36

Adding a waypoint 36

Deleting a waypoint 37

Sorting waypoints 37

Skipping a waypoint 37

Chapter 3

How to Read the Map Display

How to Use the Map 39

Switching the view mode 39

How to view the map of the current location 39

Roads without turn-by-turn instructions 43

Changing the scale of the map 44

Scroll the map to the location you want to

see 44

Shortcut menu 45

Chapter 4

Modifying Map Configurations

Entering the Map Menu 47

Setting the Item on the Map Screen 47

Selecting the Shortcut 49

Displaying POI on the Map 50

Viewing the Map Color Legend 50

Changing the View Mode for the Navigation

Map 51

Setting the Map Color Change between Day and

Night 51

Changing the Setting of Navigation Interruption

Screen 51

Changing the Map Color 51

Chapter 5

Setting a Route to Your Destination

Searching for Points of Interest (POI)

Statewide 53

Searching for a POI directly from the name of

the facilities 53

Searching for POIs by specifying a category

first 54

Searching for POIs by specifying a city name

first 55

Finding a POI in the Vicinity 55

Searching for the facilities around the current

position 55

Searching for the facilities around the scroll

cursor 56

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 13 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Searching for Your Destination by Specifying the

Telephone Number 57

Route Calculation to Your Home Location or to

Your Favorite Location 57

Selecting Destination from the Destination Histo-

ry and Address Book 58

Registering/deleting POI Shortcuts 58

Registering a POI shortcut 58

Deleting a POI shortcut 59

Chapter 6

Registering and Editing Locations

Registering Locations Overview 61

Registering Your Home and Your Favorite

Location 61

Registering a Location into Address Book 62

Registering a location by scroll mode 62

Registering a location by Address Book 62

Viewing the Address Book 63

Editing the entry in “Address Book” 63

Deleting the entry in “Address Book” 66

Destination History Operations 67

Deleting the entry in “Destination History” 67

Chapter 7

Using Traffic Information

Using XM NavTraffic Information 69

Viewing traffic list 69

Confirming traffic information on the map 70

Setting alternative route to avoid traffic

congestion 71

Selecting traffic information to display 72

Chapter 8

Using XM Tuner and Other Informa-

tion

Using the XM Tuner to View Stock, Sports, and

Other Information 75

Displaying stock prices 75

Storing browsable information 76

Displaying favorite browsable Information 76

Checking the Reception Status of the XM

Tuner 77

Emergency Info 77

Checking the information registered as Emer-

gency Info 77

Searching for car service in an emergency 79

Registering user information 80

Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Display 80

Chapter 9

Using Hands-free Phoning

Hands-free Phoning Overview 83

Preparing communication devices 83

Setting up for hands-free phoning 84

Receiving a phone call 86

Making a phone call 87

Transferring the phone book 89

Registering a phone number in “Dial

Favorites” 90

Editing the entry in “Phone Book” 90

Editing the received call or dialed number

history 92

Chapter 10

Modifying the General Settings for

Navigation Functions

Entering the Settings Menu 95

Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone 95

Customizing the Regional Settings 95

Changing the language for navigation guidance

and menu 95

Setting the time difference 96

Customizing the keyboard layout 96

Changing the unit between km and miles 97

Changing the virtual speed of the vehicle 97

Checking the Setting Related with Hardware 97

Checking the connections of leads and installa-

tion positions 97

Checking sensor learning status and driving

status 98

Correcting the installation angle 99

Checking the device and version

information 99

Checking the hard disk information 99

Registering the Home Location and Favorite

Location 100

Changing the Background Picture 100

Using the Demonstration Guidance 102

Correcting the Current Location 102

Restoring the Default Setting 102

Chapter 11

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD

Drive and Radio)

Basic Operation 103

Switching the Audio operation screen 103

Selecting a source 103

About Steering Remote Control 104

Viewing the audio operation screen and display-

ing the Audio Settings menu 105

Operating a Music CD 106

Selecting [CD] as the source 106

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 14 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

About auto hard disk recording 106

Screen configuration 106

Touch key operation 107

Operating the CD-ROM (MP3 disc) 108

Selecting [ROM] as the source 108

Screen configuration 108

Touch key operation 108

Notes on playing MP3 disc 109

Operating the DVD 110

Selecting [DVD] as the source 110

Screen configuration 110

Touch key operation 111

Searching for a desired scene, starting play-

back from a specified time 112

Entering the numerical commands 113

Operating the Radio (FM) 113

Selecting [FM] as the source 113

Screen configuration 113

Touch key operation 114

Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies 114

Tuning in strong signals 114

Operating the Radio (AM) 115

Selecting [AM] as the source 115

Screen configuration 115

Touch key operation 115

Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies 116

Tuning in strong signals 116

Chapter 12

Using the AV Source (Music Li-

brary)

Music Library Recording 117

Recording all tracks in a CD 118

Recording a CD manually 118

Recording only the first track of a CD 118

Stopping CD recording 118

Notes on CD recording 119

Music Library Play 119

Selecting [LIBRARY] as the source 119

Screen configuration 119

Touch key operation 120

Creating a playlist with a customized order 122

Editing a playlist or tracks 123

Assigning another candidate for title

information 128

Chapter 13

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

Operating the XM Satellite Radio 129

Selecting [XM] as the source 129

Screen configuration 129

Touch key operation 130

Display the Radio ID 131

Selecting a channel from the XM channel list

display 131

Using “My Mix” function 132

Using the direct traffic announcement

function 133

Operating the SIRIUS Satellite Radio 133

Selecting [SIRIUS] as the source 133

Touch key operation 134

Selecting teams for Game Alert 135

Displaying game information (Game Info) 136

Using “My Mix” function 136

Using the Traffic & Weather preset function 137

Chapter 14

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®,

TV)

Operating the Multi-CD Player 139

Selecting [M-CD] as the source 139

Screen configuration 139

Touch key operation 139

Operating the iPod® 141

Selecting [iPod] as the source 141

Screen configuration 141

Touch key operation 141

Browsing for a song 142

Operating the TV tuner 143

Selecting [TV] as the source 143

Screen configuration 143

Touch key operation 143

Storing and recalling broadcast stations 144

Storing the strongest broadcast stations

sequentially 144

Chapter 15

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT,

AUX)

Operating the AV Input Source (AV) 145

Selecting [AV INPUT] as the source 145

Operating the External Unit (EXT) 145

Selecting [EXT 1] or [EXT 2] as the source 145

Screen configuration 145

Touch key operation 145

Operate the external unit by using 1 key — 6

key 146

Operate the external unit by using Function 1 —

Function 4 146

Switching the automatic and manual

function 147

Operating the AUX Input Source (AUX) 147

Selecting [AUX] as the source 147

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 15 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting re-

lated with Audio Visual

AV Setting Overview 149

How to Operate the Audio Settings screen 149

Customizing the Audio Settings Items 149

Using the equalizer 149

Setting the simulated sound stage 151

Using balance adjustment 151

Using subwoofer output 152

Using non fading output 152

Adjusting loudness 152

Using the high pass filter 152

Adjusting source levels 153

Customizing the System Settings Items 153

How to view and operate the System

Settings 153

Setting up the built-in DVD drive 154

Changing the wide screen mode 155

Setting for rear view camera 156

Setting the video input 156

Switching the auxiliary setting 157

Switching the muting/attenuation timing 157

Switching the muting/attenuation level 157

Changing the voice output of the navigation

guidance 158

Switching the auto antenna setting 158

Setting the clock display on the video

image 158

Setting the CD recording mode 158

Setting the rear output and subwoofer

controller 158

Switching the 5.1ch setting 159

Other Functions 159

Selecting the video for “Rear display” 159

Operating the picture adjustment 160

Switching the backlight on or off 160

Language Code Chart for DVD 161

Chapter 17

Operating Your Navigation System

with Voice

To Ensure Safe Driving 163

Basics of Voice Operation 163

Flow of voice operation 163

To start voice operation 164

Tips for Voice Operation 165

An Example of Voice Operation 165

Search for POI in vicinity 165

Search for the playlist 166

Available Voice Commands 167

Basic commands for voice operation 168

Voice commands related to navigation 168

Voice commands related to hands-free

phoning 170

Voice commands related to AV operation 170

After checking traffic information manually 171

Location screen (A) and (B) 171

Other Voice Commands 173

Other voice commands for navigation

operation 173

Other voice commands for AV operation 175

Category list for vicinity search 176

Appendix

Returning the Navigation System to the Default or

Factory Settings 179

Setting items to be deleted 180

If system errors frequently occur 181

Completely returning the navigation

system 181

Adjusting the Response Positions of the Touch

Panels (Touch Panel Calibration) 182

Positioning Technology 183

Positioning by GPS 183

Positioning by dead reckoning 183

How do GPS and dead reckoning work

together? 184

Handling Large Errors 185

When the positioning by GPS is impossible 185

Vehicles that Cannot Obtain Speed Pulse

Data 185

Conditions Likely to Cause Noticeable Positioning

Errors 185

Troubleshooting 188

Problems in the screen 188

Messages and How to React to Them 192

Messages for navigation functions 192

Messages for Audio Functions 196

Built-in DVD drive 196

Hard disk drive (Music Library) 197

Other sources 197

When the hard disk drive is disconnected 198

Route Setting Information 198

Route search specifications 198

Route highlighting 199

Tracking 199

Displaying POI 199

Detail Information for Playable Media 199

DVD discs and other DVD media types 199

About playing Dual Disc 200

CD-R/CD-RW discs 200

MP3 files 200

Glossary 202

Display Information 205

Navigation menu 205

Shortcut menu 208

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 16 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Menu in the Audio Screen 209

[Audio Settings] menu 209

[System Settings] menu (Page 1) 209

[System Settings] menu (Page 2) 209

Index 210

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 17 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 18 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 1 Before Using the SystemNAVI/AV

Chapter 1

Before Using the System

Important Safety Information

Before using your navigation system, be sure to

read and fully understand the following safety

information:

• Do not attempt to install or service your

navigation system by yourself. Installation

or servicing of the navigation system by

persons without training and experience in

electronic equipment and automotive

accessories may be dangerous and could

expose you to the risk of electric shock or

other hazards.

• When a route is calculated, the route and

voice guidance for the route is automati-

cally set. Also, for day or time traffic regu-

lations, only information about traffic

regulations at the time when the route was

calculated is shown. One-way streets and

street closures may not be taken into con-

sideration. For example, if a street is open

during the morning only, but you arrive

later, it would be against the traffic regula-

tions so you cannot drive along the set

route. When driving, please follow the

actual traffic signs. Also, the system may

not know some traffic regulations.

❒ Read the entire manual before operating this

navigation system.

❒ The navigation features of your navigation sys-

tem (and rear view camera option if pur-

chased) are intended solely as an aid to you in

the operation of your vehicle. It is not a substi-

tute for your attentiveness, judgment, and

care when driving.

❒ Do not operate this navigation system (or the

rear view camera option if purchased) if doing

so will divert your attention in any way from

the safe operation of your vehicle. Always

observe safe driving rules and follow all exist-

ing traffic regulations. If you experience diffi-

culty in operating the system or reading the

display, park your vehicle in a safe location

and apply the parking brake before making

the necessary adjustments.

❒ Never allow others to use the system unless

they have read and understood the operating

instructions.

❒ Never use this navigation system to route to

hospitals, police stations or similar facilities in

an emergency. Stop using any functions relat-

ing to the hands-free phone and please call

911.

❒ Route and guidance information displayed by

this equipment is for reference purposes only.

It may not accurately reflect the latest permis-

sible routes, road conditions, one way streets,

road closures, or traffic restrictions.

❒ Traffic restrictions and advisories currently in

force should always take precedence over

guidance given by the navigation system.

Always obey current traffic restrictions, even if

the navigation system provides contrary

advice.

❒ Failure to set correct information about the

local time may result in the navigation system

providing improper routing and guidance

instructions.

❒ Never set the volume of your navigation sys-

tem so high that you cannot hear outside traf-

fic and emergency vehicles.

❒ To promote safety, certain functions are dis-

abled unless the vehicle is stopped and/or the

parking brake is applied.

❒ The data encoded in the hard disk drive for the

navigation system is the intellectual property

of the provider, and the provider is responsible

for such content.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 19 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 1

Before Using the System NAVI/AV

❒ Keep this manual handy as a reference for

operating procedures and safety information.

❒ Pay close attention to all warnings in this

manual and follow the instructions carefully.

❒ Do not install this navigation system where it

may (i) obstruct the driver’s vision, (ii) impair

the performance of any of the vehicle’s operat-

ing systems or safety features, including air

bags or hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the

driver’s ability to safely operate the vehicle.

❒ Please remember to wear your seat belt at all

times while operating your vehicle. If you are

ever in an accident, your injuries can be con-

siderably more severe if your seat belt is not

properly buckled.

❒ Never use headphones while driving.

Additional Safety Information

To ensure safe driving

Parking brake interlock

Certain functions (such as viewing of DVD video

and certain touch key operations) offered by this

navigation system could be dangerous and/or

unlawful if used while driving. To prevent such

functions from being used while the vehicle is in

motion, there is an interlock system that senses

when the parking brake is set and when the vehi-

cle is moving. If you attempt to use the functions

described above while driving, they will become

disabled until you stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and apply the parking brake. Please keep the

brake pedal pushed down before releasing the

parking brake.

• To avoid the risk of damage and injury and

the potential violation of applicable laws,

the navigation system is not for use with a

“Video image” that is visible to the driver.

• In some countries or states the viewing of

“Video image” on a display inside a vehi-

cle even by persons other than the driver

may be illegal. Where such regulations

apply, they must be obeyed.

• When applying the parking brake in order

to view “Video image” or to enable other

functions offered by the navigation sys-

tem, park your vehicle in a safe place, and

keep the brake pedal pushed down before

releasing the parking brake if the vehicle

is parked on a hill or otherwise might

move when releasing the parking brake.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 20 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 1 Before Using the SystemNAVI/AV

• Accuracy/performance of interlock may be

impacted by such factors as GPS signal

detection, speed pulse wire connectivity,

and driving habits or conditions of the

place where the vehicle is parked.

• It is strongly suggested that the speed

pulse wire be connected for accuracy of

navigation and better performance of

interlock.

• If the speed pulse wire is unavailable for

some reason, it is recommended that the

pulse generator ND-PG1 (sold separately)

be used.

When you attempt to watch “Video image” while

driving, the warning “Viewing of front seat

video source while driving is strictly prohib-

ited.” will appear on the screen. To watch “Video

image” on this display, stop the vehicle in a safe

place and apply the parking brake. Please keep

the brake pedal pushed down before releasing

the parking brake.

Rear view camera and [Rear View]

mode

With an optional rear view camera, you are able

to use the navigation system as an aid to keep an

eye on trailers or to back into a tight parking spot.

• SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR

REVERSED.

• USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR

MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA.

OTHER USE MAY RESULT IN INJURY

OR DAMAGE.

Features (Characteristics of this

software)

Touch panel key operation

It is possible to operate the navigation functions

and the Audio functions by using touch panel

keys.

Variety of View Modes

Various types of screen display can be selected

for navigation guidance.

• The rear view mode is to use the naviga-

tion system as an aid to keep an eye on the

trailers, or while backing up. Do not use

this function for entertainment purposes.

Wide variety of facility information for

Points of Interest (POI) search

You can search for your destination from all

areas.

– Approximately 12 million POIs are included in

the database.

– Some POI information may not be accurate or

may become inaccurate through the passage of

time. Please directly contact the POI to verify the

accuracy of the information about the POI which

appears in this database. POI information is sub-

ject to change without notice.

Auto reroute function

If you deviate from the set route, the system will

re-calculate the route from that point so that you

remain on track to the destination.

❒ This function may not work in certain areas.

Auto CD title and MP3 file listing

Title lists are automatically displayed when a CD

or MP3 disc is played. This system provides easy-

to-operate audio functions that allow playback

simply by selecting an item from the list.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 21 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 1

Before Using the System NAVI/AV

Compatible voice recognition system

Connecting the supplied microphone will enable

voice operation for both the navigation and AV

functions.

Original image assignment

You can store your own pictures on a CD-R in

JPEG format and import original images in this

navigation system. These imported images can

be set as a background or splash screen, or as a

picture in an address book or phone book entry.

Data communication function with XM

tuner

If you connect the optional XM tuner (GEX-

P10XMT) to the navigation system, you can use

traffic information as a part of the navigation

function. A separate subscription for XM

NavTraffic is required.

In addition, if you subscribe to XM Audio ser-

vices, you can utilize the XM display which fea-

tures station logos and category icons, improving

your XM Audio experience.

➲ “Using XM NavTraffic Information” ➞ Page 69

➲ Listening to XM Satellite Radio ➞ Page 129

❒ The icon of each broadcast station is con-

tained in the hard disk drive based on the data

provided by XM Satellite Radio as of Novem-

ber 2006.

Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio in

the lineup or icon of the broadcast station in

the future may not be supported by the navi-

gation system, and may cause the unit to dis-

play incorrect icons.

About XM NavTraffic Service

and Pioneer Navigation

❒ XM NavTraffic subscription is required and is

available only in select markets. Check

www.xmnavtraffic.com for service availability,

pricing information, and other details. The

availability of XM NavTraffic data depends on

the ability of the antenna to receive a signal.

The signal may be unavailable if obstructed

(e.g., by buildings, mountains, trees, bridges,

bad weather, etc.). XM NavTraffic data also

may be unavailable or not current if the origi-

nal data source is not providing data (e.g.,

scheduled or unscheduled downtime) or has

not been updated, or if there is a time lag

between the time when the original data

source is updated and when you receive the

updated XM NavTraffic data.

❒ Depending on the amount of data being trans-

mitted in your area, it may take several min-

utes to display all of the available data.

❒ The information content depends on the infor-

mation provided by XM NavTraffic Service,

including data refreshing and availability tim-

ing.

❒ Pioneer does not bear responsibility for the

accuracy of the information transmitted.

❒ Pioneer does not bear responsibility for

changes to information services provided by

XM, such as cancellation of the services or

subscription updates.

❒ Traffic information is not taken into account

when calculating estimated time of arrival

time or travel time for your destination.

Notes for Hard Disk Drive

Recording equipment and copy-

right

Recording equipment should be used only for

lawful copying and you are advised to check care-

fully what defines lawful copying in the country in

which you are making a copy. Copying of copy-

right material such as films or music is unlawful

unless permitted by a legal exception or con-

sented to by the right owners.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 22 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 1 Before Using the SystemNAVI/AV

Notes when writing data to the

hard disk drive at low tempera-

ture

Writing to the hard disk drive, such as recording

music to the music library may be disabled when

the navigation system detects abnormally low

temperatures inside the vehicle. Functionality will

become available once the temperature inside

the vehicle returns to normal.

Additionally, if the low temperature continues for

a long time, the system may be booted up with

the preliminary mode because the system can

not recognise the hard disk drive.

➲ “When the hard disk drive is disconnected” ➞

Page 198

Points about recording

❒ Pioneer does not compensate for the contents

that could not be recorded or any loss of

recorded data due to a malfunction or failure

of the navigation system.

❒ The data recorded on the navigation system is

not allowed to be used without permission

from its right holder under copyright law,

except for personal entertainment.

❒ Make sure to check the recording operation

before recording and check the recorded con-

tents after recording.

❒ Recording is not guaranteed for all CDs.

Data saved or recorded by the

customer

❒ The data saved or recorded onto this naviga-

tion system by the customer cannot be

extracted from the navigation system, and

those services cannot be accepted.

❒ The data saved or recorded onto this naviga-

tion system by the customer cannot be guar-

anteed during repair or service. Lost data that

was saved or recorded by the customer is not

guaranteed.

❒ Due to copyrights, the music data recorded

into the Music Library cannot be backed up

during repair or service.

Failure to operate

Should the navigation system fail to operate prop-

erly, contact your dealer or nearest authorized

Pioneer service facility.

Visit Our Website

Visit us at the following site:

In Canada

1. Register your product. We will keep the details

of your purchase on file to help you refer to this

information in the event of an insurance claim

such as loss or theft.

2. Receive updates on the latest products and

technologies.

3. Download owner’s manuals, order product cat-

alogues, research new products, and much

more.

4. Receive notices of software upgrades and soft-

ware updates.

After-sales service for Pioneer

products

Please contact the dealer or distributor from

which you purchased the product for after-sales

service (including warranty conditions) or any

other information. In case the necessary infor-

mation is not available, please contact the com-

panies listed below.

Please do not ship your product to the compa-

nies at the addresses listed below for repair with-

out making advance contact.

For warranty information, please see the Limited

Warranty sheet included with your product.

(

)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 23 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 1

Before Using the System NAVI/AV

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 24 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

NAVI Chapter 2 Basic Operation

Chapter 2

Basic Operation

Flow from Startup to Termina-

tion

At first, please confirm the positions of the follow-

ing features using the “Hardware Manual”.

• MAP button

• MENU button

• AV button

• OPEN CLOSE button

1 Start the engine to boot up the system.

After a short pause, the navigation splash

screen comes on for a few seconds.

When you use the navigation system for the first

time, the [Regional Settings] screen appears.

On the [Regional Settings] screen, you can

change the language or time. (The settings can

also be changed afterward.)

➲ “Customizing the Regional Settings” ➞

Page 95

2 Check the details of the caution message

and touch [OK].

You can operate the navigation system by

touching keys displayed on the screen.

The map of your surroundings is displayed.

If the route is already set, the screen changes

to route guidance mode.

➲ How to read the current position screen ➞

Page 39

➲ “Setting the time difference” ➞ Page 96

❒ To protect the LCD screen from damage,

be sure to touch the touch keys with a fin-

ger. (The stylus is supplied for special cali-

brations. Do not use the stylus for normal

operations.)

3 Press the MENU button.

This displays the navigation menu.

4 Assign a destination by using the touch

panel key and beginning route guidance,

or operating the Audio source.

❒ Touch keys that are not available at this

time are inactive.

➲ Specifying the address and searching the

destination ➞ Page 28

➲ Searching the destination by map ➞

Page 45

➲ Other search methods ➞ Page 53 to 58

➲ How to use audio source ➞ Page 103 to

161

5 Turn off the vehicle engine to terminate

the system.

The navigation system is also turned off.

❒ Until your vehicle reaches the vicinity of

the destination, the set route will not be

deleted even if the engine is turned off.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 25 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 2

Basic Operation NAVI

How to Use Navigation Menu

Screens

The basic navigation is performed by using

menus.

The navigation menu is divided into four menus:

[Destination], [Information], [Map], and [Set-

tings].

Displaying the Navigation menu

1 Press the MENU button.

2 To change to the menu you want to use,

touch the name of the menu displayed at

the top of the screen.

3 If you want to return to the map, press the

MENU button.

Navigation menu overview

[Destination] menu

You can search your destination in this menu.

You can also check or cancel your set route from

this menu.

➲ Specifying the address and searching for the

destination ➞ Page 28

➲ Other search methods ➞ Page 53 to 58

[Information] menu

Use this menu to check traffic information using

the GEX-P10XMT

If you are using a cellular phone featuring Blue-

tooth technology by connecting the Bluetooth

unit (ND-BT1)

(sold separately) to the naviga-

tion system, you can configure Bluetooth settings

or check the outgoing/incoming call history. You

can also register information for emergencies.

❒ [Traffic On Route], [Traffic Events], [Traf-

fic Flow], [Stock Info], [Set My Favorites],

and [My Favorites] can be active only when

the GEX-P10XMT

is connected to the naviga-

tion system.

❒ [Phone Menu] is active only when the Blue-

tooth unit (ND-BT1)

is connected to the nav-

igation system.

GEX-P10XMT

XM Digital Satellite Data & Audio Receiver (sold

separately). Traffic information only available for

cities where information is provided by XM

NavTraffic service. Active subscription to XM

NavTraffic is required to receive traffic informa-

tion on the navigation system.

➲ “Using XM NavTraffic Information” ➞ Page 69

➲ “Emergency Info” ➞ Page 77

ND-BT1

Sold separately. Use for hands-free phoning and

business card transfer via Bluetooth technology.

[Map] menu

You can change the [View Mode], or set the

items to be displayed during the navigation func-

tion.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 26 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 2 Basic OperationNAVI

❒ [View Mode] can be selected only when the

vehicle position is at the current position. If

you want to select [View Mode] while scroll-

ing the map, press the MAP button to center

the current position back on the vehicle posi-

tion.

[Settings] menu

Customize the navigation functions so they can

be used easily.

➲ Settings menu ➞ Chapter 10

Buttons you can use

The availability of a specific button or function is

indicated by its appearance. Depending on the

status of your vehicle, some buttons will be avail-

able, while others will not be.

Active touch key: The button is operable.

Inactive touch key: The function is not available

(e.g., operation is prohibited while driving).

Basic Navigation

• For safety reasons, you cannot use some of

these basic navigation functions while

your vehicle is in motion. To enable these

functions, you must stop in a safe place

and apply the parking brake (see page 20

for details).

Basic flow of operation

1 Park your vehicle in a safe place and

apply the parking brake.

2 Press the MENU button to display the

navigation menu.

3 Select the method of searching for your

destination.

4 Enter the information about your desti-

nation to calculate route.

5 Confirm the location on the map.

6 Check and decide the route.

7 Your navigation system sets the route to

your destination, and the map of your

surroundings appears.

8 After releasing the parking brake, drive

in accordance with the navigation infor-

mation, subject to the important safety

instructions noted on pages 19 and 21.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 27 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 2

Basic Operation NAVI

Calculating your destination by

using Address Search

The most frequently used function is [Address

Search], in which the address is specified and

the destination is searched. This section

describes how to use [Address Search] and the

basics of using the navigation system.

1 Press the MENU button to display the

navigation menu.

2 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu.

3 Touch [Address Search].

Select the method for searching the destina-

tion.

Touch [State code key] to select the state,

province, or territory.

If the destination is in another state, this

changes the state setting.

❒ Once the state has been selected, you only

have to change states when your destina-

tion is outside of the state that you

selected.

The input text is deleted one letter at a time

from the end of the text. Continuing to touch

the button deletes all of the text.

[Back]:

Returns you to the previous screen.

5 Input the house number and touch [OK].

Touch the characters you want to input.

❒ You can also input a prefix to the house

number.

❒ Touching [OK] with no input allows you to

specify and search for the name of the

street, city, or area first.

6 Input the street name.

When the options are narrowed down to six or

less, a list of the matching streets automati-

cally appears.

When you enter the same characters that

were entered previously, the system automati-

cally displays the characters that follow the

entered characters. (Auto fill-in function)

❒ When entering the characters, the system

will automatically search the database for

all possible options. If there is only one let-

ter that could possibly follow your entry,

that letter will automatically be entered.

❒ A list appears if multiple options exist.

Select the desired one from the list and

proceed to the next step. In rare cases, you

may need to input the city name to deter-

mine the city.

State code key

Selected state

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 28 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 2 Basic OperationNAVI

Operation of state selection screen

(1) [A-B] to [U-Z] :

Use to jump to the first state, province, or ter-

ritory that starts with that letter.

(2) :

Use to see the next page or previous page of

the list.

(3) State list:

Press one of these items to set it as search

area.

(4) [Back]:

Returns previous screen.

Operation of street name or city name

input screen (e.g. QWERTY keyboard)

(1) State code key :

Jump to the state selection screen. (Selected

state code is displayed.)

(2) [OK] :

Confirms the characters displayed in (4), and

proceeds to the next step.

(3) [List] :

Lists candidates based on yellow characters

in (4). Touch the desired item in the list to pro-

ceed to the next step.

(4) Text box:

Displays the characters that are entered.

(5) Keyboard:

Use to enter the text.

(6) [Back]:

Returns previous screen.

(1)

(3) (4)(2)

(4) (7)

(9)

(1) (3) (6)

(2)

(5)

(10)

(8)

(11)

(7) :

Deletes the input text one letter at a time from

the end of the text. Continuing to touch the

button deletes all of the text.

(8) [City]:

Touch if you want to specify the destination

city or area first. (This is available only when

(4) is blank.)

(9) [Sym.], [0-9]:

Input text with marks such as [&] or [+] or

numbers.

❒ Touch to toggle the selection.

(10) [Street]:

Touch if you want to return the street input

mode. (This is available only when city name

is blank.)

(11) [Center]:

This can be selected when you enter a city or

area name first. Touch this button to display

the central point of the entered city or area.

Touching [OK] searches the route to the cen-

tral point. Proceed to Step 9.

❒ You can customize the keyboard type to be

displayed on the screen.

➲ “Customizing the keyboard layout” ➞

Page 96

Auto fill-in function

The previously entered characters are stored

for each state and each search function. The

next time a character is entered, suggested

characters will be shown. For example, if [E

220TH ST] has been entered in the past, when

you input just the letter [E], [E 220TH ST] will

be filled in automatically. The manually input

characters are displayed in yellow, and the

suggested characters are displayed in white,

so you can distinguish them. To confirm the

filled-in characters, touch [OK].

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 29 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 2

Basic Operation NAVI

7 Touch the street from the list.

If the selected street has only one matching

location, “Route confirmation screen”

appears. Proceed to Step 9.

8 Touch the city or area where your destina-

tion is located.

When a route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

➲ “Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 32

When a route is already set, “Location confir-

mation screen” is shown.

➲ “Checking the location on the map” ➞

Page 31

❒ If there is no matching location, the navi-

gation system displays “The address

does not exit. Do you want to continue

?”. When you touch [Yes], a place near the

specified location appears. In this case,

pay attention to the displayed location may

not be suitable for your intention. If you

want to try again, touch [No] to return to

the previous screen.

❒ If you did not input the house number in

Step 5, the house number input screen

appear after this step. You should input the

house number now (perform Step 5).

Route calculation starts.

When the route calculation is completed,

“Route confirmation screen” appears.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 30 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 2 Basic OperationNAVI

Operating the street list screen

(1) Number of possible choices

(2) :

Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls

through the list and allows you to view the

remaining items.

(3) :

If all of the characters cannot be displayed

within the displayed area, touching to the

right of the item allows you to see remaining

characters.

(4) :

Touching displays a map of the place you

have selected. (Possibilities for place names

may appear with the list screen.) You can also

set a destination by touching to the right

of the list. Touch [OK] to set the location indi-

cated by the scroll cursor as your destination.

(5) [Back] :

Returns previous screen.

(2)

(4) (1)

(5)

(3)

Checking the location on the map

“Location confirmation screen”

(1)

Calculating the route to the destination

Route calculation starts. When the route cal-

culation is completed, “Route confirmation

screen” appears.

❒ If you press the MAP button or MENU

button during route calculation, the calcu-

lation is canceled and the map screen

appears.

(2)

Scrolling the map

The map display changes to the scroll mode.

You can fine-tune the location in the scroll

mode, and then you can set the location as

your destination or do various operations by

using the shortcut menu.

➲ “Shortcut menu” ➞ Page 45

(3)

Setting the location as a waypoint

The location indicated by the scroll cursor will

be set as a waypoint.

➲ “Editing Waypoints” ➞ Page 36

(1)

(2)

(3)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 31 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 2

Basic Operation NAVI

9 Touch [OK] to decide your route.

Checking and modifying the

route

You can check the route details. You can also

recalculate the route in different conditions.

Route confirmation screen

(1) Route calculation condition

Shows the route has been calculated under those

conditions.

• shows that fastest route is prioritized.

• shows that shortest route is prioritized.

• shows that using highways and main

roads are prioritized.

• shows whether the suggested route

includes freeways.

• shows whether the suggested route

includes toll roads. The current setting

appears.

• shows whether the suggested route

includes ferries. The current setting appears.

• shows whether the suggested route

includes learning routes. The current setting

appears.

In addition, if the calculated route has unin-

tended results, the following icons will be shown.

• shows that freeways could not be avoided.

• shows that toll roads could not be avoided

when the setting [Avoid Toll Road] is [On].

• shows that ferries could not be avoided

when the setting [Avoid Ferry] is [On].

• shows for routes that contain streets or

bridges that are subject to traffic regulations

during a certain time when the setting [Time

restrictions] is [On].

(2) Distance to the destination

(3) Travel time to destination

(4) Set the displayed route

Sets the displayed route as your route, and starts

the route guidance.

➲ When the route guidance starts ➞ Page 33

(5) Display multiple routes

You can select a desired route from multiple

route options. Calculated routes are shown in dif-

ferent colors.

Touching to switch to another

route. Touching [OK] returns to the previous dis-

play.

If you set waypoints, you cannot use the multiple

route option.

❒ There can be cases that the same route is dis-

played even when multiple routes are

searched.

❒ In multiple route calculations, both routes

that use and avoid the freeways are calculated

independently of the setting for [Avoid Free-

way].

(6) Change the route calculation condition

Modify each calculation condition, and recalcu-

late the route.

➲ Refer to the steps after Step 3 of “Modifying

the Route Calculation Conditions” ➞ Page 34

(7) View the route profile

You can check the streets that you will travel to

reach the destination.

➲ Refer to the steps after Step 3 of “Checking

the passing streets with a list” ➞ Page 35

(8) Check the shape of route

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(3) (2) (1)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 32 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 2 Basic OperationNAVI

You can check the overall shape of your route and

the location of destination on the map.

➲ Refer to the steps after Step 2 of “Checking

the entire route overview on the map” ➞

Page 36

(9) Add and edit waypoints

You can add, remove, or sort waypoints.

➲ “Editing Waypoints” ➞ Page 36

When the route guidance starts

Touching [OK] in “Route confirmation screen”

starts the route guidance on the displayed route.

Your navigation system gives you the following

information with the timing adjusted to the speed

of your vehicle:

— Distance to the next turning point

— Direction of travel

— Road number of the freeway

— Arrival of waypoint (If waypoints are set)

— Arrival of your destination

❒

Touching

allows you to turn the

voice guidance on or off.

❒ Touching allows you to hear the

information again.

❒ If you stop at a gas station or a restaurant dur-

ing the route guidance, your navigation sys-

tem remembers your destination and route

information. When you start the engine and

get back on the road, the route guidance

resumes.

❒ If you deviate from the route with guidance set

to [Route View] or [Guide Mode] and enter

a street not recorded on the hard disk drive,

the screen changes to [Map Mode]. When

you return to the route, the screen returns to

the original view and resumes route guidance.

Basic items on the screen

This section describes only the basic items that

are displayed on the Map Mode screen.

➲ Details of the map screen ➞ Page 39

(1) Current location

(2) Distance to the destination

(3) Estimated time of arrival (default)

(4) ON/OFF key for voice guidance

Canceling the Route Guidance

If you no longer need to travel to your destination

or if you want to change your destination, follow

the steps below to cancel the route guidance.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Cancel Route].

A message confirming whether to cancel the

current route appears.

2 Touch [Yes].

The current route is deleted, and a map of

your surroundings reappears.

On this screen, you can also select the follow-

ing items:

[Skip]:

Skip the route to the selected waypoint, and

recalculate the route. (The skipped waypoint

will not be deleted.)

[No]:

Returns to the previous display without delet-

ing the route.

(1)(3)(2) (4)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 33 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 2

Basic Operation NAVI

Modifying the Route Calculation

Conditions

You can modify the conditions for route calcula-

tion and recalculate the current route.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

❒ [Route Overview] is displayed only when

the route is set.

2 Touch [Options].

3 Touch the desired items to change the

route calculation conditions and then

touch [OK].

The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-

mation screen” appears.

When a single route is calculated, the system

searches for the route that meets these condi-

tions as closely as possible.

❒ A single route is calculated in the following

cases:

—When a waypoint is set

—When a route is set through voice recog-

nition

—When auto reroute is carried out

Items that users can operate

Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show that

these are default or factory settings.

Route Condition

This setting controls how the route should be cal-

culated by taking into account the time or the dis-

tance or the main road.

Determine which condition takes priority for

route calculation.

[Fast]*:

Calculate a route with the shortest travel time to

your destination as a priority.

[Short]:

Calculate a route with the shortest distance to

your destination as a priority.

[Main Road]:

Calculate a route that passes major arterial road

as a priority.

Avoid Toll Road

This setting controls whether toll roads (including

toll areas) should be taken into account.

[Off]*:

Calculate a route that may include toll roads

(including toll areas).

[On]:

Calculate a route that avoids toll roads (including

toll areas).

❒ The system may calculate a route that

includes toll road even if [On] is selected.

Avoid Ferry

This setting controls whether ferry crossings

should be taken into account.

[Off]*:

Calculate a route that may include ferries.

[On]:

Calculate a route that avoids ferries.

❒ The system may calculate a route that

includes ferryway even if [On] is selected.

Avoid Freeway

This setting controls whether freeways may be

included in the route calculation.

[Off]*:

Calculate a route that may include freeways.

[On]:

Calculate a route that avoids freeways.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 34 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 2 Basic OperationNAVI

❒ The system may calculate a route that

includes freeway even if [On] is selected.

Time restrictions

This setting controls whether streets or bridges

have traffic restrictions during a certain time

should be taken into account.

❒ If you want to set your route to avoid opened

bridges, select [On].

[On]*:

Calculate a route while avoiding streets or

bridges with traffic restrictions during a certain

time.

[Off]:

Calculate a route while ignoring traffic restric-

tions.

❒ The system may calculate a route that

includes streets or bridges that are subject to

traffic restrictions during a certain time even if

[On] is selected.

• If the time difference is not set correctly,

the navigation system cannot consider

traffic regulations correctly. Set the time

difference correctly (see page 96 “Setting

the time difference”).

Learning Route

The system learns the travel history of your vehi-

cle for each road.

This setting controls whether or not the travel his-

tory should be taken into account.

[On]*:

Calculate the route with the travel history taken

into account.

[Off]:

Calculate the route without the travel history

taken into account.

[Clear]:

Clear the current travel history.

Checking the Current Route

You can check information about the route

between your current location and your destina-

tion.

You can select two methods:

• Checking the passing streets with a list

• Checking the entire route overview on the map

Checking the passing streets

with a list

You can check the route details.

❒ This function is not available if your vehicle

has deviated from the route.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

“Route confirmation screen” appears.

❒ [Route Overview] is displayed only when

the route is set.

2 Touch [Profile].

3 Touch or to scroll the list.

Scroll the list as necessary.

4 Touch [Back].

You can return to the previous display.

❒ When a long distance route is calculated,

your navigation system may not be able to

list all roads. (In this case, the remaining

roads will be shown in the list as you drive

on.)

Names of the streets you are driving through

Driving distance

Turning direction

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 35 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 2

Basic Operation NAVI

Checking the entire route over-

view on the map

You can check the entire shape of the current

route.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

“Route confirmation screen” appears.

❒ [Route Overview] is displayed only when

the route is set.

2 Touch [Detail].

3 Touch the screen and place the scroll cur-

sor on the point where you want to view

the detail or the entire picture. Or zoom in

or zoom out the map scale.

The map around the scroll cursor is zoomed in

or out so you can view the detail or the entire

picture.

4 Touch [Back].

The screen returns to the previous display.

❒ You can also check the overview by using

the shortcut menu if [Whole Route Over-

view] is selected on the [Short-Cut

Selection].

Editing Waypoints

You can select waypoints (locations you want to

visit on the way to your destination) and you can

recalculate the route to pass through these loca-

tions.

Adding a waypoint

Up to 5 waypoints can be selected, and selected

points can be sorted automatically or manually.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

2 Touch [Waypoints].

The waypoint menu screen appears.

3 Touch [Add].

The “Select Search Method” screen appears.

After searching for a point, display it on a

map, then touch [OK] to add to the way-

points. (You can add up to five waypoints in

total.)

4 Touch [OK].

A route is recalculated, and “Route confirma-

tion screen” appears.

➲ “Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 32

❒ If you set waypoints in the route to your

destination, the route up to the next way-

point will appear in light green. The rest of

the route will appear in light blue.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 36 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 2 Basic OperationNAVI

Deleting a waypoint

You can delete waypoints from the route and then

recalculate the route. (You can delete waypoints

successively.)

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

2 Touch [Waypoints].

The waypoint menu screen appears.

3 Touch [Delete], then touch the waypoint

you want to delete.

The touched waypoint will be deleted from the

list.

4 Touch [OK].

The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-

mation screen” appears.

➲ “Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 32

Sorting waypoints

You can sort waypoints and recalculate the route.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

2 Touch [Waypoints].

The waypoint menu screen appears.

3 Touch [Sort], then touch [Automatic] or

[Manual].

[Automatic]:

You can sort the destination and waypoints

automatically. The system will show the near-

est waypoint (distance in a straight line) from

the current location as waypoint 1, and sort

the other points (including your destination)

in order of distance from the waypoint 1.

[Manual]:

You can manually sort destination and way-

points. Touch the destination and waypoints

on the left side of the screen in the order you

want to visit. The touched destination and

waypoints are displayed on the right side of

the screen. Touch [OK] to complete the sort-

ing and the previous screen appears.

4 Touch [OK].

The route is calculated again, and “Route con-

firmation screen” appears.

➲ “Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 32

Skipping a waypoint

If points are set, the next waypoint along the

route can be skipped.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Cancel Route].

2 Touch [Skip].

A new route to your destination through all

remaining waypoints, except for the skipped

waypoint, is calculated.

“Route confirmation screen” appears.

➲ “Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 32

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 37 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 2

Basic Operation NAVI

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 38 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

NAVI Chapter 3 How to Read the Map Display

Chapter 3

How to Read the Map Display

How to Use the Map

Most of the information provided by your naviga-

tion system can be seen on the map. You need to

get to know how the information appears on the

map.

Switching the view mode

There are six types of map display and two addi-

tional view modes.

• Map Mode

• Guide Mode (during route guidance only)

• Route View (during route guidance only)

• Driver’s View

• 2D Twin Map View

• 3D Twin Map View

• Vehicle Dynamics

• Rear View (Only possible when the [Camera

Input] is set to [On].)

1 Press the MAP button to display a map of

the area around your current position.

2 Press the MAP button again.

3 Touch the mode name to select the mode

you want to display.

❒ You can display the view mode screen by

touching [Map] in the navigation menu,

and touching [View Mode].

How to view the map of the cur-

rent location

❒ This example shows a case where [Second

Maneuver Arrow] is set to [View].

Map Mode

Displays the standard map.

Guide Mode

Overlays two arrows onto the standard map

([Map Mode]).

Route View

Displays the name of the street you will travel

along next and an arrow indicating the direction

of travel.

(1)

(4)

(16)

(3)

(10) (20)

(2)

(11)

(6)

(12) (21)

(7)

(5)

(9)

(8)

(1)

(4)

(3)

(15)

(10) (20)

(2)

(11)

(7)

(6)

(12)(21)

(16)

(22)

(8)

(5)

(9)

(1)

(4)

(3)

(15)

(10) (20)

(2)

(11)

(6)

(21)

(7)

(8)

(5)

(9)

(13)

(22)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 39 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 3

How to Read the Map Display NAVI

Driver’s View

Shows a map from the driver’s viewpoint.

About the 3D POI

Depending on the data, the POI may appear in

graphical 3D or plate format with POI mark in the

left screen of [Driver’s View].

❒ The displayed POI in the left screen has no

relation with the setting of [Overlay POI].

2D Twin Map View

You can split the screen in half. The right screen

and the left screen can display a map in different

scales. The 2D map appears on the left screen.

3D Twin Map View

You can split the screen in half. The right screen

and the left screen can display a map in different

scales. The 3D map appears on the left screen.

❒ You can select whether to display or hide the

3D Landmark on the map.

➲ “3D Landmark” ➞ Page 48

Vehicle Dynamics Display

Indicates the status of your vehicle.

• In the Vehicle Dynamics Display mode,

the speedometer display may show a dif-

ferent speed than your vehicle’s actual

speedometer, because your unit measures

speed in a different way.

❒ You can change the items indicated on the left

and right meters.

➲ “Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Display” ➞

Page 80

Rear View

Rear view image is displayed on the left-hand

side of the screen, while the map of your sur-

roundings is indicated on the right.

❒ If the [Camera Input] is set to [Off], the rear

view image is not displayed. Please set it to

[On].

➲ “Setting for rear view camera” ➞ Page 156

❒ When using a camera set to turn On/Off in

conjunction with the reverse signal, no cam-

era images will be displayed in rear view mode

while you are moving forward.

❒ If the camera is set always On, it can display

images in rear view mode when the vehicle is

moving forward. In that case, you should ask

the camera maker or dealer whether the cam-

era’s functions or lifetime would be affected.

(1)

(4)

(3)

(15)

(10) (20)

(2)

(11)

(6)

(21)

(7)

(22)

(8)

(5)

(9)

(13)

(1)

(4)

(3)

(15)

(10) (20)

(2)

(11)

(6)

(21)

(7)

(6)

(8)

(5)

(7)

(22)

(13)

(1)

(4)

(3)

(15)

(10) (20)

(2)

(11)

(6)

(21)

(7)

(6)

(8)

(5)

(7)

(22)

(13)

(2) (10) (20)

(15)

(21)

(9)

(13)

(7)

(5)

(6)

(8)

(22)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 40 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 3 How to Read the Map DisplayNAVI

❒ Rear View can be displayed at all times (e.g.

when monitoring an attached trailer) as a split

screen where map information is partially dis-

played. Please beware that in this setting,

camera image is not resized to fit to screen,

and that a portion of camera image may not

be viewable.

Enlarged map of the intersection

This screen is displayed only when [Close Up

View] in the [Map] menu is [2D] or [3D].

Display during freeway driving

In certain locations of the freeway, lane informa-

tion is available, indicating the recommended

lane to be in to easily maneuver the next guid-

ance.

While driving on the freeway, freeway exit num-

bers and freeway signs may be displayed when in

the vicinity of interchanges and exits.

❒ If the data for these items is not contained in

the hard disk drive, the information is not

available even if there are signs on the actual

road.

City Map

When [City Map] in the [Map] menu is [On], in

certain metropolitan city areas, a more detailed

[City Map] is available at the 0.05 mile (50m)

map scale or lower. (The screen changes auto-

matically when you enter certain metropolitan

city area.)

❒ The detailed city map may not appear for the

following reasons:

— The data for that city area is not contained

in the hard disk drive.

— When you are driving on a freeway.

(13)

(14)

Enlarged map of the intersection (2D)

(23)

Enlarged map of the intersection (3D)

(17)

(18) (19)

(24)

(1)

(4)

(3)

(10) (20)

(2)

(11)

(21)

(7)

(6)

(8)

(5)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 41 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 3

How to Read the Map Display NAVI

Display items

❒ Information with the mark (*) appears only

when the route is set.

❒ Depending on the conditions and settings,

some items may not be displayed.

Current location

The current location of your vehicle. The tip of the

triangular mark indicates your heading and the

display moves automatically as you drive.

❒ The head of the triangular mark is the current

vehicle position.

Destination*

The checker-flag indicates your destination.

Guidance point*

The next guidance point (next turning point, etc.)

is shown by a yellow flag.

Up to the next three guidance points are shown.

Waypoint

The checkered flag and number (1 to 5) indicates

your waypoint.

(1) Name of the street to be used (or next

guidance point)*

(2) Distance to the guidance point*

Touching allows you to hear the infor-

mation again.

(3) Distance to the destination (or distance to

waypoint)*

The distance on this button shows the distance to

the destination or to each waypoint. If waypoints

are set, the distance to the destination and the

next waypoint change with each touch.

❒ When the vehicle position is on the route, the

distance to the destination (or waypoint)

appears. When the vehicle position is not on

the route, the linear distance to the destina-

tion (or waypoint) appears.

(4) Street name (or city name) that your vehi-

cle is traveling along

(5) Compass

The red arrow indicates north. If the scale is less

than 25 mile (50 km), touching the map changes

the direction that it is displayed in (north up/

heading up). When the scale of the map is

greater than 25 mile (50 km), it is fixed to “North

up”.

Heading up:

The map display always shows the vehicle’s

direction as proceeding toward the top of the

screen.

North up:

The map display always has north at the top of

the screen.

(6) Zoom in/Zoom out

Touch to change the map’s scale.

➲ “Changing the scale of the map” ➞ Page 44

(7) Map scale

The scale of the map is indicated by distance.

(8) VOICE icon

Touch to change to the voice recognition mode.

❒ This is displayed only when the microphone

for voice recognition is connected.

➲ The voice operation of the navigation system

➞ Chapter 17

(9) Traffic status

This appears when an XM satellite radio tuner

(GEX-P10XMT, sold separately) is connected and

traffic information is received.

TRFC — No problem.

ANTENNA — Improper antenna connection.

UPDATING — Updating encryption code.

➲ “Checking the Reception Status of the XM

Tuner” ➞ Page 77

(10) Current time

(11) Estimated time of arrival (or travel time

to your destination)*

The display alternates by pressing it.

❒ The estimated time of arrival is an ideal value

calculated based on the value set for

[Average Speed] and the actual driving

speed. The estimated time of arrival is only a

reference value, and does not guarantee

arrival at that time.

➲ How to set average speed ➞ Page 97

(12) Tracking dot

The tracking dot shows the route your vehicle has

traveled by white dots.

➲ Select the tracking setting ➞ Page 47

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 42 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 3 How to Read the Map DisplayNAVI

(13) Map of your surroundings (Side map)

Touching the screen changes the map to the

Scroll mode.

➲ “Scroll the map to the location you want to

see” ➞ Page 44

(14) Distance to a turning point*

Displayed on the enlarged intersection map. The

green bar gets shorter as your vehicle

approaches a turning point.

(15) Next direction of travel*

When you approach an intersection, it appears

green. The screen displays the distance to the

next guidance point.

(16) Direction line*

The direction towards your destination (or scroll

cursor) is indicated with a straight line.

(17) Lane information*

Lane information is displayed the first time there

is a voice guidance on your route. The white

arrow on the green background indicates the rec-

ommended lane. If the next traveling direction

screen is displayed when you approach a inter-

change, junction, or exit, the lane information

disappears.

(18) Freeway signs*

Show the road number and give directional infor-

mation.

(19) Freeway exit information*

Displays the freeway exit.

(20) Bluetooth Connected icon

This icon shows whether the cellular phone fea-

turing Bluetooth technology is connected or not.

You can select between display and non-display.

: Connected

: Disconnected

❒ This is available only when the Bluetooth unit

(sold separately) is connected.

➲ Selecting display or non-display for the

Bluetooth Connected icon ➞ Page 48

(21) Mute Voice Guidance icon

Touch to turn on or off the mute setting of Voice

Guidance. You can select between display and

non-display.

➲ Selecting display or non-display for the Mute

Voice Guidance icon ➞ Page 47

(22) Second Maneuver Arrow*

Indicates the turning direction after next. You can

select between display and non-display.

➲ Selecting display or non-display for the Sec-

ond Maneuver Arrow ➞ Page 48

(23) POI icon

The POI icon may appear on the enlarged map of

the intersection (when available data exists.).

(24) Suggested lane information*

The traveling direction screen is displayed when

you approach a interchange, junction, or exit. The

suggested lane is indicated with a green arrow.

Roads without turn-by-turn

instructions

Routable roads (the route displayed and high-

lighted in purple) have only basic data and can

only be used to plot a navigable route. Pioneer

Navigation will only display a navigable route on

the map (only the arrival guidance for the desti-

nation or a waypoint is available). Please review

and obey all local traffic rules along the high-

lighted route. (For your safety.)

No turn-by-turn directions will be displayed on

these roads.

When your vehicle reaches to the entrance of this

road, the icon will be displayed beside the

direction arrow, indicating that the guidance is

not available with this type of road. The icon

will be indicated for roads that have available

guidance.

The Close-up of intersection function, Auto

Reroute function, Changing the view to [Guide

Mode], or [Route View] are not available.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 43 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 3

How to Read the Map Display NAVI

Changing the scale of the map

Touching or allows you to change the map

scale. Touch and holding or allows you to

change the scale in smaller step within a range of

25 yards to 1000 miles (25 meters to 2000 kilom-

eters). When the view mode is set to Map Mode

or Guide Mode, “Direct scale key” is displayed.

Touching “Direct scale key” changes the map to

the selected scale directly.

❒ The icon of the entry in “Address Book” and

the traffic information icon are displayed

when the map scale is 10 miles (20 km) or

lower.

❒ Traffic lines are displayed when the map scale

is 2.5 mile (5 km) or lower.

❒ POI icons are displayed when the map scale is

0.75 mile (1 km) or lower.

Scroll the map to the location

you want to see

Touching anywhere on the map changes the map

to “Scroll mode” and the map begins scrolling in

the direction you touched. The scrolling stops

when you release your finger from the screen.

Pressing the MAP button returns you to the map

of your surroundings.

❒ Touch the area close to the center of the

screen to scroll slowly; touch near the sides of

the screen to scroll quickly.

(1) Scroll cursor

The position of scroll cursor shows the location

selected on the current map.

❒ When the scale is 0.25 mile (200 m) or lower,

the road appears light blue in the vicinity of

the scroll cursor.

(2) Direction line

This is the line connecting between the current

location and the scroll cursor.

The direction towards the scroll cursor is indi-

cated with a straight line.

(3) Distance from the current location

This shows the distance in a straight line

between the location indicated by the scroll cur-

sor and your current location.

(4) Street name, city name, area name and

other information for this location

(The information displayed varies according to

the scale.)

Touching on the right displays hidden text.

(5) Current location key

Touching returns you to the map of your cur-

rent location.

Direct scale key

(4)

(1)

(3) (2) (5)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 44 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 3 How to Read the Map DisplayNAVI

Viewing the information of a specified

location

An icon appears at registered places (home loca-

tion, specific places, address book entries) and

places where there is a POI icon or traffic infor-

mation icon. Place the scroll cursor over the icon

to view the detailed information.

1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor

to the icon you want to view.

2 Touch .

Information for a specified location appears.

The information shown varies according to

the location. (There may be no information for

that location.)

➲ Registering places ➞ Page 61

➲ Displaying facilities (POI) icon on the map

➞ Page 50

➲ Icons for traffic information ➞ Page 70

❒ appears when the Bluetooth unit

(sold separately) is connected to the navi-

gation system together with the cellular

phone. By touching , you can make

a phone call to the displayed phone num-

ber.

➲ “Dialing from the map” ➞ Page 89

3 Touch [Back].

Returns to the previous display.

4 Touch .

Returns to the map of your surroundings.

❒ You can also return to the map of your sur-

roundings by pressing the MAP button.

Shortcut menu

Shortcuts allow you to perform various tasks,

such as route calculation for the location indi-

cated by the scroll cursor or registering a location

in [Address Book], faster than using the naviga-

tion menu.

You can customize the shortcuts displayed

onscreen. The shortcuts described here are pre-

pared as the default setting.

➲ Changing a shortcut ➞ Page 49

❒ When the Bluetooth unit (sold separately) is

connected to the navigation system, you can

use shortcuts related to phone functions.

❒ Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be

removed from the shortcut menu.

1 When the map is displayed, touch .

: Route Options*

Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This

item can be selected only during route guid-

ance.

You can modify the conditions for route calcu-

lation and recalculate the current route.

➲ “Modifying the Route Calculation Condi-

tions” ➞ Page 34

: Destination*

Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the

route to the place specified with the scroll cur-

sor.

: Registration

by the scroll cursor to the Address Book.

➲ “Registering a Location into Address

Book” ➞ Page 62

: Vicinity Search

Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of

the scroll cursor.

➲ “Finding a POI in the Vicinity” ➞ Page 55

Shortcut menu

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 45 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 3

How to Read the Map Display NAVI

: Overlay POI

Displays icons for surrounding facilities (POI)

on the map.

➲ “Displaying POI on the Map” ➞ Page 50

: Volume

Displays [Volume Setting].

➲ [Volume] ➞ Page 95

: Phone Book

Displays [Phone Book].

➲ “Calling a number in the Phone Book” ➞

Page 87

➲ “Editing the entry in “Phone Book”” ➞

Page 90

: Menu Close

Hides the shortcut menu.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 46 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 4 Modifying Map ConfigurationsNAVI

Chapter 4

Modifying Map Configurations

• For safety reasons, these functions are not

available while your vehicle is in motion.

To enable these functions, you must stop

in a safe place and put on the parking

brake before setting your route (see page

20 for details).

Entering the Map Menu

1 Press the MENU button to display the

navigation menu.

2 Touch [Map] to display the Map menu.

3 Change the setting.

➲ Adjusting each item ➞ Page 47 to 51

❒ This section describes the details of the

setting for each item. Settings marked with

an asterisk (*) show that these are default

or factory settings.

Setting the Item on the Map

Screen

You can select whether to display or hide the icon

on the map or how to display the map.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then

touch [Displayed Info].

The Displayed Info screen appears.

On this screen, you can operate the following

items.

2 To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Close Up View

You can select the method to display the close

up view of the intersection.

2D*:

Displays the close up view with the 2D map.

3D:

Displays the close up view with [Driver’s

View].

Off:

Does not display the close up view.

City Map

You can select whether to display the city map

when in certain metropolitan city areas.

On*:

Automatically switches to the city map when

in a city map area.

Off:

Does not show the city map.

❒ Even if you switch [City Map] to [On], city

map cannot display in areas where there is

no city map data.

Tracking Display

You can trace locations that you have already

passed with white dots on the route.

On (Always):

Displays tracking for all journeys.

On (This journey):

Displays tracking dots but erases them when

the navigation system is turned off (when

turning off the engine of your vehicle).

Off*:

Does not display tracking dots.

Show Mute Button

Selects whether to display or hide the voice

guidance mute key on the map.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 47 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 4

Modifying Map Configurations NAVI

View*:

Displays the voice guidance mute key on the

map.

Hide:

Hides the voice guidance mute key on the

map.

Show Traffic Incident

Selects whether to display or hide the traffic

notification icons on the map when incidents

are on your route.

➲ “Checking traffic information manually” ➞

Page 71

View*:

Displays the icons on the map.

Hide:

Hides the icons from the map.

❒ Notification icons will not be available

when your vehicle deviates from route.

Second Maneuver Arrow

Selects whether to display or hide the second

turn ahead of the vehicle on the map (except

for [Route View]).

➲ About Second Maneuver Arrow ➞ Page 43

View*:

Displays the second turn ahead of the vehicle

on the map.

Hide:

Hides the second turn ahead of the vehicle on

the map.

Bluetooth Connected

Selects whether to display or hide the icon for

current status of the phone connection via

Bluetooth wireless technology.

View*:

Displays the Bluetooth Connected icon on the

map.

Hide:

Hides the Bluetooth Connected icon on the

map.

➲ About Bluetooth Connected icon ➞

Page 43

Address Book Icon

You can select whether to display the Address

Book Icon on the map.

On*:

Displays the Address Book Icon on the map.

Off:

Hides the Address Book Icon on the map.

❒ Even if [Address Book Icon] is set to

[Off], the alarm sounds when you

approach the registered location and the

set image pops up. To turn off the sound

output and image pop up, select [No

Sound] and [No Picture] for the entry.

➲ “Editing the entry in “Address Book”” ➞

Page 63

3D Landmark

You can select whether to display the 3D

Landmark on the map.

❒ 3D Landmark only appears when the view

mode is [3D Twin Map View] and the

map scale is set to 0.25 mile (200 m) or

lower.

On*:

Displays the 3D Landmark on the map.

Off:

Hides the 3D Landmark on the map.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 48 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 4 Modifying Map ConfigurationsNAVI

Selecting the Shortcut

Select shortcuts to display on the map screen. In

the list displayed on screen, the items with red

checks are displayed on the map screen. Touch

the shortcut you want to display and then touch

[OK] when a red check appears. You can select

up to five shortcuts.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then

touch [Short-Cut Selection].

The Short-Cut Selection screen appears.

On this screen, you can operate the following

items.

2 Touch the item that you want to set in the

shortcut menu.

An item with a red check mark is displayed in

the shortcut menu.

: Registration*

cated by the scroll cursor to the Address

Book.

➲ “Registering a Location into Address

Book” ➞ Page 62

: Vicinity Search*

Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of

the scroll cursor.

➲ “Finding a POI in the Vicinity” ➞ Page 55

: Overlay POI*

Displays icon for surrounding facilities (POI)

on the map.

➲ “Displaying POI on the Map” ➞ Page 50

: Volume*

Displays [Volume Setting].

➲ [Volume] ➞ Page 95

: Phone Book*

Displays [Phone Book].

➲ “Calling a number in the Phone Book” ➞

Page 87

➲ “Editing the entry in “Phone Book”” ➞

Page 90

: Dial Favorite 1 to 5

Make a call to the phone number registered in

[Dial Favorites].

➲ “Registering a phone number in “Dial

Favorites”” ➞ Page 90

: Whole Route Overview

Displays the entire route (currently set).

➲ “Checking the entire route overview on the

map” ➞ Page 36

: Stock Info

Displays stock prices.

➲ “Displaying stock prices” ➞ Page 75

: Set My Favorites

Displays the screen of storing browsable item

for XM tuner.

➲ “Storing browsable information” ➞

Page 76

: My Favorites

Displays information on your favorite brows-

able item for XM tuner.

➲ “Displaying favorite browsable Informa-

tion” ➞ Page 76

: Traffic On Route

Displays a list of traffic information on the

route.

➲ “Checking traffic information on the route”

➞ Page 70

: Traffic Events

Displays a list of traffic events information.

➲ “Checking traffic information” ➞ Page 69

: Day/Night Display

Switches Day/Night Display setting.

➲ “Setting the Map Color Change between

Day and Night” ➞ Page 51

: Address Book Icon Display

Switches Address Book Icon Display setting.

➲ “Address Book Icon” ➞ Page 48

3 To finish the setting, touch [OK].

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 49 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 4

Modifying Map Configurations NAVI

Displaying POI on the Map

Displays icons for the surrounding facillities

(POI) on the map.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then

touch [Overlay POI].

2 Touch [Display] to turn it [On].

❒ If you do not want to display the POI icon

on the map, touch [Display] to turn it

[Off]. (Even if [Display] is turned [Off],

the POI selection setting is retained.)

3 Touch the category you want to display.

4 Touch [Select Detail].

[Select All]:

Selects all detailed categories that are

included in that category. (E.g. all categories

of restaurants including Japanese and fast

food.)

[Deselect All]:

Deselects the selected category.

5 Touch the desired detailed category.

❒ You can select up to 100 items from the

detailed category.

Categories that are already set will have a red

check mark.

6 Touch [OK].

Returns previous screen.

7 To finish the selection, touch [OK].

➲ “Viewing the information of a specified

location” ➞ Page 45

Viewing the Map Color Legend

You can browse the type of the roads and areas

displayed on the map.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then

touch [Map Legend].

2 Touch the type which you want to see.

3 Touch or to switch to the next page or

previous page.

On this screen, you can operate the following

items.

[Day]:

You can check the color of the Day screen.

[Night]:

You can check the color of the Night screen.

❒ To return the previous screen, touch

[Back].

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 50 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 4 Modifying Map ConfigurationsNAVI

Changing the View Mode for the

Navigation Map

You can change the map display mode.

❒ You cannot perform this operation in “Scroll

mode”.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then

touch [View Mode].

2 Touch the type that you want to set.

➲ “How to Use the Map” ➞ Page 39

Setting the Map Color Change

between Day and Night

To improve the visibility of the map during the

evening, you can set the timing for changing the

combination of the map color.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.

2 Touch [Day/Night Display] to change the

setting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

[Automatic]*:

You can change the colors of a map between

daytime and nighttime according to whether

the vehicle lights are On or Off.

[Day]:

The map is always displayed with daytime col-

ors.

❒ To use this function with [Automatic], the

Orange/white lead of the navigation sys-

tem must be connected correctly.

❒ You can also change the brightness of the

screen between daytime and nighttime

with [Dimmer].

➲ “Operating the picture adjustment” ➞

Page 160

Changing the Setting of Naviga-

tion Interruption Screen

Set whether to automatically switch to the navi-

gation screen from the AV screen when your vehi-

cle approaches a guidance point such as an

intersection while displaying a screen other than

navigation.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.

2 Touch [AV Guide Mode] to change the

setting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

On*:

Switches from the audio operation screen to

the navigation screen.

Off:

Does not switch the screen.

Changing the Map Color

You can set the map color to bluish or reddish.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.

2 Touch [Road Color] to change the setting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

Blue*:

Changes to blue based map colors.

Red:

Changes to red based map colors.

❒ Check the color change with the [Map

Legend].

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 51 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 4

Modifying Map Configurations NAVI

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 52 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

NAVI Chapter 5 Setting a Route to Your Destination

Chapter 5

Setting a Route to Your Destination

• For safety reasons, these route-setting

functions are not available while your

vehicle is in motion. To enable these func-

tions, you must stop in a safe place and

put on the parking brake before setting

your route. (see page 20 for details).

❒ Some information on traffic regulations

depends on the time when the route calcula-

tion is performed. Thus, the information may

not correspond with a certain traffic regula-

tion when your vehicle actually passes the

location. Also, the information on the traffic

regulations provided will be for a passenger

vehicle and not for a truck or other delivery

vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic regu-

lations when driving.

Searching for Points of Interest

(POI) Statewide

Information about various facilities (Points Of

Interest - POI), such as gas stations, amusement

parks, or restaurants, is available. By entering the

POI Name, you can search for a POI.

❒ You can also narrow down the search range

by initially specifying the name of the city

where your destination is located and also by

initially specifying the category.

❒ Use the functions [POI Search] and [Vicin-

ity Search] in different situations. In [POI

Search], the distance is not limited within the

selected state or province, but in [Vicinity

Search], the distance for the search is limited

to within a 16 km (10 mile) radius.

The following three methods are available for

searching facilities by POI:

• Searching for POIs by specifying a category

first

• Searching for POIs by specifying a city name

first

• Searching a POI directry from a name of the

facilities

Searching for a POI directly

from the name of the facilities

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [POI Search].

2 Touch the state code key of the destina-

tion and select the state or province (or

territory).

➲ Selecting the state or province where you

want to search ➞ Page 28

3 Input the name of the facilities.

[City]:

Touch to specify the destination city or area,

and then input the city name. (This is available

only when [Name] is blank.)

[Category]:

Touch to specify the POI category. (This is

available only when [Name] and [City] are

blank.)

[List]:

Lists candidates based on the yellow charac-

ters in the text box (suggested characters in

white are invalid). Touch the desired facility in

the list to proceed to the next step.

❒ When the options are narrowed down to

six or less, a list of the matching facilities

automatically appears.

When you enter the same characters that

were entered previously, the system auto-

matically displays the character string that

follows the entered characters. (Auto fill-in

function)

➲ “Auto fill-in function” ➞ Page 29

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 53 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 5

Setting a Route to Your Destination NAVI

❒ If less than six POIs in a detailed category

are available, the screen for inputting the

POI name is skipped. Please proceed to

Step 4.

4 Touch .

Touching sorts the items in the list

in the order of distance.

Sorts the items in the list in the alphabetical

order.

❒ You can use this sort function only when

there are 2 000 or less candidates.

5 Touch the desired POI for your destina-

tion.

❒ Icons are helpful for quickly telling the cat-

egory of facilities with the same name.

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

➲ “Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 32

When the route is already set, “Location con-

firmation screen” is shown.

➲ “Checking the location on the map” ➞

Page 31

❒ Touching displays a map of the sur-

roundings of the selected POI.

❒ If the selected POI is the name of a chain

of outlets and consequently the same store

name applies to different locations (the

number of outlets appears next to the

chain’s name), touch the name of the POI

to display a list of those POIs with city

name and street name, touch to set the

POI as your destination.

Searching for POIs by specify-

ing a category first

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [POI Search].

2 Touch the state code key of the destina-

tion and select the state or province (or

territory).

➲ Selecting the state or province where you

want to search ➞ Page 28

3 Touch [Category].

4 Touch the desired category.

POI’s are divided into several categories.

[Name]:

Touch if you want to first specify the POI

name.

[City]:

Touch if you want to first specify the destina-

tion city or area.

[Back]:

Return the Destination menu.

Category

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 55 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 5

Setting a Route to Your Destination NAVI

3 Touch [Select Detail].

[Select All]:

Selects all detailed categories that are

included in that category. (E.g. all categories

of restaurants including Japanese and fast

food.)

[Deselect All]:

Deselects the selected categories.

4 Touch the desired detailed category.

Previously set categories will have a red check

mark.

5 Touch [Back].

Returns to the previous screen.

6 Repeat Step 2 to 5 to select a category.

You can select up to 100 items from the

detailed categories.

7 Touch [OK].

The POI in the selected category and subcate-

gory are searched.

Names of POIs and their distance from your

current location appear. They are listed in

order from nearest to farthest. To the left of

each item is an icon indicating the category.

8 Touch the desired POI to set your desti-

nation.

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

➲ “Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 32

When the route is already set, “Location con-

firmation screen” is shown.

➲ “Checking the location on the map” ➞

Page 31

❒ When you touch , the POIs around the

specified location are shown on a map.

Searching for the facilities

around the scroll cursor

Searching range is approximately 10 miles (16

km) square from the scroll cursor.

❒ This can be used when Vicinity Search is

selected in Short-Cut Selection.

➲ Changing Shortcut ➞ Page 49

1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor

to the place where you want to search for

POI.

2 Touch .

The shortcut menu appears.

3 Touch .

See Step 2 of “Searching for the facilities

around the current position” for the following

operations.

➲ “Searching for the facilities around the

current position” ➞ Page 55

❒ The distance indicated in the search result

is the distance from the scroll cursor to the

facility.

❒ The bottom icon is for shortcuts to your

favorite categories. Touching the shortcuts

icon displays a list of the facilities in a cate-

gory.

➲ “Registering/deleting POI Shortcuts” ➞

Page 58

❒ [Vicinity Search] in the navigation menu

searches your surroundings. On the other

hand, in the case of in the Shortcut

menu (➞ Page 45), the area around the

scroll cursor after the map is scrolled will

be searched.

Distance to the facility

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 56 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 5 Setting a Route to Your DestinationNAVI

Searching for Your Destination

by Specifying the Telephone

Number

If you know the telephone number of your desti-

nation, you can quickly search for your destina-

tion by specifying the telephone number.

❒ You can also search for the phone number

[Phone #] on [Address Book].

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Telephone

Search].

The telephone number entry screen appears.

2 Input a telephone number.

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

➲ “Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 32

When the route is already set, “Location con-

firmation screen” is shown.

➲ “Checking the location on the map” ➞

Page 31

❒ If there is more than one place for the

number input, a list of those places is dis-

played. Touch the item you want in the list.

Route Calculation to Your Home

Location or to Your Favorite

Location

If your home location is registered, the route

home can be calculated by touching a single key

from the navigation menu. Also, you can register

one location, such as your workplace, as your

favorite location, and the route is calculated in a

similar way.

➲ “Registering Your Home and Your Favorite

Location” ➞ Page 61

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Return Home] or

[Go to].

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

➲ “Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 32

When the route is already set, “Location con-

firmation screen” is shown.

➲ “Checking the location on the map” ➞

Page 31

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 57 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 5

Setting a Route to Your Destination NAVI

Selecting Destination from the

Destination History and Address

Book

Any place that has been searched before is

stored in [Destination History]. Places that you

have registered manually, such as your home,

are stored in [Address Book]. Simply select the

place you want to go to from the list and a route

to that place will be calculated.

➲ For information on Address Book ➞ Page 63

➲ For information on Destination History ➞

Page 67

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Address Book] or

[Destination History].

2 Touch your destination name.

When a route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

➲ “Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 32

When a route is already set, “Location confir-

mation screen” is shown.

➲ “Checking the location on the map” ➞

Page 31

❒ You can also see the destination by touch-

ing on the right of the list.

Registering/deleting POI Short-

cuts

You can register up to six shortcuts as your favor-

ite POI. You can also change or delete the regis-

tered shortcuts.

❒ You can register a POI shortcut by touching

on the Shortcut-menu. The steps for reg-

istration and deletion are almost the same as

described below.

Registering a POI shortcut

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].

2 Touch [Set].

Displays a list of already registered POI short-

cuts.

3 Touch [Add].

Displays a POI category list.

4 Touch a category.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 58 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 5 Setting a Route to Your DestinationNAVI

5 Touch the POI selection method.

[Select All]:

Selects all detailed categories that are

included in that category. (E.g. all categories

of restaurants including Japanese and fast

food.)

[Select Detail]:

Selects one of the detailed categories.

Touching a category adds that category to the

shortcuts.

Deleting a POI shortcut

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].

2 Touch [Set].

3 Touch [Delete].

Displays a list of already registered POI short-

cuts.

4 Touch the category to be deleted.

A red check appears on the selected shortcut.

[All], [None]:

A red check will appear or disappear on all

registered categories.

5 Touch [Delete].

Deletes the selected shortcut from the list.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 59 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 5

Setting a Route to Your Destination NAVI

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 60 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 6 Registering and Editing LocationsNAVI

Chapter 6

Registering and Editing Locations

• For safety reasons, these functions are not

available while your vehicle is in motion.

To enable these functions, you must stop

in a safe place and put on the parking

brake before setting your route (see page

20 for details).

Registering Locations Overview

Registering places you visit frequently saves time

and effort. Also, routes to registered locations

can be calculated easily by touching the corre-

sponding touch key. This registered location

information can also be modified. The registered

location appears on the map as an icon.

The registered locations are categorized into

the following three types:

• : Home location:

home location is registered, the route to your

home can be set by simply touching [Return

Home] in the Destination menu. Only one

location can be registered.

• : Favorite location:

example, your office) here. Once your favorite

location is registered, a route to your favorite

location can be set by simply touching [Go to]

in the Destination menu. Only one location

can be registered.

• : (default): Address Book entry:

Once locations are registered, you can set the

route by selecting an item from Address

Book.

❒ The items in Address Book are automatically

updated in alphabetic order. However, “Home

location” and “Favorite location” always

appear at the top (if you registered them).

❒ Selects whether to display or hide all of the

registered location icons on the map.

➲ “Address Book Icon” ➞ Page 48

Registering Your Home and

Your Favorite Location

You can register one home location and one

favorite location. You can change the registered

information later. You might find it useful to regis-

ter your workplace or a relative’s home as your

favorite location.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Defined Locations].

2 Touch [Go to].

When registering your home location, touch

[Home].

3 Search for a location to register.

You can select a method of location search.

➲ Address Search ➞ Page 28

➲ Information on searching locations to reg-

ister ➞ Page 53 to 58

❒ If you select [Map Search], move the

scroll cursor to the place you want to set

and touch [OK].

4 Point the scroll cursor to the location you

want to register and touch [OK].

The location is registered, and the Edit regis-

tered information screen appears.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 61 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 6

Registering and Editing Locations NAVI

➲ “Editing the entry in “Address Book”” ➞

Page 63

5 Touch [OK].

Completes the registration.

Registering a Location into

Address Book

The Address Book can store up to 400 regis-

tered locations. These can include your home

location, favorite places, and destinations you

have already registered.

Registering a location by scroll

mode

You can perform the following operation when

[Registration] is selected in [Short-cut selec-

tion].

1 Scroll to the location you want to register.

2 Display the shortcut menu, and touch

The location is registered, and the Edit regis-

tered information screen appears.

➲ “Editing the entry in “Address Book”” ➞

Page 63

3 Touch [OK].

Completes the registration.

Registering a location by Address

Book

1 Touch [Address Book] in the Destination

menu.

2 Touch [Add].

3 Select the search method, search the loca-

tion, and display the map.

4 When the map of the location you want to

The location is registered, and the Edit regis-

tered information screen appears.

➲ “Editing the entry in “Address Book”” ➞

Page 63

5 Touch [OK].

Completes the registration.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 62 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 6 Registering and Editing LocationsNAVI

Viewing the Address Book

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Address Book].

(1) Home location:

The item displayed with the icon is the

home location. Touch to calculate the route.

➲ “Registering Your Home and Your Favorite

Location” ➞ Page 61

(2) Favorite Location:

The item displayed with the icon is the

favorite location. Touch to calculate the route.

➲ “Registering Your Home and Your Favorite

Location” ➞ Page 61

(3) Address Book entry:

Touch to calculate the route.

(4) :

A map of that location can be displayed.

➲ “Checking the location on the map” ➞

Page 31

(5) :

The information related to that place can be

edited.

➲ “Editing the entry in “Address Book”” ➞

Page 63

(6) :

Sorts the items in the list alphabetically. This

is the default sorting order.

❒ Active if there are items in the list and cur-

rent sort is not alphabetically.

(7) :

Sorts the items in the list in order of the dis-

tance from the vehicle position.

❒ Active if there are items in the list and cur-

rent sort is not by distance form current

position.

(8) :

Sorts the items in the list in order of the

recently used items.

❒ Active if there are items in the list and cur-

rent sort is not by last used.

(9) [Add]:

The screen for selecting the method for regis-

tering the location in Address Book appears.

➲ “Registering a Location into Address

Book” ➞ Page 62

(10) [Delete]:

Deletes the registered locations.

➲ “Deleting the entry in “Address Book”” ➞

Page 66

(11) [Back]:

Returns previous screen.

Editing the entry in “

Address

Book

”

In the Address Book menu, touching on the

right-hand side of the location displays the Edit

registered information screen.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Address Book].

2 Touch on the right-hand side of the

location that you want to edit the informa-

tion for.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) (5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(8)

(7) (5)(6)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 63 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 6

Registering and Editing Locations NAVI

(1) Name

You can enter the desired name.

(2) Pronunciation

You can enter the desired pronunciation inde-

pendently from the name. The registered pro-

nunciation is used for voice recognition.

❒ If nothing is entered in the text box, you

cannot use that item as a voice command.

❒ Depending on which language is being

switched to, you may not be able to use the

registered pronunciation without modifica-

tion.

➲ “Available Voice Commands” ➞ Page 167

(3) Phone #

The phone number of the registered location.

You can dial this number by using (8).

❒ You can search by registered telephone

number.

(4) Icon

The symbol displayed on the map and

Address Book.

❒ Selects whether to display or hide all of the

registered location icons on the map.

➲ “Address Book Icon” ➞ Page 48

(5) Picture

As you approach the location, the registered

image appears.

You can register the picture stored in the navi-

gation system. You can also import and regis-

ter a picture shot from a digital camera by

using a CD-ROM.

(6) Sound

The selected sound is played when you

approach the location.

(7) Modify Location

You can change the registered location by

scrolling the map.

(8)

Only when the Bluetooth unit (sold separately)

is connected to the navigation system and a

cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology

is also connected, you can make a phone call

to the registered phone number (3) by touch-

ing .

➲ “Dialing the entry in the Address Book” ➞

Page 88

When you approach a registered location

while traveling

When a location with a registered sound

effect and image comes within an approx.

0.19 miles (300 m) radius from the vehicle

position, the sound effect plays and the image

appears.

Changing a name

1 Touch [Name], then touch [Yes].

The message confirming whether or not to

is displayed.

When not registering a name as a voice com-

mand, select [No].

2 Enter a new name, then touch [OK].

The current name appears in the text box.

Delete the current name, and enter a new

name between 1 and 23 characters long.

❒ Touch [Small] to enter lowercase letters.

Touch [Caps.] to enter uppercase letters.

Touch to toggle the selection.

3 If the pronunciation is suitable, touch

[Yes].

The details you set are registered, and the

Address Book menu appears.

Alternative options:

[No]:

Completes the registration without editing the

pronunciation.

[Repeat]:

You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the

name you entered.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 64 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 6 Registering and Editing LocationsNAVI

❒ If the pronunciation is not the desired one,

edit the characters so that the pronuncia-

tion matches your desired pronunciation.

❒ When you confirm the pronunciation,

is shown on the left side of the location

name displayed in Address Book menu.

This icon indicates that this name can be

used as a voice command during voice

operation.

❒ You cannot change the name of your

home.

Changing a pronunciation

1 Touch [Pronunciation].

2 Enter a new pronunciation, then touch

[OK].

The current pronunciation appears in the text

box (if already set). Delete the current pronun-

ciation, and enter a new pronunciation

between 1 and 23 characters long.

3 If the pronunciation is suitable, touch

[Yes].

The details you set are registered, and the

Address Book menu appears.

Alternative options:

[No]:

Cancels the editing.

[Repeat]:

You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the

name you entered.

❒ If the pronunciation is not the desired one,

edit the characters so that the pronuncia-

tion matches your desired pronounciation.

❒ When you confirm the pronunciation,

is shown on the left side of the location

name displayed in the Address Book

menu. This mark indicates that this name

can be used as a voice command during

voice operation.

❒ You cannot change the pronunciation of

your home.

❒ If nothing is entered in the text box, you

cannot use that item as the voice com-

mands.

Entering or changing a phone number

1 Touch [Phone #].

2 Input a phone number, then touch [OK].

The Address Information menu appears.

❒ To change a registered phone number,

delete the existing number and then enter

a new one.

Selecting an icon to appear on the map

❒ Selects whether to display or hide all of the

registered location icons on the map.

➲ “Address Book Icon” ➞ Page 48

1 Touch [Icon].

2 Touch the icon that you want to appear on

the map.

The Address Information menu appears.

❒ You cannot change the icon of your home

or your favorite location.

❒ If you set (dot), the registered name of

that entry can be displayed on the map.

The registered name does not appear if

[Address Book Icon Display] is set to

[Off].

Customizing the picture

You can customize a picture for Address book

entry. Some pictures are already stored in the

hard disk drive, and you can also import JPEG for-

mat pictures, such as a picture from your digital

camera, by using a CD-R(-RW). You can use pic-

tures by burning them onto a CD-R (-RW) with

your PC and inserting it into the navigation sys-

tem.

No sounds can be output during .

Be sure to read “Limitations for importing pic-

tures” before creating a CD-R (-RW).

➲ “Limitations for importing pictures” ➞

Page 101

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 65 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 6

Registering and Editing Locations NAVI

Here, a method for changing the picture is

described with an example of loading a picture

stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the navigation sys-

tem.

1 Check that no disc is inserted, and insert

your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading slot.

2 Touch [Picture], and then touch [Import

from Disc].

The list of the pictures stored in the CD-R (-

RW) is displayed.

❒ Touching an option other than [Import

from Disc] allows you to select an image

stored on the hard disk drive.

3 Touch a picture you want to set.

❒ To cancel displaying the picture, select

[No Picture].

4 Touch [Yes].

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

[No]:

Select when you want to change to another

picture. Return to Step 3.

Selecting sound

1 Touch [Sound].

2 Select the desired sound.

❒ To turn off the sound, select [No Sound].

3 Touch [Sound] to hear the sound.

4 Touch [Set].

Changing the position of locations

1 Touch [Modify Location].

The map of the selected area and its sur-

roundings appears.

2 Touch the screen to change its position,

then touch [OK].

Deleting the entry in “

Address

Book

”

Items registered in the Address Book can be

deleted. All entries of the data in the Address

Book can be deleted at once.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Address Book].

2 Touch [Delete].

“Delete from Address Book” screen appears.

3 Select the location you want to delete.

A check mark appears by the selected loca-

tion.

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

[All]:

Selects all entries.

[None]:

Displayed when all locations are selected.

Cancels all selected locations.

4 Touch [Delete].

5 Select [Yes].

The data you selected is deleted.

Alternative option:

[No]:

Cancels the deletion and returns to Step 4.

❒ Because deleted data cannot be restored,

take extra care not to delete by mistake.

No sounds can be output during .

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 66 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 6 Registering and Editing LocationsNAVI

Destination History Operations

The points to which a route has been calculated

in the past are automatically saved in Destina-

tion History.

❒ If no location is stored in Destination History,

you cannot select [Destination History]. (If

you perform a route calculation, you can

select [Destination History].)

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Destination History].

(1) Destination history:

Touch to calculate the route.

(2) [Delete]:

Deletes the selected history.

(3) [Back]:

Returns to the previous screen.

Deleting the entry in “

Destination

History

”

Items in the Destination History can be

deleted. All entries in the Destination History

can be deleted at once.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Destination History].

2 Touch [Delete].

“Delete from History” screen appears.

3 Select the location you want to delete.

A check mark appears by the selected loca-

tion.

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

[All]:

Selects all entries.

[None]:

Displayed when all locations are selected.

Cancels all selected locations.

4 Touch [Delete].

5 Select [Yes].

The data you selected is deleted.

Alternative option:

[No]:

Cancels the deletion and returns to Step 4.

❒ Because deleted data cannot be restored,

take extra care not to delete by mistake.

(1)

(2)

(3)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 67 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 6

Registering and Editing Locations NAVI

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 68 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

NAVI Chapter 7 Using Traffic Information

Chapter 7

Using Traffic Information

Using XM NavTraffic Informa-

tion

If you have a GEX-P10XMT XM Digital Satellite

Data & Audio Receiver (sold separately) attached

to the navigation system and have an active sub-

scription to XM NavTraffic service, you can view

current traffic conditions and information on your

navigation display. When the unit receives

updated traffic information, the navigation sys-

tem will overlay the traffic information on your

map and also display detailed text information

when available. When you are traveling along a

route and there is traffic information on your cur-

rent route, the system will detect it and ask you if

you would like to be rerouted, or suggest another

route automatically.

❒ The system acquires the traffic information up

to 100 miles in radius from the vehicle posi-

tion. (If there is a lot of traffic information

around your vehicle, the radius will be shorter

than 100 miles.)

❒ The navigation system provides the following

functions by using the information from XM

NavTraffic:

— Displaying a list of traffic information

— Displaying traffic information on a map

— Suggesting a route to avoid traffic conges-

tion by using traffic information

❒ The term “traffic congestion” in this section

indicates the following types of traffic informa-

tion: stop and go, stopped traffic, closed/

blocked roads. This information is always

taken into consideration when checking your

route, and the information related with these

events cannot be turned off. If you select other

traffic information in [Traffic Settings], the

information can be displayed in a list or on a

map.

➲ “Selecting traffic information to display” ➞

Page 72

Viewing traffic list

Traffic Information is displayed onscreen in a list.

This allows you to check how many traffic inci-

dents have occurred, their location, and their dis-

tance from your current position.

Checking traffic information

Traffic information except traffic flow information

is displayed onscreen in a list.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Traffic Events].

The list with received traffic information is

shown.

2 Touch or to view the incident list.

Places (street names) where incidents have

occurred are displayed in the list.

(1) Street or place

(2) Direction

(3) Incident

(4) Distance to the location

(5) The incident numbers currently dis-

played and the total number of incidents

❒ The incidents that have already been read

will be displayed in white. Unread inci-

dents will be in yellow.

(6) Sort key

You can sort the traffic information in alpha-

betical order.

You can sort the traffic information by dis-

tance from your current position.

(3)

(1) (2) (4)

(6)

(7)

(5)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 69 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 7

Using Traffic Information NAVI

For the list displayed when you touch [Traffic

Events], the list will be sorted according to

the linear distance from the vehicle position to

the traffic information.

For the list displayed when you touch [Traffic

On Route], the list will be sorted according to

the distance from the vehicle position to the

traffic information.

You can sort the traffic information according

to the incident.

The list will be sorted in the order of closed/

blocked roads, traffic congestion, accidents,

road works, and others.

When new traffic information is received, cur-

rent information is changed, or old informa-

tion has been removed, the list is updated to

reflect the new situation.

(7)

Touching allows you to check the location

on a map. (Traffic information without posi-

tional information cannot be checked on a

map.)

3 Select an incident you want to view in

detail.

The details of the selected incident are dis-

played.

❒ Touching an incident you want to see

allows you to view the detailed information

of the incident. If the information cannot

be displayed on one screen, touch or

to view the remaining information.

4 Touch [Back] to return to the list with

traffic information.

A list with traffic information appears again.

Checking traffic information on the

route

All traffic information on the current route

(including traffic flow information) is displayed

onscreen in a list.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Traffic On Route].

The currently set traffic information on the

route appears on screen.

❒ The method for checking the content dis-

played on the screen is the same for

“Checking traffic information”.

Checking traffic flow information on the

list

The traffic flow information can also be displayed

as an onscreen list.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Traffic Flow].

The list with the traffic flow information is

shown.

(mph):

You can sort the traffic information by the

average speed.

❒ The other methods for checking the traffic

flow information displayed on screen is the

same for “Checking traffic information”.

Confirming traffic information

on the map

❒ A line displayed only when the map scale

is 2.5 mile (5 km) or lower.

❒ Icon appears only when the scale on the

map is 10 mile (20 km) or lower. If the scale

is changed, the icons are resized accord-

ing to the selected scale.

Traffic event icon and line

The traffic event information displayed on the

map is as follows.

with yellow line:

Stop and go traffic

with red line:

Stopped traffic

with black line:

Closed/blocked roads

Traffic event icon

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 70 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 7 Using Traffic InformationNAVI

etc.:

For the meaning of the icon, see [Traffic Set-

tings] in the Information menu.

➲ “Selecting traffic information to display” ➞

Page 72

If you want to check the traffic information details

at the map, move the scroll cursor onto an icon

such as and touch . This allows you to view

place names and other detail information.

Traffic flow information icon and line

Red, yellow, or green blinking lines may appear

on either side of a road. In addition to these blink-

ing lines, a round icon with a number may appear

on the map. The number in the icon indicates the

actual average speed of that specific area. These

colors indicate the average speed at which traffic

is flowing along these streets. Here is a guide to

the colors and the average speed they indicate:

Red: average speed in this area is between 5

mph to 15 mph (8 km/h to 24 km/h)

Yellow: average speed in this area is between 20

mph to 40 mph (32 km/h to 64 km/h)

Green: average speed in this area is 45 mph (72

km/h) or faster (An icon without a number indi-

cates the average speed of the road is more than

45 mph (72km/h))

❒ The traffic flow line can be used only when

[Traffic Settings] is selected.

➲ “Selecting traffic information to display” ➞

Page 72

If you want to check the traffic information details

at the map, move the scroll cursor onto an icon

such as and touch . This allows you to view

place names and other detail information.

Setting alternative route to

avoid traffic congestion

The navigation system checks at certain time

intervals whether or not there is the traffic infor-

mation on your route. If the navigation system

detects any traffic congestion on your current

route, the system tries to find a better route in the

background.

❒ Following types of traffic incidents on the

route will be checked: stop and go, stopped

traffic, and closed/blocked roads.

❒ Traffic flow information is taken into account

only when [Traffic Flow] in [Traffic Set-

tings] is checked.

Checking traffic congestion automati-

cally

If there is information about traffic congestion on

your current route and if an alternative route can

be found, the navigation system will recommend

a new alternative route automatically. In such a

case, the following screen will appear.

❒ There is no action if the system cannot find

any traffic congestion information on your

route or the system cannot find an alternative.

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

[New]:

The recommended route is displayed on the

screen.

[Current]:

The current route is displayed on the screen.

[OK]:

The displayed route is set.

❒ When no selection is made, the screen

returns to previous screen.

Checking traffic information manually

Touching notification icon on the map screen

allows you to check traffic information on your

route while icon is displayed. Only if there is any

ffi

con

Distance from the current position of

your vehicle to the point of entry int

the new route.

Difference in distance and travel time

between existing route and new route.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 71 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 7

Using Traffic Information NAVI

traffic information on your route, notification icon

is displayed on the navigation map screen.

❒ Notification icon will not be available when

your vehicle deviate from route.

❒ Traffic flow information is taken into account

only when [Traffic Flow] in [Traffic Set-

tings] is checked.

1 Set [Show Traffic Incidents] to [View].

➲ “Show Traffic Incident” ➞ Page 48

2 Press the MAP button to display the cur-

rent location.

The icon appears when the system acquires

traffic information on the current route.

3 Touch icon during the icon is displayed.

The displayed icon indicates the type of the

traffic information.

4 Touch [Detour] to search for an alterna-

tive route.

❒ [Detour] will be enable only when the sys-

tem can find “traffic congestion”.

After touching [Detour], the route is recalcu-

lated taking all traffic congestion on your cur-

rent route into account.

❒ “Notification icon” shows the nearest traf-

fic information on the route. However, if

you touch [Detour], the route is recalcu-

lated by taking into account not only this

information, but also all traffic congestion

information on the route.

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

[List]:

Only three proximate traffic events on your

route are listed in this traffic list.

[Back]:

The message disappears, and the map display

reappears.

For the subsequent operations, see “Checking

traffic congestion automatically”.

➲ “Checking traffic congestion automatically” ➞

Page 71

Selecting traffic information to

display

There are different types of traffic information

that can be received via the XM NavTraffic ser-

vice, and you can select which types will be incor-

porated and displayed on your navigation system.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Traffic Settings].

2 Touch [Displayed traffic information].

The names of the displayed traffic information

items and a list of icons appears on the

screen.

3 Touch the traffic information item to dis-

play.

A red check appears next to the selected traf-

fic information.

❒ [Traffic Flow] includes not only whether

or not to display the icon on the map, but

also whether or not to take the flow infor-

mation into account when rerouting.

Notification icon

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 72 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 7 Using Traffic InformationNAVI

❒ Touching [ALL (None)] selects or deselect

all traffic information.

4 Touch [OK].

The selected traffic information icon is added

to the screen.

❒ The following types of traffic congestion

cannot be deselected and are always dis-

played and taken into consideration: stop

and go, stopped traffic, and closed/

blocked roads.

5 Touch [OK].

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 73 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 7

Using Traffic Information NAVI

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 74 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 8 Using XM Tuner and Other InformationNAVI

Chapter 8

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

Using the XM Tuner to View

Stock, Sports, and Other Infor-

mation

When an XM tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is connected,

you can receive stock prices, sports, and other

information, and display it onscreen. You may

also register favorite information on the naviga-

tion system.

Displaying stock prices

Can display the prices of up to 12 stocks.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Stock Info].

The screen displays a list of stock prices.

❒ Although the stock price information dis-

played onscreen is updated every 30 sec-

onds (approx.), these prices are not real-

time values.

Registering stocks to be displayed

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Stock Info].

2 Touch [Add].

3 Input the Ticker text for the stocks you

want to display, then touch [OK].

[0-9], [Punc.], [Oper], [Sym.]:

You can switch the upper line to input the

number and marks.

Touch to toggle the selection.

❒ The method for inputting the text is almost

same as for inputting street names.

➲ Text input method ➞ Page 29

❒ If the input ticker symbol does not match

in full the actual ticker symbol for the

stock, you may not be able to find it.

Deleting stocks to be displayed

onscreen

Can display the prices of up to 12 stocks. If 12

stocks are already registered, delete as many

entries as necessary to add new stocks.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Stock Info].

2 Touch [Delete].

3 Touch the ticker of the stock you want to

delete.

A red check appears next to the ticker you

touched.

❒ To delete all registered stocks, touch [All].

Red checks will appear next to all tickers.

4 Touch [Delete].

A message will appear asking you to confirm

the deletion.

5 Touch [Yes].

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 75 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 8

Using XM Tuner and Other Information NAVI

Storing browsable information

XM special contents can be stored as [My Favor-

ites] so that it can be accessed without search-

ing every time an update is needed.

❒ The displayed items depend on the informa-

tion that is sent from each station.

❒ [My Favorites] can store up to 50 items.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Set My Favorites].

The screen will display a list of categories. The

information appearing onscreen is automati-

cally updated at regular intervals.

2 Touch a category you want to browse

from the list.

3 Touch an item you wish to store.

If an item is divided into more detail catego-

ries, select the one from the list to narrow

down the category. After narrowing down, the

message confirming whether or not to regis-

ter the item.

4 Touch [OK].

If the storing step is successful, the confirma-

tion screen will appear.

Touch [OK] to complete the storing and

return to the previous screen.

Displaying favorite browsable

Information

You can check and delete the browsable informa-

tion you registered.

1 Store the desired item (topic).

➲ “Storing browsable information” ➞

Page 76

2 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [My Favorites].

A list of registered items (topics) appears on

the screen.

3 Touch an item to display the contents.

Deleting favorite browsable information

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [My Favorites].

2 Touch [Delete].

3 Touch the items you want to delete.

A red check appears next to the items you

touched.

❒ To delete all favorite contents, touch [All].

Red checks will appear next to all items.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 76 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

NAVI Chapter 8 Using XM Tuner and Other Information

4 Touch [Delete].

5 A message will appear asking you to con-

firm the deletion. Touch [Yes].

Checking the Reception Status

of the XM Tuner

The current XM tuner’s (GEX-P10XMT) reception

status and signal strength appear on screen. (The

information that is transmitted via XM DATA

cable is displayed in this screen.)

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [XM Status].

(1) Status

Depending on the XM tuner’s (GEX-P10XMT)

reception status, any one of the following may

appear.

No problem.

Updating

Updating encryption code.

Check antenna

Improper antenna connection.

Not Connected

(2) Signal Strength

Depending on the signal strength, any one of the

following may appear.

Very Strong

Strong

Marginal

Weak

No signal

(3) Radio ID

The radio ID appears.

❒ If you have subscribed to either XM audio only

or XM NavTraffic stand alone

, you will see

[Updating] in the [Status]. This is because

the GEX-P10XMT is constantly checking to see

if you have decided to add the other service

while your navigation system is turned on. If

you subscribe to both services, the appropri-

ate status will be shown in the [Status].

Emergency Info

The Emergency Info screen provides important

emergency information pertaining to your vehi-

cle, insurance, and current location. Such emer-

gency information could be useful in the event of

an accident or vehicle breakdown. The accuracy

of the personal information is dependent on the

accuracy of the information entered into the navi-

gation system by the user.

• The Emergency Info screen is only

intended to provide information to a driver

that may be useful during an emergency

situation, and does not replace the need to

call for emergency assistance, when nec-

essary.

Checking the information regis-

tered as Emergency Info

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Emergency Info].

The information registered as Emergency

Info appears on the screen.

(1) You are currently at :

Your current position is indicated by the street

name, latitude, and longitude.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) (3)

(2)(1)

(5)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 77 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 8

Using XM Tuner and Other Information NAVI

(2) Personal Information :

Your VIN number, insurance policy number, and

the telephone number of your insurance com-

pany can be displayed once entered by the user.

(3) Emergency TOW service phone :

The phone number of the subscribing Emergency

TOW service can be displayed once entered by

the user. The default or factory setting is the

phone number of the Emergency Roadside Assis-

tance service provided by Signature’s Nationwide

Auto Club, Inc.

1 year of free Emergency Roadside

Assistance service

1 year of free Emergency Roadside Assistance

service is available to all registered owners and

provided by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club,

Inc. The first year of Emergency Roadside Assis-

tance service is paid for by Pioneer only if your

navigation system is registered with Pioneer and

you sign up on-line with Signature’s Nationwide

Auto Club, Inc. at the time you register your navi-

gation system with Pioneer. If you have not

signed up for this service with Signature’s

Nationwide Auto Club, Inc., or if your free one-

year period has expired, you are subject to

charges by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club,

Inc. You are also subject to be changed by Signa-

ture’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc. for roadside

services not included in the Emergency Roadside

Assistance service. The terms and conditions

regarding the Emergency Roadside Assistance

service provided by Signature’s Nationwide Auto

Club, Inc. are determined solely and exclusively

by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc. Please

contact Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc.

for more information. The telephone number that

appears here by default is the toll free number for

this service. For additional details on registering

for this service, please check your product regis-

tration card included with this product. If you are

not interested in the free Roadside Assistance

service, this number can be edited and replaced

by your own roadside assistance telephone num-

ber.

❒ The police number is shown as 911 and can-

not be changed.

(4) Locate Car Service

➲ “Searching for car service in an emergency”

➞ Page 79

(5) Dial each number

➲ “Dialing the corresponding number in emer-

gency” ➞ Page 78

Dialing the corresponding number in

emergency

This function can be valid only when all fol-

lowing conditions are satisfied:

• The Bluetooth unit (sold separately) is

connected with navigation system.

• The communication for Hands-free phon-

ing is activate between the cellular phone

featuring Bluetooth technology and the

navigation system.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Emergency Info].

2 Touch .

A list of telephone numbers appears

onscreen.

3 Touch the phone number you want to

dial.

The signal is transmitted to the selected

phone number.

Touching terminates the call.

❒ Touch [Back] to return to the previous

screen.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 78 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

NAVI Chapter 8 Using XM Tuner and Other Information

Searching for car service in an

emergency

In an emergency, you can search the Emergency

Info for Auto Services in the vicinity of your cur-

rent position and set the current route.

• The Emergency Info screen is only

intended to provide information to a driver

that may be useful during an emergency

situation and if they are in a safe location.

If not, or in all major accidents, call 911

directly.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Emergency Info].

2 Touch [Locate Car Service].

A list of auto services appears onscreen.

3 Touch the Category of the auto service

you want to use.

❒ The Auto Service categories that can be

selected in the Emergency Info are: [Auto-

motive] and [Car Dealer].

4 Touch the selection method.

[Select All]:

Selects all detailed categories included in that

category. A red check appears next to the

selected category.

[Deselect All]:

Cancels the selected detailed categories.

[Select Detail]:

Selects a detailed category from the list.

❒ If you want to search with more detailed

categories, touch [Select Detail]. When

the subcategory list appears, touch the

item and touch [Back]. When only a few

types of the detailed categories are

selected, blue check marks will appear.

5 Repeat Step 3 and 4, select a category,

and touch [OK].

The POI in the selected category and detailed

category is searched.

6 Touch the name of the facility to set the

route you want.

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

➲ “Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 32

When the route is already set, “Location con-

firmation screen” is shown.

➲ “Checking the location on the map” ➞

Page 31

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 79 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 8

Using XM Tuner and Other Information NAVI

Registering user information

Enter the information written on the vehicle

inspection certificate or insurance certificate.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Emergency Info].

2 Touch [Setup].

3 Touch the desired item to register your

information.

❒ If information is already registered, that

information will appear.

4 Input the number you wish to register,

then touch [OK].

Completes the registration.

[Edit VIN]:

(You can enter between 1 and 17 digits.)

[Edit Policy Number]:

[Edit Insurance Phone]:

number.

[Edit TOW Service Phone]:

❒ Touch [Default] to restore the default

TOW service phone number.

Setting the Vehicle Dynamics

Display

You can change the contents of the meters on

the left and right of the Vehicle Dynamics Dis-

play.

Until the sensor’s initial learning is complete,

only the voltage and clock are available.

❒ The speed displayed is a guideline and may

not correspond to the actual speed.

1 Switch to the Vehicle Dynamics Display.

➲ Changing the map display mode ➞

Page 39

2 Touch the left or right meter.

Touch keys are displayed.

3 Touch the items you want to display.

You can select the following items.

[Voltage]:

Displays the power supply and voltage sup-

plied from the battery to this system.

[Acceleration]:

Acceleration in a forward direction is dis-

played. The + sign indicates acceleration

while the – sign indicates deceleration.

[Side Acceleration]:

Acceleration in a side direction such as when

turning, is displayed. The + sign indicates a

right turn, while the – sign indicates a left

turn.

[Angular Velocity]:

Displays the vehicle’s turning angle over one

second (how far it has turned in a second).

[Slope]:

Displays the vehicle’s vertical movement. The

+ side represents the rising angle, and the –

side the falling angle.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 80 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

NAVI Chapter 8 Using XM Tuner and Other Information

[Direction]:

Displays the direction your vehicle is traveling

in.

[Clock]:

Current time is displayed.

[Adjust Look]:

Touch [Adjust Look] to display a screen for

selecting the panel pattern. Touch one of the

patterns from among those displayed onscreen

to change the panel to the selected pattern.

❒ If you touch [Peak Hold Reset], the maxi-

mum and minimum (green line) values

indicated in [Acceleration] and [Side

Acceleration] are reset.

❒ You cannot change the speedometer at the

center.

❒ Selecting Demo Mode in the Settings

menu enables you to perform a demon-

stration with random values.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 81 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 8

Using XM Tuner and Other Information NAVI

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 82 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

NAVI Chapter 9 Using Hands-free Phoning

Chapter 9

Using Hands-free Phoning

Hands-free Phoning Overview

• For your safety, avoid talking on the phone

as much as possible while driving.

If your cellular phone features Bluetooth

tech-

nology, this navigation system can be connected

to your cellular phone wirelessly. Using this

hands-free function, you can operate the naviga-

tion system to make or receive phone calls. You

can also transfer the phone book data stored in

your cellular phone to the navigation system.

This section describes how to set up a Bluetooth

connection and how to operate a cellular phone

featuring Bluetooth technology on the navigation

system.

The following description assumes that the

device name of the cellular phone to be con-

nected using Bluetooth wireless technology is set

to [My mobile phone].

Preparing communication

devices

To use the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth

wireless technology on the navigation system,

the Bluetooth unit (ND-BT1) (sold separately) is

required.

Precautions for using a cellular phone

featuring Bluetooth technology

❒ Please read “Notes for hands-free phoning”

for your reference.

➲ “Notes for hands-free phoning” ➞ Page 92

❒ When the power of the navigation system

turns off, the Bluetooth connection is also dis-

connected. When the system restarts, the sys-

tem automatically attempts to reconnect the

previously connected cellular phone. Even

when the connection is cut for some reason,

the system automatically reconnects the

specified cellular phone (except when the

connection is cut by the cellular phone opera-

tion).

You can open [Phone Menu] directly by pressing

and holding the MENU button.

❒ You can check the signal strength for connec-

tion between your cellular phone and Blue-

tooth unit (sold separately) with [Connection

Status] in [Hardware] Menu.

➲ [Connection Status] ➞ Page 97

❒ You can set the voice volume and ring volume

with [Volume] in [Settings] Menu.

➲ [Volume] ➞ Page 95

❒ You can set to mute peripheral sounds during

hands-free phoning.

➲ [Mute Set] ➞ Page 157

While your cellular phone featuring Bluetooth

wireless technology is connected, is dis-

played on the map.

By connecting the Bluetooth unit (sold sepa-

rately), you can use the functions described

in this manual, including hands-free phoning

or phone book transfer. To use these func-

tions, the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth

wireless technology that you want to connect

must have a supported profile that is the

same as the profile for the Bluetooth unit. For

the supported profile, refer to the owner’s

manual of the Bluetooth unit.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 83 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 9

Using Hands-free Phoning NAVI

❒ If you operate using the “CD-SR1” Steering

Remote Control (sold separately), the follow-

ing buttons can be used for operation:

VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button:

Same function as on the screen.

(Except for [Received Calls] and [Emer-

gency Info].)

VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button:

Same function as or on the

screen.

PHONE MENU button:

Open [Phone Menu] directly.

Setting up for hands-free phon-

ing

Before you can use the hands-free phoning func-

tion, you will need to set up the navigation system

for using that function. This entails registering

your cellular phone with the navigation system

and establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection

between the navigation system and your cellular

phone.

Registering your cellular phone

You need to register your cellular phone featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology when you connect

it for the first time. A total of five phones can be

registered. Two registration methods are avail-

able:

• Registration from the navigation system

• Registration from the cellular phone

❒ Once you have registered a phone, you can

select that cellular phone from the list to con-

nect it without registration.

❒ If you try to register more than five cellular

phones, the system will ask you to select one

of the registered cellular phones to overwrite.

➲ “Connecting a registered cellular phone” ➞

Page 85

❒ The default device name displayed on the cel-

lular phone is [PIONEER HDD NAVI]. The

default password is [1111].

Operating from the navigation system

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless technol-

ogy on your cellular phone.

For some cellular phones, no specific action is

necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology. For details, refer to the instruction

manual of your cellular phone.

2 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

3 Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

4 Touch [Registration].

5 Touch [Navi].

The system searches for cellular phones with

Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the

connection and displays them in the list.

6 Wait until your cellular phone appears in

the list.

❒ If you cannot find the cellular phone you

want to connect, check that the cellular

phone is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless

technology connection.

7 Select the cellular phone you want to reg-

ister from the list.

8 Enter the password of the navigation sys-

tem to register it using your cellular

phone.

After the registration is completed, the follow-

ing screen appears.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 84 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 9 Using Hands-free PhoningNAVI

❒ If registration fails, repeat the procedure

from the beginning. If a connection still

cannot be established, try connecting

using your cellular phone.

Operating from your cellular phone

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless technol-

ogy on your cellular phone.

For some cellular phones, no specific action is

necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology. For details, refer to the instruction

manual of your cellular phone.

2 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

3 Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

4 Touch [Registration].

5 Touch [Mobile].

The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth

wireless technology connection.

6 Operate your cellular phone to register

the navigation system.

If your cellular phone asks you to enter a pass-

word, enter the password of the navigation

system.

After the registration is completed, the follow-

ing screen appears.

❒ If registration fails repeat the procedure

from the beginning.

Connecting a registered cellular phone

The navigation system automatically connects

the cellular phone selected as a target of connec-

tion. However, connect the cellular phone manu-

ally in the following cases:

• Two or more cellular phones are registered,

and you want to manually select the cellular

phone to be used.

• You want to reconnect a disconnected cellular

phone.

• Connection cannot be established automati-

cally for some reason.

❒ Unregistered cellular phones cannot be con-

nected.

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless

technology on your cellular phone.

For some cellular phones, no specific action is

necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology. For details, refer to the instruction

manual of your cellular phone.

2 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

3 Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

4 Touch [Connection].

5 Touch the name of the cellular phone that

you want to connect.

When a connection is successfully estab-

lished, a connection complete message

appears, and the system returns to the phone

menu screen.

❒ To cancel the connection to your cellular

phone, touch [Cancel].

❒ If connection fails, check whether your cel-

lular phone is waiting for a connection,

and then repeat the procedure from step 4.

Phone name currently connected or

selected as a target of connection

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 85 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 9

Using Hands-free Phoning NAVI

Editing the device name

You can change the device name to be displayed

on your cellular phone. (Default is [PIONEER

HDD NAVI].)

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

3 Touch [Device Name].

4 Touch any key to enter the name you

want to set and then touch [OK].

➲ About Keypad operation ➞ Page 29

❒ Up to 20 characters can be entered for a

device name.

Editing the password

You can change the password to be used for

authentication on your cellular phone. (Default is

[1111].)

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

3 Touch [Password].

4 Touch any key to enter the password you

want to set and then touch [OK].

➲ About Keypad operation ➞ Page 29

❒ Four to eight characters can be entered for

a password.

Receiving a phone call

You can use the navigation system to receive a

call hands-free.

The map screen shows the icon while your cellu-

lar phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technol-

ogy is connected. You can receive a hands-free

call only when the cellular phone is connected.

Answering an incoming call

The system informs you that it is receiving a call

by displaying a message and producing a ring

sound once.

1 When there is an incoming call, touch

When there is an incoming call, you can reject

the call by touching .

❒ During a call, the is displayed at the

right-hand side of the screen.

2 To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

The call ends.

❒ If the received voice is too quiet to hear, you

can adjust the volume of the received voice.

➲ Phone Voice ➞ Page 95

❒ Depending on the caller ID service, the phone

number of the received call may not be dis-

played. [Unknown] appears instead.

❒ You may hear a noise when you hang up the

phone.

Connecting icon

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 86 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 9 Using Hands-free PhoningNAVI

Making a phone call

You can make a phone call in many different

ways.

Direct dialing

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Dial].

3 Input the phone number, and then touch

to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ing, touch .

4 To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

Dialing from the dialed number history

or the received call history

1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [Received

Calls].

The list of either one appears.

3 Touch a name or telephone number from

the list to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ing, touch .

When you make a call to the phone number in

[Received Calls] without “+”, you can add

“+” in front of that number by touching [+].

To delete “+”, touch [+] again in that time.

Touch to make a call.

4 To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

❒ Up to 30 entries for each of the dialed

number and received call histories are

recorded automatically. When the number

of entries exceeds 30, the entries will be

deleted from the oldest one.

❒ You can clear the dialed number or

received call history.

➲ Clearing the dialed number or received call

history ➞ Page 92

Calling a number in the Phone Book

After finding the list in the Phone Book you want

to call, you can select the number and make the

call.

❒ Before using this function, you need to trans-

fer the phone book stored in your cellular

phone to the navigation system.

➲ “Transferring the phone book” ➞ Page 89

1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Phone Book].

The phone book screen appears.

3 Touch a name from the list to make a call.

If you touch an alphabet tab, you can jump to

the first page of the contacts whose names

start with that letter.

Date and time of the call dialed or received

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 87 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 9

Using Hands-free Phoning NAVI

Touch the entry in the list to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ing, touch .

4 To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

Calling a number in “Dial Favorites”

After finding the list in “Dial Favorites” you want

to call, you can select the number and make the

call.

❒ Before using this function, you need to set the

phone number from the phone book to “Dial

Favorites”.

➲ “Registering a phone number in “Dial Favor-

ites”” ➞ Page 90

1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Dial Favorites].

The “Dial Favorites” screen appears.

3 Touch one of [Favorite 1] to [Favorite 5] to

make a call.

Touch the entry to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ing, touch .

4 To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

Dialing the entry in the Address Book

You can make a call to the entry registered in the

address book.

❒ You cannot make a call to locations if the

phone number is not registered.

1 Display the Address Book.

➲ Operation of the Address Book ➞ Page 63

2 Touch of the entry you want to call.

The detail screen appears.

3 Touch to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ing, touch .

4 To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

Dialing a facility’s phone number

You can make a call to facilities with phone num-

ber data.

1 Perform [POI Search] or [Vicinity Search]

and display the detail information.

➲ Operation of [POI Search] ➞ Page 53

➲ Operation of [Vicinity Search] ➞ Page 55

2 Touch of the entry you want to call.

The detail screen appears.

3 Touch to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ing, touch .

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 88 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 9 Using Hands-free PhoningNAVI

4 To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

Dialing from the map

You can make a call by selecting the icon of a reg-

istered location or a POI icon from the map

screen.

❒ You cannot make a call to locations or POIs

that have no phone number data.

1 Scroll the map, and place the cursor on an

icon on the map.

2 Touch .

The detail screen appears.

3 Touch to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ing, touch .

4 To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

Transferring the phone book

You can transfer the data from the phone book

stored in your cellular phone to the phone book

stored in the navigation system.

By transferring the phone book to the navigation

system, you can browse the data in the trans-

ferred phone book on the screen of the navigation

system. You can also select the entries in the

phone book to make a call from the navigation

system or edit the data on the navigation system.

❒ Depending on the cellular phone, “Phone

Book” may be called a name such as “Con-

tacts”, “Business card”, or something else.

❒ The Phone Book can hold a total of 400

entries.

❒ The Hands-free phoning connection is discon-

nected to establish the connection for phone

book transfer. When the phone book is trans-

ferred, hands-free phoning is reconnected

automatically.

❒ The phone book of this navigation system can-

not assign the multiple telephone numbers for

one person’s name.

1 Connect your cellular phone featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology.

➲ “Registering your cellular phone” ➞

Page 84

2 Touch [Information] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

3 Touch [Read Bus. Card].

If there is a phone book already transferred,

the following screen appears.

[Yes]:

Deletes all phone numbers stored in the

phone book, and then transfers the data.

[No]:

Keeps the current entries and then adds new

data to the phone book. (Duplicate data can-

not be consolidated.)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 89 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 9

Using Hands-free Phoning NAVI

❒ If you want to keep the existing phone

book, select [No].

4 Check that the following screen is dis-

played, and operate your cellular phone to

transfer the phone book entries.

The phone book entries in your cellular phone

are transferred to the navigation system. To

cancel the transfer, touch [Cancel].

❒ Only the names and telephone numbers

can be transferred.

❒ The transferred data can be edited on the

navigation system.

➲ “Editing the entry in “Phone Book”” ➞

Page 90

Registering a phone number in

“Dial Favorites”

You can register up to five entries into “Dial Favor-

ites” from the phone book. Registering the phone

numbers that you frequently use in “Dial Favor-

ites” will ease the dialing operation. The entries

registered in “Dial Favorites” can be operated

from the shortcut menu. You can also operate

them with Voice Recognition to make a call.

1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Dial Favorites].

3 Touch [Set] on any of [Favorite 1] —

[Favorite 5].

4 Touch the entry you want to register.

The Phone Book Record screen appears.

5 Touch [OK].

The selected entry is registered in the corre-

sponding “Dial Favorites”.

Editing the entry in “Phone

Book”

You can edit the imported phone book data or

add new data. You can edit [Name],

[Pronunciation], [Phone #], or [Picture]. You

can also delete unnecessary data.

❒ The data cannot be transferred back to the

cellular phone.

Editing data or adding new data

1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation

menu, and the touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Phone Book].

3 Touch or [Add].

The edit screen appears.

❒ To add data by entering it as desired, touch

[Add].

4 Select the entry you want to edit.

(1) Name

Enter the name to be displayed in the phone

book.

For more details about operations, please

read the following page.

➲ “Changing a name” ➞ Page 64

❒ Up to 40 characters can be input for the

name.

(2) Pronunciation

You can enter the desired pronunciation inde-

pendently from the name. The registered pro-

nunciation is used for voice recognition.

For more details about operations, please

read the following page.

➲ “Changing a pronunciation” ➞ Page 65

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 90 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 9 Using Hands-free PhoningNAVI

❒ Up to 40 characters can be input for the

pronunciation.

❒ If nothing is entered in a text box, you can-

not use that item as a voice command.

❒ Depending on which language is being

switched to, you may not be able to use the

registered pronunciation without modifica-

tion.

➲ “Available Voice Commands” ➞ Page 167

(3) Phone #

Enter the phone number to be displayed in the

phone book. Touch [OK] to complete the

input and return to the previous screen.

❒ Up to 32 characters can be input for the

phone number.

❒ The edited names and phone numbers are

reflected to the dialed number history and

the received call history. However, they are

not reflected to the data registered in “Dial

Favorites”.

(4) Picture

Sets the image to be displayed when a call is

received.

➲ “Customizing the incoming call picture for

a phone book entry” ➞ Page 91

Customizing the incoming call picture

for a phone book entry

You can customize a picture for the phone book

record. Some pictures are already stored in the

hard disk drive, and you can also import JPEG for-

mat pictures, such as a picture from your digital

camera, by using a CD-R(-RW). You can use pic-

tures by burning them onto a CD-R (-RW) with

your PC and insert that into the navigation sys-

tem.

Here, a method for changing the picture is

described with an example of loading a picture

stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the navigation sys-

tem.

1 Check that no disc is inserted, and insert

your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading slot.

2 Touch [Picture], and then touch [Import

from Disc].

The list of the pictures stored in the

CD-R (-RW) is displayed.

On this screen, you can select the following

item:

[Back to Original]:

The picture originally used when the system

was purchased is selected.

❒ Touching an option other than [Import

from Disc] allows you to select a back-

ground image stored on the hard disk

drive.

3 Touch a picture you want to set.

4 Touch [Yes].

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

[No]:

Select when you want to change to another

picture. Return to Step 3.

Deleting data

1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Phone Book].

3 Touch [Delete].

The “Delete from Phone Book“ screen

appears.

4 Touch the entry you want to delete.

A red check mark appears next to the selected

entry. To cancel the selection, touch the entry

again.

Be sure to read “Limitations for importing pic-

tures” before creating a CD-R (-RW).

➲ “Limitations for importing pictures” ➞

Page 101

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 91 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 9

Using Hands-free Phoning NAVI

5 Touch [Delete].

6 Touch [Yes].

The data is deleted, and the current location

screen appears.

❒ To cancel the deletion, touch [No].

Editing the received call or

dialed number history

You can edit the data in the dialed number history

or the received call history. You can edit them

and the edited entries are registered in the phone

book. You can also delete the history data.

Editing data

1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [Received

Calls].

3 Touch .

The edit screen appears. Steps after this are

the same as for editing the phone book.

➲ “Editing the entry in “Phone Book”” ➞

Page 90

❒ The phone number cannot be edited if it is

already registered in the phone book.

Deleting data

1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [Received

Calls].

3 Touch [Delete].

4 Touch [Yes].

All history data is deleted, and the current

location screen appears.

❒ To cancel the deletion, touch [No].

Notes for hands-free phoning

General notes

• Connection to all cellular phones featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology is not guaran-

teed.

• The line-of-sight distance between this naviga-

tion system and your cellular phone must be

10 meters or less when sending and receiving

voice and data via Bluetooth technology. How-

ever, the transmission distance may become

shorter than the estimated distance, depend-

ing on the environment in use.

• You cannot delete a registered cellular phone.

If you need to delete it, refer to “Returning the

Navigation System to the Default or Factory

Settings”, clear [Phone Settings] and delete

it together with other functions.

• With some cellular phones, the speakers of the

system may not produce a ring sound.

• If private mode is selected on the cellular

phone, hands-free phoning may not be per-

formed.

About registration and connection

• Cellular phone operations varies depending on

the type of your cellular phone. Refer to the

instruction manual that came with your cellu-

lar phone for detailed instructions.

About making and receiving calls

• You may hear a noise in the following situa-

tions:

— When you answer the phone by using the

button on the phone.

— When the person on the other end of line

hangs up the phone.

• If the person on the other end of the phone call

cannot hear the conversation due to an echo,

decrease the volume level for hands-free phon-

ing. This may reduce the effects of the echo.

• With some cellular phones, even if you press

accept button on the cellular phone when a

call arrives, hands-free phoning may not be

performed.

• The registered name appears if the phone

number of the received call is already regis-

tered in the phone book. When one phone

number is registered under different names,

the name that comes first alphabetically is dis-

played.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 92 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 9 Using Hands-free PhoningNAVI

• If the phone number of the received call is not

registered in the phone book, the phone num-

ber of the received call appears.

About received call history and dialed num-

ber history

• Calls made or editing performed only on your

cellular phone will not be reflected to the

dialed number history or phone book in the

navigation system.

• You cannot make a call to the entry of an

unknown user (no phone number) in the

received call history.

• If calls are made by operating your cellular

phone, no history data will be recorded in the

navigation system.

About phone book transfer

• With some cellular phones, it may not be pos-

sible to transfer all items in the phone book at

one time. In this case, transfer items one at a

time from your cellular phone.

• Depending on the cellular phone that is con-

nected to this navigation system via Bluetooth

technology, this navigation system cannot dis-

play the phone book correctly. (Some charac-

ters may be garbled or first name and last

name is put in reverse order.)

• If the phone book in the cellular phone con-

tains image data, the phone book may not be

transferred correctly. (Image data cannot be

transferred from the cellular phone.)

• Depending on the cellular phone, phone book

transfer may not be available.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 93 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 9

Using Hands-free Phoning NAVI

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 94 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 10 Modifying the General Settings for Navigation FunctionsNAVI

Chapter 10

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

• For safety reasons, these functions are not

available while your vehicle is in motion.

To enable these functions, you must stop

in a safe place and put on the parking

brake before setting your route (see page

20 for details).

Entering the Settings Menu

1 Press the MENU button to display the

navigation menu.

2 Touch [Settings] to display the Settings

menu.

3 Change the setting.

➲ Adjusting each item ➞ Page 95 to 102

Setting the Volume for Guidance

and Phone

The sound volume for the navigation can be set.

You can separately set the volume of the route

guidance and the beep sound.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Volume].

2 Touch [+] or [–] to set their volume.

On this screen, you can operate the following

items.

Guidance

This setting controls the guidance volume of

navigation.

When set to , guidance is output. When

set to , no guidance is output.

Beep

This setting controls the beep tone volume for

navigation.

Phone Ringtone

This setting controls the incoming ring tone

volume.

Phone Voice

This setting controls the incoming voice vol-

ume.

❒ The Phone Ringtone and Phone Voice

adjustments are related to the cellular

phone featuring Bluetooth technology. No

adjustment is needed when the cellular

phone featuring Bluetooth technology is

not connected.

❒ Volume of the audio source is adjusted by

the VOL (/) button of the navigation

system.

3 To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Customizing the Regional Set-

tings

Changing the language for navi-

gation guidance and menu

You can select the language to be used for the

navigation function. (Once you change the lan-

guage, the system restarts.)

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Regional Settings].

2 Touch [Language].

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 95 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 10

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions NAVI

3 Touch the language that you want to use.

Once you change the language, the system

restarts.

❒ Touching [Back] returns you to the previ-

ous display.

❒ If you select [English with TTS], the

name of the next street you will pass is

announced. If you select [English without

TTS], the name of the next street you will

pass is not announced.

Setting the time difference

Adjusts the systems clock. Set the time differ-

ence (+, – ) from the time originally set in your

navigation system.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Regional Settings].

2 Touch [Time].

To set the time difference, touch [

] or [

–

The time difference between the time origi-

nally set in the navigation system (Pacific

Standard Time) and the current location of

your vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the

time difference. Touching [+] or [–] changes

the time difference display in one-hour incre-

ments.

The time difference can be set from –4 to +9

hours.

4 If necessary, set to summer time.

Daylight Saving Time (DST) is off by default.

Touch [Summer Time] to change the time if

you are in the daylight saving period. This

turns the display below summer time [On].

5 To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Customizing the keyboard lay-

out

You can select the type of keyboard to be used for

inputting characters.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Regional Settings].

2 Touch [Keyboard] to select the layout

that you want to use.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

[QWERTY] (default):

[QWERTZ]:

[ABC]:

[AZERTY]:

Time difference

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 96 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

NAVI Chapter 10 Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

Changing the unit between km

and miles

This setting controls the unit of distance and

speed displayed on your navigation system.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Regional Settings].

2 Touch [km / mile] to change the setting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

[mile] (default):

Show distance in miles.

[Mile&Yard]:

Show distance in miles and yards.

[km]:

Show distance in kilometers.

Changing the virtual speed of

the vehicle

When calculating the expected time of arrival and

the number of hours to the destination, set the

average speed for the freeway or ordinary roads

using [+] and [–].

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Regional Settings].

2 Touch [Average Speed].

3 Touch [+] or [–] to set the speed.

❒ The estimated time of arrival is not neces-

sarily estimated based on this speed value.

Checking the Setting Related

with Hardware

The hardware status, including the driving status

of a vehicle, positioning status by satellite, learn-

ing status of the 3D sensor, and cable connection

status, can be checked.

Checking the connections of

leads and installation positions

Check that leads are properly connected between

the navigation system and the vehicle. Please

also check whether they are connected in the

correct positions.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Hardware].

2 Touch [Connection Status].

The “Connection Status” screen appears.

(1) Speed Pulse

The Speed Pulse value detected by the naviga-

tion system is shown. [0] is shown while the

vehicle is stationary.

(2) GPS Antenna

Indicates the connection status of the GPS

antenna, the reception sensitivity, and from

how many satellites the signal is received. If

the signal is received correctly, [OK] is dis-

played. If reception is poor, [NOK] appears. In

such case, please change the installation

position of the GPS antenna.

(3) Phone Connection Status

Indicates the connection status of the Blue-

tooth unit (sold separately) and the signal

strength between the Bluetooth unit and the

cellular phone. If the Bluetooth unit is con-

nected correctly, [OK] is displayed. [NOK]

appears when the Bluetooth unit is not con-

nected or incorrectly connected.

(4) Installation Position

The installation position of the navigation sys-

tem is shown. That indicates whether the

installation position of the navigation system

is correct or not. If installed correctly, [OK]

appears. When the navigation system is

installed at an extreme angle exceeding the

limitation of the installing angle, [Incorrect

angle] will be displayed. When the angle of

the navigation system has been changed,

[Excessive vibration] will be displayed.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 97 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Chapter 10

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions NAVI

(5) Parking Brake

When the parking brake is applied, [On] is dis-

played. When the parking brake is released,

[Off] is displayed.

(6) Power Voltage

The power voltage (reference value) provided

from the vehicle battery to the navigation sys-

tem is shown. If the voltage goes out of the

range from 11 to 15 V, check that power cable

connection is correct.

(7) Illumination

When the headlights or small lamps of a vehi-

cle are on, [On] is displayed. When the small

lamps of a vehicle are off, [Off] is displayed. (If

the orange/white lead is not connected, [Off]

appears.)

(8) Back Signal

When the gear lever is shifted to “R”, the sig-

nal switches to [High] or [Low]. (One of these

is displayed depending on the vehicle.)

Checking sensor learning status

and driving status

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Hardware].

2 Touch [3D Calibration Status].

The 3D Calibration Status screen appears.

(1) Distance

Driving distance is indicated.

(2) Speed Pulse

Total number of speed pulses is indicated.

(3) Learning Status

Current driving mode is indicated.

(4) Degree of learning

Sensor learning situations of distance (Dis-

tance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn (Left

Turn), and 3D detection (3D) are indicated by

the length of bars.

❒ When tires have been changed or chains

fitted, turning on the Speed Pulse allows

the system to detect the fact that the tire

diameter has changed, and automatically

replaces the value for calculating distance.

❒ If the ND-PG1 is connected, the distance

calculation value cannot be replaced auto-

matically.

(5) Speed

The speed detected by the navigation system

is indicated. (This indication may be different

from the actual speed of your vehicle, so

please do not use this instead of the speedom-

eter.)

(6) Acceleration or deceleration/Rota-

tional speed

Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your

vehicle is indicated. Also, rotational speed

when your vehicle turns to left or right is

shown.

(7) Inclination

Degree of slope for the street is indicated.

(4)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(5)

(6)

(7)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 98 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

NAVI Chapter 10 Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

To clear values...

If you want to delete the learned results stored in

[Distance], [Speed Pulse] or [Learning Sta-

tus], touch the relevant result, then touch [Yes].

❒ If you select [Learning Status], you can

select [Reset All] or [Reset Distance

Study]. To clear all learning statuses, touch

[Reset All]. To clear only the Distance study,

touch [Reset Distance Study].

❒ Touch [Reset All] for the following cases:

• After changing the installation position of

the navigation system

• After changing the installation angle of the

navigation system

• After changing the navigation system to

another vehicle

❒ When the distance accuracy is low, touch

[Reset Distance Study].

❒ Touching [Reset All] returns the installation

angle setting also to the default or factory set-

ting. Reconfigure the setting.

➲ “Correcting the installation angle” ➞ Page 99

❒ The navigation system can automatically use

its sensor memory based on the outer dimen-

sions of the tires.

Correcting the installation angle

You can correct the installation angle of the navi-

gation system. Correcting the installation angle

improves the accuracy of sensor learning, even if

the unit is not facing center. Select the orienta-

tion of the LCD panel from the left, center, and

right.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Hardware].

2 Touch [Installation Angle Setup].

3 Check the direction the LCD panel faces,

and touch the corresponding item.

[Left]:

Select this when the angle is 5

° or more to the

left from the center.

[Center] (default):

Select this when the angle is less than 5

° to

the left and right from the center.

[Right]:

Select this when the angle is 5

° or more to the

right from the center.

❒ If the [Learning Status] in the [3D Cali-

bration Status] is [Simple Hybrid], the

installation angle can be corrected.

Checking the device and version

information

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Hardware].

2 Touch [Service Info Screen].

3 Check the device and version information.

Checking the hard disk informa-

tion

You can check the volume of the hard disk, cur-

rent used space and remaining space.

❒ The hard disk space (%) means free space of

the music library. In some cases, even when

about 10% of free space is left, no more music

tracks may be recorded due to system restric-

tion.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 99 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

100

Chapter 10

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions NAVI

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Hardware].

2 Touch [Hard Disk Info].

Registering the Home Location

and Favorite Location

You can register one home location and one

favorite location. You can change the registered

information later. You might find it useful to regis-

ter your workplace or a relative’s home as your

favorite location.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Defined Locations].

2 Touch [Go to].

When registering your home location, touch

[Home].

3 Search for a location to register.

You can select a method of location search.

➲ Address Search ➞ Page 28

➲ Information on searching for locations to

❒ If you select [Map Search], move the

scroll cursor to the place you want to set

and touch [OK].

4 Point the scroll cursor to the location you

want to register and touch [OK].

The location is registered, and the Edit regis-

tered information screen appears.

➲ “Editing the entry in “Address Book”” ➞

Page 63

5 Touch [OK].

Completes the registration.

Changing the Background Pic-

ture

In the menu operation screen, you can customize

a picture for the background. Some pictures are

already stored in the hard disk drive, and you can

also import JPEG format pictures, such as a pic-

ture from your digital camera, by using a CD-R

(-RW). You can use pictures as background pic-

tures by burning them onto a CD-R (-RW) with

your PC and inserting it into the navigation sys-

tem.

The following types of background pictures can

be changed:

• Splash Screen: The screen that appears

when the Navigation system starts up.

• Navigation Background: Background pic-

ture of the navigation menu screen.

• AV Background: Background picture during

the operation of audio source screen.

Here, a method for changing the background pic-

ture is described with an example of loading a

picture stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the naviga-

tion system as the background picture.

Hard disk space (%)

Be sure to read “Limitations for importing pic-

tures” before creating a CD-R (-RW) and “Pre-

cautions when changing the Splash Screen”.

➲ “Limitations for importing pictures” ➞

Page 101

➲ “Precautions when changing the Splash

Screen” ➞ Page 102

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 100 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

101

NAVI Chapter 10 Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

1 Check that no disc is inserted, and insert

your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading slot.

2 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Background Picture Setting].

The picture selected for each screen is indi-

cated on the right side of [Splash Screen],

[Navigation Background] and [AV Back-

ground] items.

3 Touch [Splash Screen], [Navigation

Background] or [AV Background].

4 Touch [Import from Disc].

The list of the pictures stored in the CD-R (-

RW) is displayed.

On this screen, you can select the following

item:

[Back to Original], [Back to PIONEER

Original]:

The picture originally used when the system

was purchased is selected.

❒ Touching an option other than [Import

from Disc] allows you to select a back-

ground image stored on the hard disk

drive.

5 Touch a picture you want to set.

6 Touch [OK].

If you touch [OK], the background image

starts changing. After a short while, the con-

firmation screen appears.

❒ When the image has a large file size, it

takes more time to change the Back-

ground Picture. Do not perform other oper-

ations until the message “Updating.

Please do not turn off the power.” dis-

appears.

❒ If you want to change to another picture,

touch [Back] to return to Step 4.

❒ When the picture starts to change, do not

turn off the vehicle engine until the mes-

sage appears to indicate that the picture

has finished changing.

Limitations for importing pictures

❒ You cannot use a CD-R (-RW) containing MP3

files or Audio data (CD-DA part) for importing

pictures.

❒ When storing pictures on a CD-R (-RW), cre-

ate a folder named “Pictures” in the CD-R (-

RW), and store the picture files in this folder.

(Up to 200 picture files can be used in total,

including pictures that are already stored in

the hard disk drive and pictures in the CD-R (-

RW).)

❒ When you burn a CD-R (-RW), limit the num-

ber of folder hierarchy levels to eight.

❒ You can only use a CD-R (-RW) finalized with

single-session for importing pictures.

❒ You can only use a CD-R (-RW) finalized with

“Mode1” for importing pictures.

❒ Only JPEG format (“.jpg” or “.JPG”) pictures

can be used. Progressive format JPEG pic-

tures cannot be used.

When you burn a CD-R (-RW), make sure the

total data size of the CD-R (-RW) is greater than

100MB by storing dummy data or other filler

information. Otherwise, the disc may not be

recognized by the built-in DVD drive.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 101 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

102

Chapter 10

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions NAVI

❒ Using only the standard Latin characters

(alphabets of both cases: A-Z, a-z) and num-

bers (0-9) is recommended for the file name. If

you want to use letters with diacritical marks

(such as ä or è) for file name, finalize the CD-

R(-RW) with Joliet (Unicode) format.

❒ Pictures up to a maximum of 2 592 x 1 944 pix-

els can be used. We cannot guarantee proper

operation for a picture bigger than this size.

❒ After changing a set image that was imported

from a CD-R (RW), you must use the CD-R

(RW) where the image is recorded to restore

the previous Splash Screen.

Precautions when changing the Splash

Screen

The following is the default Splash Screen for the

Navigation System.

[PIONEER Original]

If an image other than the one shown above is

previously set (such as an image from the dealer

or other source) and you change the Splash

Screen once, you must use the CD-R (RW) where

the image is recorded to change the screen back

to this image.

Using the Demonstration Guid-

ance

This is a demonstration function for shops. After

a route is set, the simulation of the route guid-

ance to a destination is automatically displayed.

Normally, set this to [Off].

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu.

2 Touch [Demo Mode] to change the set-

ting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

[On]:

Repeat demo drive.

[Off] (default):

Demo Mode is set off.

Correcting the Current Location

Touch the screen to adjust the current position

and direction of the vehicle displayed on the map.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Modify Current Location].

2 Scroll to the position where you want to

set, then touch [OK].

3 Touch the arrow key on the screen to set

the direction, then touch [OK].

Restoring the Default Setting

Resets various settings registered to the naviga-

tion system and restores to the default or factory

settings.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Restore Factory Settings].

2 Touch [Yes] to clear the current setting.

❒ Touch [No] to cancel clear the current set-

ting.

➲ “Returning the Navigation System to the

Default or Factory Settings” ➞ Page 179

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 102 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

103

AV Chapter 11 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

Chapter 11

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

You can play or use the following sources with

the navigation system.

• DVD-Video

•CD

•MP3 disc

•Radio (FM)

•Radio (AM)

•Music Library

➲ About the music library ➞ Chapter 12

This chapter describes how to use the audio

source and the basic operation of the audio

source.

Basic Operation

Switching the Audio operation

screen

1 Press the AV button to switch Audio oper-

ation screen.

(1) Touch panel keys

❒ Touch [Hide] to hide the touch panel keys.

If you touch the screen, the touch panel

keys are displayed again.

Selecting a source

Select a source on “AV Source Menu”

1 Press the AV button to switch Audio oper-

ation screen.

2 Touch the source icon.

3 Touch the desired source.

❒ Touch [OFF] to turn the source off.

❒ Touch [REAR SCREEN] to select the

source for “Rear display”.

➲ “Selecting the video for “Rear display”” ➞

Page 159

Select a source by using AV button

You can press the AV button to switch the

source.

1 Press the AV button to switch Audio oper-

ation screen.

2 Press the AV button to select the desired

source.

Press the AV button repeatedly to switch

between the following sources:

(1)

Source icon

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 103 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

104

Chapter 11

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

[CD/ROM (MP3)/DVD] (built-in DVD drive)

— [LIBRARY] (Music library) — [FM] (FM

tuner) — [AM] (AM tuner) — [XM] (XM tuner)

— [SIRIUS] (SIRIUS tuner) — [iPod] (iPod)

— [M-CD] (multi-CD) — [TV] (television) —

[AV INPUT] (video input) — [AUX] (Auxiliary

equipment) — [EXT 1] (external unit 1) —

[EXT 2] (external unit 2)

❒ In the following cases, the sound source

cannot to be used:

— When a unit corresponding to each source

is not connected to the navigation system.

— When no disc is set in the navigation sys-

tem.

— When no magazine is set in the multi-CD

player.

—When [AUX Input] is set to [Off].

➲ “Switching the auxiliary setting” ➞

Page 157

—When [AV Input] is not set to [Video].

➲ “Setting the video input” ➞ Page 156

❒ The term “external unit” refers to future Pio-

neer devices that are not currently planned

for, or devices that allow control of basic func-

tions although they are not fully controlled by

the navigation system. Two external units can

be controlled by this navigation system. When

two external units are connected, the naviga-

tion system allocates them to external unit 1

or external unit 2.

❒ When the [Auto ANT] mode is set to

[Radio], the vehicle’s antenna can be stowed

or turned off by following the instructions

below.

— Change the source from radio (AM or FM)

to another source.

— Turn the source off.

— Turn off the ignition switch (ACC OFF).

If the [Auto ANT] mode is set to [Power], the

vehicle’s antenna can be stowed or turned off

only when the ACC is set to “OFF”.

➲ [Auto ANT] ➞ Page 158

About Steering Remote Control

❒ When using the “CD-SR1” Steering Remote

Control (sold separately), the following but-

tons can be used for operation:

PHONE MENU button

Switches to Phone menu when Bluetooth unit

(sold separately ) is connected.

VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button

Press to accept the call when there is an incom-

ing call.

In other situations, press to start the voice opera-

tion.

VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button

Press to reject a call when there is an incoming

call.

Press to hang up the phone during talking on the

phone.

In voice operation, return to the previous screen.

 button:

Same function as P.LIST (/) button.

 button:

Same function as TRK (/) button.

+, – button:

Same function as VOL (/) button.

BAND button:

Same function as [Band] touch key.

SOURCE button:

Same function as AV button.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 104 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

105

Chapter 11 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

Viewing the audio operation screen and displaying the Audio Set-

tings menu

(1) Information plate

Displays the information (e.g. track title) about the source being played.

(2) Touch panel keys

Touch to operate the source being played.

(3) Detailed information

Displays the detailed information about the source being played.

(4) AV Settings key

Displays the AV Settings menu.

(5) Hide key

Touch [Hide] to hide the touch panel keys and detailed information. If you touch the screen, they

are displayed again.

(6) Audio Settings tab

Switches the setting items to those for Audio Settings.

(7) System Settings tab

Switches the setting items to those for System Settings.

(8) Setting Items

➲ “Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual” ➞ Page 149

Touch

Normal screen (e.g. CD)

(1)

(3)

(4) (5)

(2)

(8)

(7)

(8)

(6)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 105 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

106

Chapter 11

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

Operating a Music CD

You can play a normal music CD using the built-

in DVD drive of the navigation unit. This section

describes that operations.

Selecting [CD] as the source

1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button and insert

a disc you want to play to disc loading

slot.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

❒ If the disc is already set, touch the source

icon and then touch [CD].

➲ For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 103

❒ When being read in, Checking disc is dis-

played.

About auto hard disk recording

The Navigation system can record the tracks

from a music CD into the hard disk drive.

In default setting, the system starts recording

automatically when an unrecorded music CD is

inserted.

If you want to cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

➲ “Setting the CD recording mode” ➞ Page 158

➲ “Music Library Recording” ➞ Page 117

➲ “Music Library Play” ➞ Page 119

❒ Also see at “Handling and Care of the Disc” in

the Hardware Manual and “Detail Information

for Playable Media” for more cautions about

handling each type of media.

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Disc title indicator

Shows the title of the disc currently playing.

(when available.)

(3) Playback method indicator

Shows which playback method has been

selected.

(4) Track number indicator

Shows the number of the track currently playing.

(5) Track title indicator

Shows the title of the track currently playing.

(when available.)

(6) Artist name indicator

Shows the name of the artist currently playing.

(when available.)

(7) Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

track.

(8) Track list

Shows tracks of the CD currently playing.

Title display

Music recognition technology and related data

are provided by Gracenote

. Gracenote is the

industry standard in music recognition technol-

ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-

mation visit www.gracenote.com.

❒ Title information will be displayed when the

information is found in the Gracenote

Data-

base on the built-in hard disk drive.

If you insert a CD-TEXT disc*, the system prior-

itizes the title information encoded in CD-TEXT

disc.

*: Some discs have text information encoded on

the disc during manufacture. These discs may

contain such information as the CD title, track

Stop

(8)

(3)

(5)(1) (2)

(6)

(7)

(4)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 106 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

107

Chapter 11 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

title, and artist’s name. These discs are called

CD-TEXT discs.

❒ When multiple options for the title information

are found or no title information exists, [–] is

displayed.

❒ The title information displayed on the CD play-

back screen and the recording screen is syn-

chronized with the one edited in the music

library. Once you edit the title information in

the music library, the title displayed on each

screen will change accordingly.

➲ “Editing a playlist or tracks” ➞ Page 123

❒ Up to 32 characters can be entered. But the

navigation system incorporates proportional

font. Therefore, the number of the characters

that you can display varies according to the

type of character.

❒ If the built-in DVD drive does not operate prop-

erly, an error message may be displayed.

➲ “Built-in DVD drive” ➞ Page 196

Touch key operation

Touch keys

(1) Select a desired track from the list

Touch a desired track to play.

(2) Playback and Pause

Touching  switches between “playback” and

“pause”.

(3) Touch: Skip the track forward or back-

ward

Touching  skips to the start of the next track.

Touching  once skips to the start of the cur-

rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-

ous track.

Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward

Keep touching  or  to perform fast rewind

or forward.

❒ You can also perform these operations by

using the TRK (/) button.

❒ Fast rewind is canceled when it reaches the

beginning of the first track on the disc.

(4) Stop playback

When you stop playback by touching , that

track number on the disc is memorized, enabling

playback from that track when you play the disc

again.

❒ To play the disc again, touch .

(5) Repeat the current track

Each touch of turns the repeat play on or

off.

[Track Repeat] is displayed on the playback

method indicator during track repeat.

❒ If you perform track search or fast forward or

rewind, repeat play is automatically canceled.

(6) Play tracks in a random order

Touching turns the random play on or off.

(7) Scan tracks of a CD

Touching turns the scan play on or off.

Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of

each track on the CD. When you find the desired

track touch to turn scan play off.

❒ After scanning of a CD is finished, normal

playback of the tracks will begin again.

(3) (3)

(2)

(4)

(7)(6)(5)

(1)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 107 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

108

Chapter 11

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

Operating the CD-ROM (MP3 disc)

You can play an MP3 disc using the built-in DVD

drive of the navigation unit. This section

describes those operations.

Selecting [ROM] as the source

1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button and insert

the disc that you want to play into disc

loading slot.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

❒ If the disc is already set, touch the source

icon and then touch [ROM].

➲ For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 103

❒ While loading, Checking disc is displayed.

❒ Also see “Handling and Care of the Disc” in

the Hardware Manual and “Detail Information

for Playable Media” for more cautions about

handling each type of media.

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Playback method indicator

Shows which playback method has been

selected.

(3) Folder indicator

Shows the folder number and folder name cur-

rently playing. When an ID3 tag has been

encoded on the file, the disc title will be shown

instead of the folder name.

(4) Track indicator

Shows the track number and file name of the

track currently playing. When an ID3 tag has

been encoded on the file, the track title will be

shown instead of the file name.

(5) Artist name indicator

Shows the artist name currently playing only

when an ID3 tag has been encoded on the MP3

file.

(6) Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

track.

(7) Folder and track list

Shows contents of the folder currently playing or

temporarily displayed.

(8) Bit rate

Shows the bit rate of the file currently playing.

Touch key operation

Touch keys

(1) Select tracks from the list or viewing con-

tents of the folders

The list lets you see the list of track titles or folder

names on a disc. If you touch a folder on the list,

you can view its contents. If you touch a track on

the list, you can play the selected track.

❒ Touching or switches to the next or previ-

ous page in the list.

❒ If the selected folder does not contain any

track that can be played, the track list is not

displayed.

(2) Playback and Pause

Touching  switches between “playback” and

“pause”.

(3) Touch: Skip forward or backward

Touching  skips to the start of the next track.

Touching  once skips to the start of the cur-

rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-

ous track.

Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward

Keep touching  or  to perform fast rewind

or forward.

(1) (3) (4) (5)(8) (2)

(6)

(7)

(3) (6) (5)

(2)

(4)

(9)(8)(7)

(1)

(3)

(10)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 108 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

109

Chapter 11 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

❒ You can also perform these operations by

using the TRK (/) button.

❒ Fast rewind is canceled when it reaches the

beginning of the first track on the disc.

❒ In the case of MP3, there is no sound on fast

rewind or forward.

(4) Stop playback

When you stop playback by touching , that

track number on the disc is memorized, enabling

playback from that track when you play the disc

again.

❒ To play the disc again, touch .

(5) Select upper folder

Touch to move to the upper folder and play

back the first track on that folder. If the folder

contain no MP3 files, the contents of that folder

are shown.

❒ If the current folder is the ROOT folder,

can not be used.

(6) Switch mode between MP3 and music CD

(CD-DA)

When playing discs with MP3 files and audio

data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-

MODE CDs, both types can be played only by

switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA.

Touching [Media] switches between CD-DA part

and MP3 part.

(7) Display text information on MP3 disc

Text information recorded on an MP3 disc can be

displayed.

The next piece of information is displayed.

• Disc Title (disc title)*

• Track Title (track title)*

• Folder Title (folder name)

• File Name (file name)

• Artist Name (artist name)*

• Genre (genre)*

• Release Year (release year)*

❒ The information marked with an asterisk (*) is

displayed only when an ID3 tag has been

encoded on MP3 files on the disc. If specific

information of the ID3 tag has not been

encoded on MP3 files on disc, the corre-

sponding item may be blank.

(8) Repeat play

Each touch of changes the settings as fol-

lows:

• Track Repeat — Repeat just the current track

• Folder Repeat — Repeat the folder currently

playing

❒ If you select another track or perform fast for-

ward/rewind during Track Repeat, the

repeat play is canceled.

❒ If you select another folder or perform fast for-

ward/rewind during Folder Repeat, the

repeat play is canceled. (You can perform

track search within that folder with Folder

repeat.)

❒ When Folder Repeat is selected, it is not

possible to play back a subfolder of that

folder.

(9) Play tracks in random order

Touching switches between playing tracks

randomly or sequentially within a selected repeat

range.

(10) Scan folders and tracks

Touching turns the scan play on or off.

Scan play will be performed for the selected

repeat range.

❒

In default, the beginning of the first track of

each folder will be played for about 10 sec-

onds. When “Folder Repeat” is selected for

repeat play, the beginning of each track in the

selected folder will play for about 10 seconds.

When you find the desired track, touch

to turn scan play off.

❒ After track or folder scanning is finished, nor-

mal playback of the tracks will begin again.

Notes on playing MP3 disc

❒ When playing discs with MP3 files and audio

data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-

MODE CDs, both types can be played only by

switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA.

When playing back the CD-DA part, the opera-

tion is the same as for normal music CDs.

Likewise, when playing back the MP3 part, the

operation is the same as for MP3. Refer to the

instructions for each type of media.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 109 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

110

Chapter 11

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

❒ If you have switched between playback of MP3

files and audio data (CD-DA), playback starts

at the first track on the disc.

❒ Playback is carried out in order of file number.

Folders are skipped if they contain no MP3

files. (For example, if folder 01 (ROOT) con-

tains no MP3 files, playback commences with

folder 02.)

❒ When playing back files recorded as VBR

(variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be

correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse

operations are used.

❒ If the built-in DVD drive does not operate prop-

erly, an error message may be displayed.

➲ “Built-in DVD drive” ➞ Page 196

Operating the DVD

• For safety reasons, “Video image” cannot

be viewed while your vehicle is in motion.

To view “Video image”, you must stop in a

safe place and put on the parking brake

before setting your route (see page 20 for

details).

You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in DVD

drive of the navigation system. This section

describes operations for DVD-Video.

Selecting [DVD] as the source

1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button and insert

a disc you want to play to disc loading

slot.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

❒ If the disc is already set, touch the source

icon and then touch [DVD].

➲ For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 103

❒ Also see “Handling and Care of the Disc” in

the Hardware Manual and “Detail Information

for Playable Media” for more cautions about

handling each type of media.

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Sound output indicator

Shows which sound output setting has been

selected.

(3) Repeat range indicator

Shows which repeat range has been selected.

(1) (4)(6) (5) (7) (3) (8)

(9)

(2)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 110 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

111

Chapter 11 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

(4) Title number indicator

Shows the title number currently playing.

(5) Subtitle language indicator

Shows what subtitle language has been selected.

(6) Chapter number indicator

Shows the chapter currently playing.

(7) Audio language indicator

Shows what audio language has been selected.

(8) Viewing angle indicator

Shows what viewing angle has been selected.

(9) Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

chapter.

Touch key operation

Playback screen (page1)

Playback screen (page2)

Menu screen

❒ With some discs, the icon may be dis-

played, meaning that the operation is not

valid.

(1) Playback and Pause

Touching  switches between “playback” and

“pause”.

(2) Touch: Skip forward or backward

Touching  skips to the start of the next chap-

ter. Touching  once skips to the start of the

current chapter. Touching again will skip to the

previous chapter.

Touch and hold: fast rewind or forward

Keep touching  or  to perform fast rewind

or forward. If you keep touching  or  for

five seconds, the icon  or  changes into

or . When this happens, fast rewind/ fast

forward continues even if you release  or

. To resume playback at a desired point,

touch ,  or .

❒ You can also perform these operations by

using the TRK (/) button.

(3) Stop playback

(4) Display the DVD menu

You can display the menu by touching [Menu] or

[Top Menu] while a disc is playing. Touching

either of these keys again lets you start playback

from the location selected from the menu. For

details, refer to the instructions provided with the

disc.

(5) Display the DVD menu keypad

(6) Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-

motion playback)

Touch and hold to start slow-motion playback.

Touching this during playback pauses the image

and each touch forwards a frame.

To return to normal playback, touch .

❒ With some discs, images may be unclear dur-

ing frame-by-frame playback or slow motion

playback.

❒ There is no sound during slow motion play-

back.

❒ Reverse slow motion playback is not possible.

(7) Switch next page of touch keys

(8) Repeat play

Each touch of the changes the settings as

follows:

• Chapter Repeat — Repeat just the current

chapter

• Title Repeat — Repeat just the current title

(2) (4)

(3)

(5)(6)

(2)

(7)

(1)

(8)

(9)

(11)

(12)

(14)

(13)(10)

(16)

(15)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 111 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

112

Chapter 11

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

❒ If you perform chapter (title) search, fast for-

ward/rewind, or slow motion playback, the

repeat play range changes to off.

(9) Change the subtitle language (Multi-sub-

title)

Each time you touch [Subtitle], the DVD

switches between subtitle language.

(10) Change the viewing angle (Multi-angle)

Each time you touch [Angle], the DVD switches

between viewing angles.

❒ During playback of a scene shot from multiple

angles, the angle icon is displayed. Turn

the angle icon display on or off using “DVD-V

Setup” menu.

➲ “Setting angle icon display” ➞ Page 154

(11) Change audio language and audio sys-

tems (Multi-audio)

Each time you touch [Audio], the DVD switches

between audio language and audio system.

❒ Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If

navigation system’s optical digital outputs are

not connected, DTS audio can not be output,

so select an audio setting other than DTS.

❒ Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch

indicate the audio system recorded on the

DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may

not be with the same audio system as that

indicated.

(12) Specify the chapter you want to play

back or the time to start playback by enter-

ing a number

➲ “Searching for a desired scene, starting play-

back from a specified time” ➞ Page 112

(13) Perform the operation (such as resum-

ing) stored in the disc

When using a DVD that has a point recorded that

indicates where to return to, the DVD returns to

the specified point and begins play back from

that point.

(14) Switch to the previous page of touch

keys

(15) Select the DVD menu item

(16) Decide the item

When you select a certain video item, play-

back starts from the selected item. When you

select an item with a submenu, the next menu

screen will appear.

❒ The way to display the menu differs

depending on the disc. For details, refer to

the instructions provided with disc.

Searching for a desired scene,

starting playback from a speci-

fied time

You can search for a desired scene by specifying

a title or a chapter, and the time.

❒ Chapter search and time search are not possi-

ble when disc playback has been stopped.

1 Touch [10Key Search] and then touch

[Title] (title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time]

(time).

2 Touch the key to input the desired num-

ber.

For titles, chapters

•To select 3, touch [3].

• To select 10, touch [1] and [0] in order.

• To select 23, touch [2] and [3] in order.

For time (time search)

• To select 21 minutes 03 seconds, touch [2],

[1], [Min], and [3], [Sec] in order.

• To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],

[1], [Min] in order.

❒ To cancel the input numbers, touch

[Clear].

3 While the input number is displayed,

touch [Enter].

This starts playback from the selected scene.

❒ With discs featuring a menu, you can also

touch [Menu] or [Top Menu] and then

make selections from the displayed menu.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 112 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

113

Chapter 11 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

Entering the numerical com-

mands

You can use this function when you need to enter

a numerical command during DVD playback.

1 Touch [10Key Search] and then touch

[10key Mode] (10key mode).

2 Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired number.

3 While the input number is displayed,

touch [Enter].

Operating the Radio (FM)

You can listen to the radio by using the navigation

system. This section describes operations for

Radio (FM).

Selecting [FM] as the source

1 Touch the source icon and touch [FM].

➲ For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 103

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Band indicator

Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1 to

FM3.

(3) Preset number indicator

Shows what preset has been selected.

(4) Frequency indicator

Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned.

(5) Preset list display

Shows the preset list.

(6) LOCAL indicator

Shows when local seek tuning is on.

(7) STEREO indicator

Shows that the frequency selected is being

broadcast in stereo.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (7)

(6)

(5)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 113 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

114

Chapter 11

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

Touch key operation

1 Touch the source icon and then touch

[FM] to select the radio (FM).

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys

(1) Touch: Recall the preset station

Touch and hold: Store the broadcast station

You can register the frequency currently being

received to the preset list. You can easily store up

to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with

the touch of a key.

❒ Touch to recall the preset frequency.

❒ Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three FM

bands can be stored in memory.

(2) Touch: Perform manual tuning

To perform manual tuning, touch or

briefly. The frequencies move up or

down one step.

Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning

To perform seek tuning, keep touching

or for about one second and release.

The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-

cast strong enough for good reception is found.

❒ You can cancel seek tuning by touching either

or briefly.

❒ If you keep touching or , you

can skip broadcasting frequencies. Seek tun-

ing starts as soon as you release the keys.

❒ You can also perform these operations by

using the TRK (/) button.

(3) Tune in strong signals

➲ “Tuning in strong signals” ➞ Page 114

(4) Store the strongest broadcast frequen-

cies

➲ “Storing the strongest broadcast frequen-

cies” ➞ Page 114

(5) Select a FM band

Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired FM

band is displayed, FM 1, FM 2 or FM 3.

❒ This function is convenient to prepare differ-

ent preset lists for each band.

Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies

BSM (best stations memory) lets you automati-

cally store the six strongest broadcast frequen-

cies under preset tuning keys [P1] — [P6] and

once stored there you can tune in to those fre-

quencies with a touch of the key.

1 Touch and hold [BSM].

“BSM” starts. The six strongest broadcast fre-

quencies will be stored under preset tuning

keys [P1] — [P6] in order of their signal

strength.

❒ To cancel the storage process, touch

[Cancel].

❒ Storing broadcast frequencies with “BSM”

may replace broadcast frequencies you

have saved using [P1] — [P6].

Tuning in strong signals

Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those

radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for

good reception.

1 Touch [Local].

2 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.

❒ To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].

3 Touch  or  to set the sensitivity.

There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.

Level: 1 — 2 — 3 — 4

The level “4” setting allows reception of only

the strongest stations, while lower settings let

you receive weaker stations.

(1) (5) (3)

(4)

(2)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 114 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

115

Chapter 11 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

Operating the Radio (AM)

You can listen to the radio by using the navigation

system. This section describes operations for

Radio (AM).

Selecting [AM] as the source

1 Touch the source icon and touch [AM].

➲ For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 103

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Preset number indicator

Shows what preset has been selected.

(3) Frequency indicator

Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned.

(4) Preset list display

Shows the preset list.

(5) LOCAL indicator

Shows when local seek tuning is on.

Touch key operation

1 Touch the source icon and then touch

[AM] to select the radio (AM).

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys

(1) Select a desired frequency from the list

Touch to recall the preset frequency.

❒ To register the frequency currently being

received to the preset list, touch and hold the

preset list.

Touch and hold: Store broadcast stations

You can register the frequency currently being

received to the preset list. You can easily store up

to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with

the touch of a key.

❒ Touch to recall the preset frequency.

❒ Up to 6 stations can be stored in memory.

(2) Touch: Perform manual tuning

To perform manual tuning, touch or

briefly. The frequencies move up or

down one step.

Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning

To perform seek tuning, keep touching

or for about one second and release.

The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-

cast strong enough for good reception is found.

❒ You can cancel seek tuning by touching either

or briefly.

❒ If you keep touching or , you

can skip broadcasting frequencies. Seek tun-

ing starts as soon as you release the keys.

❒ You can also perform these operations by

using the TRK (/) button.

(3) Tune in strong signals

➲ “Tuning in strong signals” ➞ Page 116

(1) (2) (3) (5)

(4)

(2)

(1) (3)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 115 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

116

Chapter 11

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

(4) Store the strongest broadcast frequen-

cies

➲ “Storing the strongest broadcast frequen-

cies” ➞ Page 116

Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies

BSM (best stations memory) lets you automati-

cally store the six strongest broadcast frequen-

cies under preset tuning keys [P1] — [P6] and

once stored there you can tune in to those fre-

quencies with the touch of a key.

1 Touch and hold [BSM].

BSM starts. The six strongest broadcast frequen-

cies will be stored under preset tuning keys [P1]

— [P6] in order of their signal strength.

❒ To cancel the storage process, touch [Can-

cel].

❒ Storing broadcast frequencies with “BSM”

may replace broadcast frequencies you have

saved using [P1] — [P6].

Tuning in strong signals

Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those

radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for

good reception.

1 Touch [Local].

2 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.

❒ To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].

3 Touch  or  to set the sensitivity.

There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.

Level: 1 — 2

The level “2” setting allows reception of only

the strongest stations, while lower settings let

you receive weaker stations.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 116 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

117

Chapter 12 Using the AV Source (Music Library)AV

Chapter 12

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

You can record tracks from a music CD to the

hard disk in the navigation system. The music

library function enables you to record music CDs

on the hard disk in the navigation system and

play them back with various methods. To use the

music library, start by recording sound sources

from the CD.

Music Library Recording

When you play back a music CD that is not

recorded on the navigation system, the system

automatically begins recording that CD to the

music library. This section describes cautions

and recording procedure.

❒ The music library can record up to 200 general

music CDs worth of music data. (This is just

an average number and varies depending on

the size of music data contained in the CDs.)

Screen configuration

(1) Recording mode indicator

Shows the current recording mode.

➲ “Setting the CD recording mode” ➞ Page 158

(2) Recording progress indicator

Shows the progress of the recording. Fractions

show number of recorded tracks total number of

tracks in the CD.

(3) Recording indicator

Shows the recording status. (Red) indicates

that recording is in progress. (Blue) indicates

preparing recording.

(4) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(5) Track indicator

Shows the number and title of the track currently

playing.

(6) Artist name indicator

Shows the name of the artist currently playing.

(7) Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

track.

(8) Track list

Shows tracks in the CD.

(9) Record status of tracks

: Recorded track

(Red): Track being recorded

(Blue): Track is not recorded yet

❒ Track selection operation or special playback

functions such as random play are disabled

until recording finishes. To select tracks or

perform special playback functions, touch

[Stop] to stop recording.

Title display

Music recognition technology and related data

are provided by Gracenote

. Gracenote is the

industry standard in music recognition technol-

ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-

mation visit www.gracenote.com.

❒ Title information will be displayed when the

information is found in the Gracenote

Data-

base on the built-in hard disk drive.

If you insert a CD-TEXT disc, the system priori-

tized a title information encoded in CD-TEXT

disc.

❒ When multiple options for the title information

are found or no title information exists, [–] is

displayed. A title may be displayed if you

update the title information manually after

recording has finished.

(4) (1) (2) (6) (7)

(9) (8) (5)

(3)

“100%” appears to indicate that the recording

has completed. You can touch [Stop] to

switch the screen and perform another opera-

tion.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 117 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

118

Chapter 12

Using the AV Source (Music Library) AV

➲ “Assigning another candidate for title infor-

mation” ➞ Page 128

❒ If no title information exists in the Gracenote

Database on the built-in hard disk drive, the

date when the track was recorded is entered

automatically. If you want to display the title

information, enter the title manually after

recording has finished.

➲ “Editing a playlist or tracks” ➞ Page 123

❒ The title information displayed on the CD play-

back screen and the recording screen is syn-

chronized with the one edited in the music

library. If you edit the title information in the

music library, the title displayed on each

screen will change accordingly.

➲ “Editing a playlist or tracks” ➞ Page 123

❒ Title information can only be edited when one

or more tracks are recorded in the music

library.

❒ Once you record a CD-TEXT disc, the title

information encoded in CD-TEXT disc is also

stored into the hard disk drive. (If you edit the

title information with the Music library, the

edited title will be shown.)

Recording all tracks in a CD

When you play back a CD that is not recorded, it

is automatically recorded in the music library

(hard disk drive).

❒ All tracks are automatically recorded (Auto)

in the default setting.

➲ “Setting the CD recording mode” ➞ Page 158

1 Insert the CD that you want to record.

Recording automatically starts.

❒ To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

When recording finishes, the system returns

to the normal playback screen of the CD in the

blank between current track and next track.

❒ If the CD is scratched or damaged, no data

can be recorded on that part. In such a

case, the track that falls on that part may

be skipped.

Recording a CD manually

You can record only your favorite tracks in the

CD.

1 [REC Mode] is set to [Manual].

➲ “Setting the CD recording mode” ➞

Page 158

❒ The REC Mode cannot be changed during

recording.

2 Play back the track you want to record.

3 Touch [REC].

The track being played is recorded.

When recording finishes, the system returns

to the normal playback screen of the CD in the

end of the track.

❒ To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

Recording only the first track of

a CD

You can record only the first track of the CD. This

mode is useful when you want to record only the

first tracks from multiple CD singles (or EPs) con-

secutively.

1 [REC Mode] is set to [Single].

➲ “Setting the CD recording mode” ➞

Page 158

❒ The REC Mode cannot be changed during

recording.

2 Insert the CD you want to record.

Recording automatically starts for the first

track.

When recording finishes, the system returns

to the normal playback screen of the CD in the

end of the track.

❒ To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

Stopping CD recording

You can stop recording while recording a CD.

(Recording can resume depending on the record-

ing mode.)

1 Touch [Stop].

When REC Mode is [Auto] or [Single]:

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 118 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

119

AV Chapter 12 Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Recording is paused, and the system starts

normal CD playback. To resume recording,

touch [REC]. Recording also resumes in the

following cases:

— When you switch to another source, and

then return to the CD source.

— When you turn off the ignition switch of the

vehicle, and then restart the engine.

When REC Mode is [Manual]:

Recording is stopped. Touch [REC] to record

the track being played.

Notes on CD recording

❒ Operations on the navigation system may take

more time during recording than normal.

❒ Tracks from a CD are recorded in 4 times

speed. You can listen to that sound during

recording.

❒ The data is recorded using a highly efficient

compression method, so the sound may

slightly differ from the original depending on

the sound source. Noise may be heard in

some cases, but this is not an malfunction.

❒ Recording is possible only with a CD that con-

tains 44.1 kHz, 16-bit-stereo PCM digital audio

data.

❒ Recording (or copying) to the music library is

not possible from recording media (such as

CD-Rs) in which a CD or other data is digitally

stored. This is due to the Serial Copy Manage-

ment System (SCMS) that was developed to

prevent second-generation or serial copies.

❒ Recording to the music library is not possible

from media (such as CD-Rs) in which MP3

files are stored.

❒ When you are recording a CD with no track

intervals (such as a live concert CD), if the

engine stops and the power turns off, the

sound may break in a track when the music

data is played back.

Music Library Play

You can play back or edit the tracks recorded in

the hard disk drive in the source named music

library (LIBRARY).

Selecting [LIBRARY] as the

source

1 Touch the source icon and touch

[LIBRARY].

For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 103

Screen configuration

Music Library (LIBRARY)

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Group name indicator

Shows the group currently playing.

(3) Playlist name indicator

Shows the playlist currently playing.

(4) Track indicator

Shows the number and title of the track currently

playing.

(5) Playback method indicator

Shows which playback method has been

selected.

(6) Artist name indicator

Shows the name of the artist currently playing.

(7) Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

track.

(8) Track list and playlist

Shows the track list or the playlist currently play-

ing or temporary displayed.

The icon on the left indicates that the item is a

Also see “Notes for Hard Disk Drive” for

more cautions about handling hard disk

drive.

➲ “Notes for Hard Disk Drive” ➞ Page 22

(8)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (6) (7)

(5)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 119 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

120

Chapter 12

Using the AV Source (Music Library) AV

“Playlist”, and the icon indicates that the item

is a “Track”.

Title display

Music recognition technology and related data

are provided by Gracenote

. Gracenote is the

industry standard in music recognition technol-

ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-

mation visit www.gracenote.com.

❒ If no title information exists in the Gracenote

Database on the built-in hard disk drive, the

date when the track was recorded is entered

automatically. If you want to display the title

information, enter the title manually after

recording has finished.

➲ “Changing the title of the playlist or track” ➞

Page 125

Relationship of groups, playlists, and

tracks

The music library is organized as follows with

three levels: groups, playlists, and tracks.

There are four types of groups:

Album group ([Albums]):

Stores the recorded track data in its original

order. One playlist is automatically created when

a CD is recorded.

Artist group ([Artists]):

Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted by art-

ist names.

Genre group ([Genres]):

Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted by

genres.

My Favorite group ([My Favorites]):

Stores playlists registered with your favorite

selection.

Maximum number you can register

If you try to record one playlist more than the

number listed above, the oldest playlist will be

deleted.

Touch key operation

Listening to a track recorded in the

Music Library

1 Touch the source icon and then touch

[LIBRARY].

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys

(1) Select a desired track from the list

Touch a desired track to play.

❒ Touching or switches to the next or previ-

ous page in the list.

(2) Playback and Pause

Touching  switches between “playback” and

“pause”.

(3) Touch: Skip the track forward or back-

ward

Touching  skips to the start of the next track.

Touching  once skips to the start of the cur-

rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-

ous track.

Touch and hold: fast backward or forward

❒ You can also perform these operations by

using the TRK (/) button.

(4) View upper contents

Touching displays the contents of the

upper playlist or group.

❒ You cannot touch on the group selec-

tion screen.

➲ “Relationship of groups, playlists, and tracks”

➞ Page 120

Group Playlist Tracks for a playlist

[Albums]400 99

[Artists]400 400

[Genres]13 400

[My Favor-

ites]

599

(3) (5) (4)

(2)

(7)

(9)(8)(6)

(1)

(3)

(10)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 120 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

121

AV Chapter 12 Using the AV Source (Music Library)

(5) Display group selection screen

You can search a track from categories.

➲ Search for a playlist ➞ Page 121

(6) Display the details information screen

Displays the information about the track or playl-

ist displayed in blue on the track list. On the

details information, you can delete the track or

edit the track information.

➲ “Editing a playlist or tracks” ➞ Page 123

(7) Touch and hold: Register the track in My

Mix.

➲ “Registering a track to “My Mix” playlist in one

action” ➞ Page 122

(8) Repeat play

Each touch of changes the repeat range

as follows:

• Track Repeat — Repeat just the current track

• Playlist Repeat — Repeat just the current

playlist

• No display — Repeat the currently selected

group

❒ Repeat play may stop if you perform an opera-

tion that affects a track outside the repeating

range during track repeat play.

❒ If you perform random play or scan play dur-

ing track repeat play, the repeating range

changes to Playlist Repeat.

(9) Play tracks in random order

The selected tracks in the repeated range are ran-

domly played.

❒ Random play may stop if you perform an oper-

ation that affects a track outside the repeating

range or perform repeat play or scan play dur-

ing track repeat play.

❒ When the range of repeat play is Track

Repeat, if you perform random play, the

repeating range changes to Playlist Repeat.

(10) Scan play

Scan play will be performed for the selected

repeat range.

❒ When the range of repeat play is Track

Repeat, if you perform scan play, the repeat-

ing range changes to Playlist Repeat.

❒ When you find the desired track, touch

to turn scan play off.

❒ After track or playlist scanning is finished,

normal playback of the tracks will begin again.

Searching a track from the playlist

Once tracks are recorded, the navigation system

categorizes them in a “Group”, and several types

of playlists are automatically created. A playlist is

a list that shows the playback order of tracks.

➲ “Relationship of groups, playlists, and tracks”

➞ Page 120

Searching for an album

Select a playlist formed by an album, and play it

back.

1 Touch [Search].

The group selection screen appears.

2 Touch [Albums].

3 Touch the album name (“Album” playlist)

you want to play back.

The first track in the selected playlist is played

back.

Indicator Implication

[Random]

only

Tracks of all playlists in the group

are played in random order.

[Playlist

Repeat] and

[Random]

Tracks in the selected playlist are

played in random order.

Indicator Implication

[Scan] only

The beginning of the first tracks of

each playlist in the group is played

for about 10 seconds.

[Playlist

Repeat] and

[Scan]

The beginning of each track in the

selected playlist is played for

about 10 seconds.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 121 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

122

Chapter 12

Using the AV Source (Music Library) AV

Searching the playlist by artist

Select a playlist formed by an artist, and play it

back.

1 Touch [Search].

The group selection screen appears.

2 Touch [Artists].

“Artist” playlist appears.

3 Touch the artist name (“Artist” playlist)

you want to play back.

The first track in the selected playlist is played

back.

Search a playlist by genre

Select a playlist formed by a genre, and play it

back.

❒ Only the genre of a recorded track is displayed

in a genre playlist.

1 Touch [Search].

The group selection screen appears.

2 Touch [Genres].

“Genre” playlist appears.

3 Touch the genre (“Genre” playlist) you

want to play back.

The first track in the selected playlist is played

back.

Creating a playlist with a cus-

tomized order

You can register your favorite tracks as a playlist,

and play them back in desired order.

[My Favorites] group has two types of playlists.

“My Mix” playlist:

You can register the track being played in one

action.

“My Favorite 1-4” playlist:

You can register tracks from the detailed screen

information.

Registering a track to “My Mix” playlist

in one action

You can register the track being played to the

favorite playlist called “My Mix”.

1 Touch and hold [Memo] while playing

back the track you want to register.

The track being played is registered in “My

Mix” playlist.

1 Play back the track you want to register.

2 Touch , then touch [Add to My

Favorites].

3 Touch the playlist ([My Favorite 1] to [My

Favorite 4] or [My Mix]) in which you

want to register the track.

4 Touch [Yes].

The track is registered in the selected My

Favorite playlist.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 122 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

123

AV Chapter 12 Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Registering multiple tracks at a time

1 Play back the playlist that contains the

tracks you want to register.

2 Touch to display the list of playl-

ists.

3 Touch , then touch [Add to My

Favorites].

The item displayed in blue is the selected play-

list.

4 Touch the playlist ([My Favorite 1] to [My

Favorite 4] or [My Mix]) in which you

want to register the tracks.

5 Touch the tracks you want to register.

When you touch a track, a check mark

appears indicating that it is selected. To dese-

lect it, touch the track again.

Touch  to proceed to the next operation.

[Select All]:

Selects all tracks in the playlist.

[All Off]:

Cancels selection of all tracks in the playlist.

6 Touch [Back].

7 Touch [Yes].

The tracks are registered in the selected “My

Favorite” playlist.

❒ Up to 99 tracks can be registered in one

“My Favorite” playlist.

Editing a playlist or tracks

You can edit the tracks or playlist recorded in the

Music library.

Only the playlists and tracks in the [Albums]

group and the [My Favorites] group can be

edited. In the [Artist] group, only the pronuncia-

tion of the artist playlist can be edited.

Switching to the edit mode

1 Touch the playlist in the [Albums], [My

Favorites], or [Artists].

2 Touch the track you want to edit.

The item displayed in blue is the track cur-

rently playing.

3 Touch .

The system enters the track edit mode.

➲ “Operating the track edit mode” ➞

Page 124

4 Touch [Back] to return the previous

screen.

5 Touch to return to the previous

level.

The item displayed in blue is the selected play-

list.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 123 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

124

Chapter 12

Using the AV Source (Music Library) AV

6 Touch .

The system enters the playlist edit mode.

❒ To return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

Operating the playlist edit mode

“Album” playlist:

All editing operations are possible. The edited

contents will be reflected to all groups in the hard

disk drive.

“My Mix” playlist, “My Favorite” playlist:

Only (4), (6), and (8) can be performed.

(1) Enter a desired playlist title

➲ “Changing the title of the playlist or track” ➞

Page 125

(2) Edit the pronunciation that is used as a

voice command for voice recognition

➲ “Changing the pronunciation of a playlist

name or track name” ➞ Page 125

(3) Enter a desired artist name

➲ “Renaming an artist name in the playlist or

track” ➞ Page 126

(4) Sort playback order of the playlists

➲ “Sorting the playlists” ➞ Page 126

(5) Delete the playlist

➲ “Deleting a playlist” ➞ Page 127

(6) Delete the selected tracks from that playl-

ist

➲ “Deleting a track from the playlist” ➞

Page 127

(7) Update title information

➲ “Assigning another candidate for title infor-

mation” ➞ Page 128

(8) Add the selected tracks to “My Favorite”

➲ “Registering multiple tracks at a time” ➞

Page 123

Operating the track edit mode

“Album” playlist:

All items can be edited except for (5). The edited

contents will be reflected to all groups in the hard

disk drive.

“My Mix” playlist, “My Favorite” playlist:

Only (5), (6), (8) can be performed.

(1) Enter a desired track title

➲ “Changing the title of the playlist or track” ➞

Page 125

(2) Edit the pronunciation that is used as a

voice command for voice recognition

➲ “Changing the pronunciation of a playlist

name or track name” ➞ Page 125

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(4) (6) (8)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(6) (7)

(4)

(8)

(6)(5) (8)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 124 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

125

AV Chapter 12 Using the AV Source (Music Library)

(3) Enter a desired artist name

➲ “Renaming an artist name in the playlist or

track” ➞ Page 126

(4) Change genre

➲ “Changing the genre of a track” ➞ Page 128

(5) Change the order to play back tracks

➲ “Sorting the tracks in “My Mix” (“My Favorite”)

playlist” ➞ Page 127

(6) Delete the current track

➲ “Deleting the current track” ➞ Page 127

(7) Update track title information

➲ “Assigning another candidate for title infor-

mation” ➞ Page 128

(8) Add the track to “My Favorite”

➲ “Register tracks one by one” ➞ Page 122

Changing the title of the playlist or

track

You can change titles of playlists or tracks. The

titles changed here are displayed on the screen.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit

mode.

➲ “Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 123

2 Touch [Title].

3 Touch [Yes].

The content to be changed in Step 4 can be

reflected to the voice command.

[No]:

Proceeds to the next step without registering

it as a voice command.

4 Enter a new character string, and then

touch [OK].

❒ Touch [Small] to enter lowercase letters.

Touch [Caps.] to enter uppercase letters.

Touch to toggle the selection.

The system pronounces the character string

once, and the pronunciation confirmation

message appears.

[No]:

Completes the edit without editing the pro-

nunciation.

[Repeat]:

You can listen to the pronunciation again.

❒ If the pronunciation is not the desired one,

edit the characters so that the pronuncia-

tion matches your desired pronunciation.

5 Touch [Yes].

The changed character string is fixed and the

system returns to the previous screen.

Changing the pronunciation of a playl-

ist name or track name

You can change the pronunciation of a playlist or

track name. The pronunciation is used as a com-

mand for voice recognition.

❒ Only pronunciation can be edited for the

“Artist” playlist.

❒ The navigation system recognizes only the

voice recognition characters registered in the

current language. If you change the interface

language, the voice recognition character reg-

istered before you change the language will

not be recognized.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit

mode.

➲ “Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 123

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 125 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

126

Chapter 12

Using the AV Source (Music Library) AV

2 Touch .

3 Enter a new character string, and then

touch [OK].

The system pronounces the character once,

and the pronunciation confirmation message

appears. Touch [Yes] to fix the change.

[No]:

Returns to the detailed information screen.

[Repeat]:

You can listen to the pronunciation again.

❒ If the pronunciation is not the desired one,

edit the characters so that the pronuncia-

tion matches your desired pronunciation.

4 Touch [Yes].

The changed character is fixed and the sys-

tem returns to the previous screen.

Renaming an artist name in the playlist

or track

You can rename the artist name in the playlist or

track.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit

mode.

➲ “Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 123

2 Touch [Artist].

3 Touch [Select from history List].

[Keyboard Input]:

The character input screen appears, and you

can change the artist name with the keyboard.

4 Select an artist name from the list.

The artist name is changed to the one you

selected. In the playlist edit mode, touching

[Yes] changes the artist name to the one you

selected.

Sorting the playlists

The playback order of playlists in the group can

be changed.

❒ If there is only one playlist, the playback order

cannot be changed.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode.

➲ “Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 123

2 Touch [Sort Playlists].

3 Touch the playlist that you want to

change the order for.

4 Touch , , , or to determine the

position you want to put.

Moves playlists by page.

Moves playlists one by one.

5 Touch the selected playlist again.

The position of that playlist is fixed.

6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the

playback order of other playlists.

7 Touch [ESC].

The new order is fixed, and the system returns

to the normal playback screen.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 126 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

127

AV Chapter 12 Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Sorting the tracks in “My Mix” (“My

Favorite”) playlist

The playback order of tracks in the “My Mix”

playlist and “My Favorite” playlist can be

changed.

1 Enter the track edit mode.

➲ “Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 123

2 Touch [Sort Tracklists].

3 Touch the track that you want to change.

4 Touch , , , or to determine the

destination.

5 Touch the selected track again.

The destination is fixed.

6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the

playback order of other tracks.

7 Touch [ESC].

The new order is fixed, and the system returns

to the normal playback screen.

Deleting a playlist

You can delete a playlist in [Albums] group. (You

cannot delete playlists in other groups.)

❒ If you delete a playlist in [Albums] group, all

tracks in the playlist are deleted from the hard

disk drive. (They are deleted from [My Favor-

ites] group at the same time.)

❒ If you delete the playlist, the system does not

delete the edited title information, such as

album title, artist name, or track name.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode.

➲ “Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 123

2 Touch [Delete This Playlists].

3 Touch [Yes].

The playlist is deleted.

Deleting a track from the playlist

You can delete tracks from the playlist.

❒ If you delete a track in the [Albums] group,

the track is deleted from the hard disk drive. (It

is deleted from [My Favorites] group at the

same time.)

❒ If you delete the track, the system does not

delete the edited title information.

❒ If you delete the tracks in “My Mix” playlist or

“My Favorite” playlist, they are only deleted

from the playlist, and not from the hard disk

drive.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode.

➲ “Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 123

2 Touch [Delete Tracks].

3 Touch the tracks you want to delete.

When you touch a track, a check mark

appears indicating that it is selected. To dese-

lect it, touch the track again.

Touch  to proceed to the next operation.

[Select All]:

Selects all tracks in the playlist.

[All Off]:

Cancels the selection of all tracks in the playl-

ist.

4 Touch [Back].

5 Touch [Yes].

Deleting the current track

❒ If you delete the track, the track is deleted

from the hard disk drive. (It is deleted from

[My Favorites] group at the same time.)

❒ If you delete the track, the system does not

delete the edited title information.

❒ If you delete the tracks in “My Mix” playlist or

“My Favorite” playlist, they are only deleted

from the playlist, and not from the hard disk

drive.

1 Enter the track edit mode.

➲ “Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 123

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 127 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

128

Chapter 12

Using the AV Source (Music Library) AV

2 Touch [Delete This Track].

3 Touch [Yes].

Changing the genre of a track

1 Enter the track edit mode.

➲ “Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 123

2 Touch [Genres].

3 Select the desired genre from the list.

The genre is changed, and the system returns

to the previous screen.

Assigning another candidate for

title information

If the current title information is not desired title,

you can search for another title information from

Gracenote

Database in the hard disk drive man-

ually and assign another candidate.

If there were multiple options for the title informa-

tion, you can select one title from them.

❒ Music recognition technology and related

data are provided by Gracenote

. Gracenote

is the industry standard in music recognition

technology and related content delivery. For

more information visit www.gracenote.com.

❒ Once you update the title information, the

information you edit before will be overwritten

by the title information of the Gracenote

Database.

1 Select the playlist in [Albums] group, and

enter the playlist edit mode or track edit

mode.

➲ “Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 123

2 Touch [Update Title].

Information search begins. When the title

information is obtained, the candidates

screen appears.

3 Select the desired album title from the

list.

The title information is updated to the one you

selected.

The updates for the Gracenote

Database

will be available in the future. You can

download the latest update from Pioneer

website by using your PC. To install the

update, burn the data onto a CD-R(-RW)

and insert it into your navigation system.

When you download the files and install

the update, follow the instructions in the

website.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 128 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

129

Chapter 13 Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)AV

Chapter 13

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

Operating the XM Satellite

Radio

You can use the navigation system to control an

XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold sepa-

rately.

For details concerning operation, refer to the XM

tuner’s operation manuals. This section provides

information on XM operations with the navigation

system which differs from that described in the

XM tuner’s operation manual.

Selecting [XM] as the source

1 Touch the source icon and touch [XM].

➲ For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 103

Screen configuration

GEX-P10XMT, GEX-P920XM

All Ch Mode

Category Mode

GEX-P910XM, GEX-P900XM

About the logo for channel name

Only the logo data that is contained in the naviga-

tion system can be displayed for each channel.

The logo of a newly established channel that is

not contained cannot be displayed. When no logo

can be displayed, the following substitute icon is

displayed.

Substitute icon

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) XM band indicator

Shows the XM band which has been selected.

(3) XM channel number indicator

Shows XM channel number the tuner is currently

tuned to.

(4) XM station name indicator

Shows XM broadcast station name the tuner is

currently tuned to.

(5) XM channel select mode indicator

Shows what channel select mode has been

selected. You can select a channel from all chan-

nels in All Ch Mode, and select a channel from

selected category in Category Mode.

➲ “Switching the XM channel select mode” ➞

Page 130

(6) XM channel category

Shows the category of broadcast channel.

(8)

(6)(3)(4)(2)(1) (5)

(7)

(9)

(8)

(3)(2)(1) (5)

(7)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 129 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

130

Chapter 13

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS) AV

(7) XM station name logo

❒ The message “-ON THE AIR-“ disappears

if the navigation system cannot receive XM

tuner reception for some reason.

❒ If you use GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM,

the logo for channel name is not available.

(8) Detail information

Shows the detailed information of the broadcast

channel currently being received.

(9) Category icon

Shows the category icon for the selected chan-

nel.

Touch key operation

1 Touch the source icon and then touch

[XM] to select the XM.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys (GEX-P10XMT, GEX-P920XM)

Page 1 (All Ch Mode)

Page 1 (Category Mode)

Page 2

Touch keys (GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM)

(1) Touch: Recalling channels from the pre-

set

Touch to recall the preset channel.

❒ In All Ch Mode, you can also recall the preset

channel by pressing the P.LIST (/) but-

ton.

❒ In Category Mode, the screen shows cate-

gory search.

Touch and hold: Storing broadcast stations

You can register the channel currently being

broadcast to the preset list.

❒ Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM

bands can be stored in memory.

❒ If you use GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM, the

channel number does not appear on the

touch key.

(2) Perform manual tuning

The channels move up or down one at a time.

❒ If you keep touching or you

can skip broadcasting channels.

❒ You can also perform these operations by

using the TRK (/) button.

(3) Switching to the list display*

You can select a desired channel from the list dis-

play.

➲ “Selecting a channel from the XM channel list

display” ➞ Page 131

(4) Switching the XM channel select mode

You can switch the mode between the two meth-

ods for selecting and listing the channel.

All Ch Mode :

You can select a channel from all channels when

you operate.

(1)

(5)

(4)

(3) (6)

(2)

(5)

(4)

(3) (6)

(2)

(11)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(12)

Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be

used on GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 130 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

131

Chapter 13 Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)AV

Category Mode :

You can select a channel within selected cate-

gory when you operate.

(5) Select an XM band

Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired XM

band is displayed, XM 1, XM 2 or XM 3. This is

useful for switching the preset.

(6) Switching the touch keys to next page

(7) Memorizing the current song*

The song title and artist name being broadcast

will be memorized in “My Mix”. When a song that

matches the song information memorized in “My

Mix” is broadcast, you can tune the channel to

the one that is broadcasting that song.

➲ “Memorizing the song title and the artist

name of a song” ➞ Page 132

(8) Setting the notification of the memorized

songs*

You can set an alert for the songs memorized in

“My Mix”. You can also delete the memorized

song.

➲ “Setting the alert for each memorized song”

➞ Page 132

➲ “Deleting the memorized songs” ➞ Page 132

(9) Selecting an XM channel directly

You can select an XM channel directly by enter-

ing the desired channel number.

Enter the channel number, touch [Enter], and

then touch [Back].

❒ To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].

❒ This function in not available with GEX-

P900XM.

(10) Switching the touch keys to previous

page

(11) Switching the channel category

Touch [Up] or [Down] to select the desired cate-

gory.

(12) Switching the XM information

Each touch of [DISP] changes the display on the

bottom of the detail information as follows:

GEX-P900XM:

Channel name — Artist name/feature — Song/

program title — Information — Channel number

GEX-P910XM:

Channel name — Artist name/feature — Song/

program title — Channel category

❒ This function is not available with GEX-

P10XMT and GEX-P920XM.

Display the Radio ID

If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is displayed.

1 Touch [10Key Direct].

2 Input [000] and then touch [Enter].

If you select another channel, display of the

Radio ID is canceled.

❒ You can also display the Radio ID to select

[RADIO ID] from channel category in the

Category Mode.

Selecting a channel from the XM

channel list display

The list content can be switched so you can

search for the track you want to listen to not only

by the channel name but also by the artist name

or song title.

❒ The channel list shows all channels during

the All Ch Mode, and the channels included

in the selected category during the Category

Mode. To switch the channel mode, touch

[Mode].

1 Touch [List].

XM channel list appears in the display.

Each touch of the [List] changes the settings

as follows:

Detail information display — Ch Name List

(Channel name) — Song Title List (Song title)

— Artist Name List (Artist name)

2 Touch the desired channel that you want

to listen to.

Touch or to switch to the next page or

previous page.

❒ During the Category Mode, touch [Up] or

[Down] to switch to another category.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 131 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

132

Chapter 13

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS) AV

Using “My Mix” function

“My Mix” function memorizes the song title and

artist name of the song currently being received.

When the song that matches the memorized

song title and artist name is being broadcast on a

station other than the one you are listening to,

you will be alerted, and you can switch the station

to listen to that song.

A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the song

title and the artist name are memorized.

Memorizing the song title and the artist

name of a song

The song title and artist name of the song you are

listening to can be memorized to “My Mix”.

1 Touch and hold [Memo].

The song title and artist name of current song

you are listening to are memorized, and a con-

firmation message appears.

❒ The song title and artist name of up to 15

songs can be memorized. Trying to save

more than 15 songs will overwrite old ones.

❒ The song title or the artist name cannot be

memorized when [--------] is displayed on

the title information.

❒ This function invalid for the channel 000.

❒ There is a possibility the memorized title is

not displayed correctly.

When the memorized song is broadcast

Alert message is displayed. Touch [Yes] to switch

to that station, and you can listen to that track.

❒ If the memorized song is not selected in “My

Mix” list or [Alert Off] is selected, no notifica-

tion will be provided even when that song is

broadcast.

➲ “Setting the alert for each memorized song”

➞ Page 132

➲ “Switching the alert setting” ➞ Page 132

❒ If there is slight difference between the mem-

orized title and the title of the song being

broadcast, no notification will be provided

though they are the same song.

❒ Alert may not be provided depending on the

situation of the navigation system.

Setting the alert for each memorized

song

You can change the setting of the alert when the

track is broadcast again. You can enable or dis-

able alert for each song.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].

Memorized song list (“My Mix” list) will be dis-

played. If the alert setting for the song is on,

the square on the right is blue. Otherwise, the

square is inactive.

2 Touch the song title that you want to

exclude from the alert target.

The square on the right turn inactive and the

song title is excluded from the alert target.

❒ If you touch that again, the square will turn

blue and the song title is included in the

alert target.

Switching the alert setting

You can enable or disable the alert for all items at

once. This function will be useful when you want

to turn the alert off temporarily without changing

the condition of each memorized song.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].

2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].

❒ When the alert setting is [Alert Off],

is displayed on the information

plate.

Deleting the memorized songs

You can delete each one of the memorized songs

from the song title list.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].

2 Touch and hold the track you want to

delete.

A message will appear asking you to confirm

the deletion.

❒ To delete all songs that are memorized,

touch [Delete All].

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 132 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

133

Chapter 13 Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)AV

3 Touch [Yes].

Using the direct traffic

announcement function

You can listen to the memorized “Instant Traffic &

Weather” channel by directly calling it up with the

T button on the navigation unit. (Only one station

can be memorized.)

❒ This function is not available with GEX-

P910XM and GEX-P900XM.

Memorize a “Instant Traffic & Weather”

channel

1 Tune into “Instant Traffic & Weather”

channel.

2 Press and hold the T button for two sec-

onds or more.

That “Instant Traffic & Weather” channel will

be memorized.

❒ The channel 000 and 001 can not be mem-

orized newly (although the channel 001 is

the default).

❒ Even if you use the SIRIUS satellite radio

tuner together, only one station can be

memorized. The station memorized after-

ward will overwrite the existing one.

Calling up the memorized “Instant Traf-

fic & Weather” channel

1 Press the T button.

❒ You can call up a “Instant Traffic &

Weather” channel even from a source

other than the XM source.

❒ To cancel the announcement, touch

[TRFC Off] on the screen or press the T

button again.

Operating the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio

You can use the navigation system to control a

SIRIUS satellite digital tuner, which is sold sepa-

rately. For details concerning operation, refer to

the SIRIUS tuner’s operation manuals. This sec-

tion provides information on SIRIUS operations

with the navigation system which differs from

that described in the SIRIUS tuner’s operation

manual.

❒ The following functions are not available in

SIR-PNR1.

— Selecting team for game alert

— Displaying game information

— Using the song alert function

— Using the direct traffic announcement

function

Selecting [SIRIUS] as the

source

1 Touch the source icon and touch [SIR-

IUS].

➲ For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 103

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) SIRIUS band indicator

Shows the SIRIUS band which has been

selected.

(5)

(2)(1) (3)

(4)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 133 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

134

Chapter 13

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS) AV

(3) SIRIUS channel select mode indicator

Shows what channel select mode has been

selected. You can select a channel from all chan-

nels in All Ch Mode, and select a channel from

selected category in Category Mode.

➲ “Switch the SIRIUS channel select mode” ➞

Page 134

(4) SIRIUS channel number indicator

Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the tuner

is tuned to.

(5) Detail information

Shows the detail information of the broadcast

channel currently being received.

❒ The message “-ON THE AIR-” disappears if

the navigation system cannot receive SIRIUS

tuner reception for some reason.

➲ “Troubleshooting” ➞ Page 188

Touch key operation

1 Touch the source icon and then touch

[SIRIUS] to select the SIRIUS.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys

Page 1 (All Ch Mode)

Page 2 (All Ch Mode)

Page 1 (Category Mode)

(1) Touch: Recalling channels from the pre-

set

Touch to recall the preset channel.

❒ In All Ch Mode, you can recall the preset

channel by pressing the P.LIST (/) but-

ton.

❒ In Category Mode, the screen displays cate-

gory search.

Touch and hold: Storing broadcast stations

You can register the channel currently being

broadcast to the preset list.

❒ Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three SIRIUS

bands can be stored in memory.

(2) Perform manual tuning

The channels move up or down one at a time.

❒ If you keep touching or you

can skip broadcasting channels.

❒ You can also perform these operations by

using the TRK (/) button.

(3) Switch the SIRIUS display

Each touch of [DISP] changes the display infor-

mation.

Channel number — Channel name — Channel

category — Artist name/feature — Song/program

title — Composer

❒ Touch and hold to switch ON/OFF the infor-

mation scroll.

(4) Switch the SIRIUS channel select mode

You can switch the mode between the two meth-

ods for selecting and listing the channel.

All Ch Mode:

You can select a channel from all channels when

you operate.

(1)

(5)

(4)

(3) (6)

(2)

(11)

(9)

(8)

(12)

(10)

(7)

(13)

Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be

used on SIR-PNR1.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 134 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

135

Chapter 13 Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)AV

Category Mode:

You can select a channel within selected cate-

gory when you operate.

(5) Select a SIRIUS band

Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired SIRIUS

band is displayed, SIRIUS 1, SIRIUS 2, or SIR-

IUS 3. This is useful for switching the preset.

(6) Switch the touch keys to next page

(7) Select team for game alert*

You can register your favorite team.

➲ “Selecting teams for Game Alert” ➞ Page 135

➲ “Switching the Game Alert on or off” ➞

Page 135

(8) Display game information*

You can display game information and changes

to the broadcast channel.

➲ “Displaying game information (Game Info)” ➞

Page 136

(9) Memorize the current song*

The song title and artist name being broadcast

will be memorized in “My Mix”. When the song

that matches the song information memorized in

“My Mix” is broadcast, you can tune the channel

to the one that is broadcasting that song.

➲ “Memorizing the song title and the artist

name of a song” ➞ Page 136

(10) Set the notification of the memorized

songs*

You can set the alert for the songs memorized in

“My Mix”. You can also delete the memorized

song.

➲ “Setting the alert for each memorized song”

➞ Page 137

➲ “Deleting the memorized songs” ➞ Page 137

(11) Select a SIRIUS channel directly

The Channel number input screen appears. You

can select a SIRIUS channel directly by entering

the desired channel number.

While the input number is displayed, touch

[Enter], and then touch [Back].

❒ To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].

(12) Switch the touch keys to previous page

(13) Switch the channel category

Touch [Up] or [Down] to select the desired cate-

gory.

Selecting teams for Game Alert

This navigation system can alert you when games

involving your favorite teams are about to start. To

use this function you need to set the game alert

to the teams in advance.

1 Touch [Game Alert].

The League/Team Setting screen appears.

2 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to select the

league.

3 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to select the

team.

4 Touch [On/Off].

The team displayed as [On] is the alert target.

5 Touch [Alert On].

❒ When the selected team is excluded from

the alert target, the team is displayed as

[Off]. Up to 12 teams can be selected.

When you have already made 12 team

selections, Full is displayed and additional

team selection is not possible. In this case,

first delete the team selection and then try

again.

Switching the Game Alert on or off

You can enable or disable the alert for selected

items. This function will be useful when to turn

the alert off temporarily without changing the set-

ting of each selected team.

1 Touch [Game Alert].

The League/Team Setting screen appears.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 135 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

136

Chapter 13

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS) AV

2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].

❒ When the alert setting is [Alert Off],

is displayed on the information

plate.

When a game involving team is broad-

cast

A message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to switch

to that station, and you can view to that game

information. If you touch [Stay], the channel

does not switch.

❒ Alert may not be provided depending on the

situation of the navigation system.

Displaying game information

(Game Info)

You can display the game information of a team

that you have set an alert for, and change to the

broadcast channel.

❒ This function is unavailable if no team is

selected in the game alert function.

1 Touch [Game Info].

The game name and the broadcast channel

are also displayed.

2 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to view the

game score information which is regis-

tered.

❒ The game score will be updated automati-

cally.

❒ Touch [Tune To] to switch to the channel

that broadcasts the displayed game.

❒ If you have not made any team selections,

Not Set is displayed.

❒ When games involving your favorite teams

are not currently playing, No Game is dis-

played.

Using “My Mix” function

“My Mix” function memorizes the song title and

artist name of the song currently being received.

When the track that matches the memorized

song title and artist name is being broadcast on a

station other than the one you are listening to,

you will be alerted, and you can switch the station

to listen to that song.

❒ A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the

song title and the artist name are memorized.

Memorizing the song title and the artist

name of a song

The song title and artist name of the current song

you are listening to can be memorized to “My

Mix”.

1 Touch and hold [Memo].

The song title and artist name of the song you

are listening to are memorized, and [Song

Saved] is displayed.

❒ The song title and artist name of up to 10

tracks can be memorized. If you try to save

more than 10 tracks [FULL] is displayed.

❒ You cannot memorize a song that does not

have song title and artist name informa-

tion.

❒ There is a possibility the memorized title is

not displayed correctly.

When the memorized song is broadcast

Alert message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to

switch to that station, and you can listen to that

track. If you touch [Stay], the cannel does not

switch.

❒ If the alert for the song is “OFF” or [Alert Off] is

selected, no notification will be provided even

when that song is broadcast.

➲ “Setting the alert for each memorized song”

➞ Page 137

➲ “Switching the alert setting” ➞ Page 137

❒ If there is a slight difference between the

memorized title and the title of the track being

broadcast, no notification will be provided

though they are the same song.

❒ Alert may not be provided depending on the

situation of the navigation system.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 136 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

137

Chapter 13 Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)AV

Setting the alert for each memorized

song

You can change the setting of the alert when the

track is broadcast again. You can enable or dis-

able alert for each song.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].

“My Mix” setting screen will be displayed.

2 Touch [Previous] and [Next] to select the

song title that you want to exclude from

the alert target.

3 Touch [On/Off].

Each touch of [On/Off] turns the alert setting

for the song “ON” or “OFF”.

Switching the alert setting

You can enable or disable the alert for all items at

the time. This function will be useful when you

want to turn the alert off temporarily without

changing the condition of each memorized song.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].

2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].

❒ When the alert setting is [Alert Off],

is displayed on the information

plate.

Deleting the memorized songs

You can delete each one of the memorized songs.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].

2 Touch [Previous] or [Next] to select the

song title that you want to delete.

3 Touch [Delete This Song] when the song

you want to delete is displayed.

A message will appear asking you to confirm

the deletion.

4 Touch [Yes].

Using the Traffic & Weather pre-

set function

You can listen to the memorized Traffic &

Weather channel by directly calling it up with the

T button on the navigation system. (Only one sta-

tion can be memorized.)

Memorize a Traffic & Weather channel

1 Tune into the Traffic & Weather channel.

2 Press and hold the T button for two sec-

onds or more.

That Traffic & Weather channel will be memo-

rized.

❒ Even if you use the XM satellite radio tuner

together, only one station can be memo-

rized. The station memorized afterward will

overwrite the existing one.

Calling up the memorized Traffic &

Weather channel

1 Press the T button.

❒ You can call up a Traffic & Weather channel

even from a source other than the SIRIUS

source.

❒ To cancel the announcement, touch [TRFC

Off] on the screen or press the T button

again.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 137 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

138

Chapter 13

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS) AV

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 138 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

139

Chapter 14 Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)AV

Chapter 14

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)

When Pioneer audio equipment is connected to

the navigation system using IP-BUS or AV-BUS,

such equipment can be operated from the navi-

gation system. This chapter describes the opera-

tion of the audio source that can be used when

the Pioneer audio equipment is connected. When

reading this chapter, please also refer to the oper-

ation manual of the AV equipment connected to

the navigation system.

Operating the Multi-CD Player

You can use the navigation system to control a

multi-CD player, which is sold separately.

❒ Only those functions described in this manual

are available for multi-CD player. (Depending

on the multi-CD player, the function may be

invalid.)

Selecting [M-CD] as the source

1 Touch the source icon and touch [M-CD].

➲ For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 103

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Disc number indicator

Shows the disc currently playing.

(3) Disc title indicator*

Shows the title of the disc currently playing.

(4) Playback method indicator

Shows which repeat range has been selected.

(5) Track number indicator

Shows the track currently playing.

(6) Track title indicator*

Shows the title of the track currently playing.

(7) Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

track.

(8) Disc number display

Shows the number of the disc in the multi-CD

player.

❒ The titles of the items marked with an asterisk

(*) will be displayed only when the CD-TEXT

disc is used. When using a normal music CD,

they are displayed as [–].

Touch key operation

1 Touch the source icon and then touch [M-

CD] to select the multi-CD player.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys

❒ When the multi-CD player has performed the

preparatory operations, Ready is displayed.

❒ If the multi-CD player does not operate prop-

erly, an error message such as Error-XX may

be displayed. Refer to the multi-CD player

owner’s manual.

❒ If there are no discs in the multi-CD player

magazine, No Disc is displayed.

(1)

(4)

(5)

(2)

(3)

(8)

(7)

(6)

(4)

(5)

(3)

(8)

(7)(6)(1)

(2)

(3)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 139 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

140

Chapter 14

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV) AV

(1) Change the disc in the magazine

(2) Playback and Pause

Touching  switches between “playback” and

“pause”.

(3) Touch: Skip forward or backward

Touching  skips to the start of the next track.

Touching  once skips to the start of the cur-

rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-

ous track.

Touch and hold: fast backward or forward

Keep touching  or  to perform fast back-

ward or forward.

❒ You can also perform these operations by

using the TRK (/) button.

(4) Play back the previous disc

The disc before the currently played disc will be

played.

(5) Play back the next disc

The disc after the currently played disc will be

played.

(6) Repeat play

Each touch of changes the settings as fol-

lows:

Track Repeat — Repeat just the current track

Disc Repeat — Repeat the current disc

❒ If you select other discs during repeat play,

the repeat play range setting will be canceled.

❒ If you perform track search or fast forward/

rewind during Track Repeat, the repeat play

range changes to Disc Repeat.

(7) Play tracks in random order

Tracks will play in a random order within the pre-

viously selected repeat ranges.

❒ If you perform random play during [Track

Repeat], the repeat play range changes to

[Disc Repeat].

(8) Scan play

The first 10 seconds of each track of the current

disc (or the first track of each disc) are played.

❒ When you find the desired track (or disc)

touch to turn scan play off.

❒ After track or disc scanning is finished, nor-

mal playback of the tracks will begin again.

Indicator Implication

[Random]

only

Tracks of all disc in the magazine

are played in random order.

[Disc Repeat]

and [Random]

Tracks in the selected disc are

played in random order.

Indicator Implication

[Scan] only

The beginning of the first tracks of

each disc is played for about 10

seconds.

[Disc Repeat]

and [Scan]

The beginning of each track in the

selected disc is played for about

10 seconds.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 140 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

141

Chapter 14 Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)AV

Operating the iPod

You can control an iPod by combining the Pio-

neer iPod adapter (sold separately) to the naviga-

tion system. For details concerning operation,

refer to the owner’s manual of the iPod adapter.

This section provides information on iPod opera-

tions with the navigation system that differ from

those described in the owner’s manual of iPod

adapter.

❒ When you use the iPod (sold separately) with

this Navigation System, Pioneer iPod adapter

is required.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Selecting [iPod] as the source

1 Touch the source icon and touch [iPod].

➲ For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 103

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Song number indicator

Shows the number of the song playing in the

selected list.

(3) Repeat play indicator

Shows whether Repeat is selected for the current

song or all songs on current list.

(4) Shuffle play indicator

Shows whether Shuffle play is selected for songs

of albums.

(5) Album title indicator

Shows the title of the album for the song.

(6) Artist name indicator

Shows the name of the artist of the current song.

(7) Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

song.

(8) Song title indicator

Shows the title of the current song.

(9) Playing Song Information

Shows the information and status of the current

song.

(10) Song title, Artist name, and Album title

indicator

When playing a song, Song title, Artist name, and

Album title are displayed.

Touch key operation

1 Touch the source icon and then touch

[iPod] to select the iPod.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys

(1) Playback and Pause

Touching  switches between “playback” and

“pause”.

(2) Touch: Skip back or forward to another

song

Touching  skips to the start of the next song.

Touching  once skips to the start of the cur-

rent song. Touching again will skip to the previ-

ous song.

Touch and hold: fast forward or rewind

❒ You can also perform these operation with

pressing the TRK (/) button.

(3) Display the previous screen

Touch on the refine search or other screen to

return to the previous screen.

(1)

(2)

(5)

(3)

(4)

(6)

(7)

(10)

(9)

(8)

(2) (4) (3)

(2)

(1)

(6)(5)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 141 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

142

Chapter 14

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV) AV

(4) Narrow down the songs to play back

You can narrow down the choices of songs to

play from five categories.

➲ “Browsing for a song” ➞ Page 142

(5) Repeat play

Touch repeatedly until the desired repeat

range appears in the display.

• Repeat One — Repeat just the current song

• Repeat All — Repeat all songs in the selected

list

(6) Shuffle play

This function shuffles songs or albums and plays

them in random order.

Each touch of changes the settings as fol-

lows:

• Shuffle Songs — Play back songs in random

order within the selected list

• Shuffle Albums — Select an album ran-

domly, and then play back all songs in that

album in order

Browsing for a song

The operations for controlling an iPod with this

navigation system are designed to be close to

iPod operation. This allows you to search and

play songs as you would with an iPod.

1 Touch [Search].

If you do nothing about 30 seconds after Steps

1 to 4 are finished, the screen returns to the

previous screen.

2 Touch one of the categories in which you

want to search for a song.

• Playlists (playlists)

• Artists (artists)

• Albums (albums)

• Songs (songs)

• Genres (genres)

The search screen is displayed.

The icon on the left indicates that the item

is a “Playlist”, and the icon indicates that

the item is a “Song”.

❒ If you select [Songs], proceed to step 4.

❒ When you select Artists, Albums or

Genres you can start a playback of all

songs in the selected list. To do this, keep

touching the list title.

3 Touch the title of the list that you want to

play.

Repeat this operation until you find the

desired song.

❒ To return to the previous screen touch

4 From the song list, touch the song you

want to play.

❒ To go to the next page of the list, touch .

❒ To return to the previous page of the list,

touch .

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 142 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

143

Chapter 14 Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)AV

Operating the TV tuner

• For safety reasons, visual images cannot

be viewed while your vehicle is in motion.

To view visual images, you must stop in a

safe place and put on the parking brake

before setting your route (see page 20 for

details).

You can use the navigation system to control a TV

tuner (e.g. GEX-P6400TV, GEX-P5700TV), which is

sold separately. For details concerning operation,

refer to the TV tuner’s operation manual. This sec-

tion provides information on TV operations with

the navigation system that differ from those

described in the TV tuner’s operation manual.

When you attempt to watch visual images while

driving, the warning Viewing of front seat

video source while driving is strictly prohib-

ited. will appear on the screen.

Selecting [TV] as the source

1 Touch the source icon and touch [TV].

➲ For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 103

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Band indicator

Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to: TV 1

or TV 2.

(3) Preset number indicator

Shows which preset has been selected.

(4) Channel indicator

Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned to.

(5) Preset list display

Shows the preset list.

Touch key operation

1 Touch the source icon and then touch

[TV] to select the TV tuner.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys

(1) Select channels from the list

The list lets you see the list of channels and

select one of them to view.

❒ Touching or switches to the next or previ-

ous page in the list.

❒ You can register your favorite channels in the

list.

➲ “Storing and recalling broadcast stations” ➞

Page 144

(2) Touch: Perform manual tuning

The channels move up or down one step.

Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning

The tuner will scan the channels until a broad-

cast strong enough for good reception is found.

❒ If you keep touching or you

can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning

starts as soon as you release the keys.

❒ You can also perform these operation by using

the TRK (/) button.

(3) Store the strongest broadcast stations

sequentially

Twelve channels with strong reception sensitivity

can be registered automatically in the preset list.

➲ “Storing the strongest broadcast stations

sequentially” ➞ Page 144

(1) (2) (3)

(4)

(3)

(5)

(2)

(3)(4)(1)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 143 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

144

Chapter 14

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV) AV

(4) Change band

Touching [Band] switches between “TV 1” and

“TV 2”.

Storing and recalling broadcast

stations

If you touch any of the preset tuning keys [P1] —

[P12], you can easily store up to 12 broadcast sta-

tions for later recall with a touch of the key.

1 When you find a station that you want to

store in memory keep touching a preset

tuning key [P1] — [P12].

The selected station is stored in memory. The

next time you touch the same preset tuning

key [P1] — [P12] the station is recalled from

memory. To switch between [P1] — [P6] and

[P7] — [P12], touch or . When the touch

panel keys are not displayed, you can display

them by touching the screen.

❒ Up to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TV

bands can be stored in memory.

❒ You can also press the P.LIST (/) but-

ton to recall stations assigned to preset

tuning keys [P1] — [P12].

Storing the strongest broadcast

stations sequentially

1 Touch and hold [BSSM].

BSSM starts. The 12 strongest broadcast sta-

tions will be stored under preset tuning keys

[P1] — [P12] in order from the lowest channel

up.

❒ To cancel the storage process, touch

[Cancel].

❒ Storing broadcast stations with [BSSM]

may replace current broadcast stations

stored in preset memory.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 144 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

145

Chapter 15 Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)AV

Chapter 15

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

Operating the AV Input Source

(AV)

• For safety reasons, visual images cannot

be viewed while your vehicle is in motion.

To view visual images, you must stop in a

safe place and put on the parking brake

before setting your route (see page 20 for

details).

Selecting [AV INPUT] as the

source

1 [AV Input] is set to [Video].

➲ “Setting the video input” ➞ Page 156

2 Touch the source icon and touch [AV

INPUT].

➲ For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 103

Operating the External Unit

(EXT)

The term “external unit” refers to future Pioneer

devices that are not currently planned for, or

devices that allow control of basic functions

although they are not fully controlled by the navi-

gation system. Two external units can be con-

trolled by this navigation system. When two

external units are connected, the navigation sys-

tem allocates them to external unit 1 or external

unit 2. For details concerning operation, refer to

the external unit’s operation manual. This section

provides information on external unit operations

with the navigation system that differ from those

described in the external unit’s operation man-

ual.

❒ Operation varies depending on the external

unit connected. (In some cases, the external

unit may not respond.)

Selecting [EXT 1] or [EXT 2] as

the source

1 Touch the source icon and touch [EXT 1]

or [EXT 2].

➲ For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 103

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) External unit indicator

Displays any connected external units.

(3) Auto/Manual mode indicator

Shows the current mode.

➲ “Switching the automatic and manual func-

tion” ➞ Page 147

Touch key operation

1 Touch the source icon and then touch

[EXT 1] or [EXT 2] to select the external

unit.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

(

) (

)(

)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 145 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

146

Chapter 15

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX) AV

Touch keys

(1) Send an , , , or  command

Touch to operate the external unit.

❒ Operation varies depending on the external

unit connected. (In some cases, some func-

tions may not be used until you touch and

hold the key.)

(2) Send a band command

Touch to send a band command to the external

unit.

❒ Operation varies depending on the external

unit connected. (In some cases, the external

unit may not respond.)

(3) Send a 1 key to 6 key command

➲ “Operate the external unit by using 1 key — 6

key” ➞ Page 146

(4) Operate the external unit by using Func-

tion 1 to Function 4 key and Auto/Manual key

➲ “Operate the external unit by using Function 1

— Function 4” ➞ Page 146

➲ “Switching the automatic and manual func-

tion” ➞ Page 147

Operate the external unit by

using 1 key — 6 key

The external unit can be operated by transmitting

the operating commands set to 1 key — 6 key.

1 Touch [1] — [6].

2 Touch desired key ([1] — [6]) to operate

the external unit.

❒ To return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

❒ Operation varies depending on the exter-

nal unit connected. (In some cases, some

functions may not be used until you touch

and hold the key.)

Operate the external unit by

using Function 1 — Function 4

The external unit can be operated by transmitting

the operating commands set to Function 1 —

Function 4.

❒ The operating commands set to Function 1

— Function 4 vary depending on the external

unit.

1 Touch [Function].

2 Touch [Function 1, 2, 3 or 4].

The operation command is transmitted to the

external unit.

❒ Some functions may not be used until you

touch and hold the key.

❒ To return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

(2)

(1)

(4)

(3)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 146 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

147

AV Chapter 15 Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

Switching the automatic and

manual function

You can turn automatic and manual function on

or off. You can switch between Auto and Manual

functions of the external unit connected. Initially,

this function is set to Auto.

❒ Operating commands set for Auto and Man-

ual operations vary depending on the external

unit connected.

1 Touch [Function].

2 Touch [Auto/Manual].

Touching [Auto/Manual] switches between

[Auto] and [Manual].

❒ Operation varies depending on the exter-

nal unit connected. (In some cases, the

external unit may not respond.)

❒ To return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

Operating the AUX Input Source

(AUX)

An IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-

RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect

your navigation system to auxiliary equipment

featuring RCA output. For more details, refer to

the IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector owner’s manual.

Selecting [AUX] as the source

1 [AUX Input] is set to [On].

➲ “Switching the auxiliary setting” ➞

Page 157

2 Touch the source icon and touch [AUX].

➲ For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 103

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 147 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

148

Chapter 15

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX) AV

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 148 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

149

Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

Various settings are available with the audio

source according to your audiovisual needs. This

chapter describes the methods of changing the

various settings and setting the LCD panel.

AV Setting Overview

The audio visual setting is divided into [Audio

Settings] and [System Settings].

Audio Settings screen

System Settings screen

➲ Operation for [Audio Settings] ➞ Page 149

to 153

➲ Operation for [System Settings] ➞ Page 153

to 159

❒ When Pre Out (the subwoofer controller set-

ting in System Settings menu) is Full, the

Non Fading will be displayed instead of Sub

Woofer.

➲ “Setting the rear output and subwoofer con-

troller” ➞ Page 158

When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you

cannot select [Source Level].

How to Operate the Audio Set-

tings screen

1 Press the AV button.

The Navigation screen changes to the Audio

source screen (of any source).

2 Touch [AV Settings].

The AV Settings screen appears.

3 Touch the item you want to change.

4 Change Setting.

(E.g. Equalizer screen)

❒ Touch [ESC] to return to the selected

source screen currently.

❒ Touch [Back] to return to the AV Settings

screen.

Customizing the Audio Settings

Items

Using the equalizer

The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to

match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics as

desired.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 149 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

150

Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

Recalling equalizer curves

There are six stored equalizer curves which you

can easily recall. Here is a list of the equalizer

curves:

1 Touch [Equalizer] in the Audio Settings

menu.

2 Touch desired equalizer.

❒ When Flat is selected, no supplement or

correction is made to the sound. This is

useful to check the effect of the equalizer

curves by switching alternatively between

Flat and a set equalizer curve.

Adjusting equalizer curves

You can adjust the currently selected equalizer

curve setting as desired.

•A separate Custom1 curve can be created for

each source. If you make adjustments when a

curve Super Bass, Powerful, Natural,

Vocal, Flat, or Custom1 is selected,the equal-

izer curve settings will be memorized in

Custom1.

•A Custom2 curve can be created common to

all sources. If you make adjustments when the

Custom2 curve is selected, the Custom2

curve will be updated.

❒ The adjusted Custom1 curve is memorized

for each of the source selected, but one curve

is shared for the following sources.

• AM and FM

• EXT 1 and EXT 2

• AUX and AV INPUT

In the built-in DVD drive, different curves can

be memorized for a DVD-Video and a CD (CD-

DA or MP3).

You can adjust the center frequency, level and

the Q (curve characteristics) of each band

(Low/Mid/High).

• Band:

You can select the band you want to adjust.

• Frequency:

You can select which frequency to be set as

the center frequency.

• Level:

You can adjust the decibel (dB) level of the

selected band.

• Q:

You can select the details of the curve char-

acteristics. (The following figure shows the

characteristic image.)

1 Touch [Equalizer] in the Audio Settings

menu.

2 Touch [Customize].

The details setting screen appears.

Equalizer curve

Super Bass

Super Bass is a curve in which only low-range is

boosted.

Powerful (Default)

Powerful is a curve in which low-range and high-

range sounds are boosted.

Natural

Natural is a curve in which low-range and high-range

sounds are slightly boosted.

Vocal

Vocal is a curve in which the mid-range sounds, such

as the human vocal range, are boosted.

Flat

Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.

Custom1

Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-

ate. A separate custom curve can be created.

Custom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equalizer curves

that you create. Adjustments can be made with a 3-

band parametric equalizer.

Custom2

Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-

ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all

audio source.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 150 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

151

AV Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

3 Touch  or  to select the equalizer band

to adjust.

Each time you touch  or  selects equalizer

bands in the following order:

Low — Mid — High

4 Touch  or  to select the desired center

frequency.

Low: 40 — 80 — 100 — 160 (Hz)

Mid: 200 — 500 — 1K — 2K (Hz)

High: 3.15K — 8K — 10K — 12.5K (Hz)

5 Touch  or  to adjust the level of the

equalizer band.

Each time you touch  or  increases or

decreases the level of the equalization band.

+12dB to –12dB is displayed as the level is

increased or decreased.

6 Touch  or  to select the desired [Q].

Touch  or  until the desired the curve char-

acteristics appears in the display.

Wide2 — Wide1 — Narrow1 — Narrow2

❒ To adjust other bands, repeat step 3 to step

Setting the simulated sound

stage

You can select the desired effect from various

simulated sound stages, such as Music Studio or

Dynamic Theater. You can also adjust a listener

positioning effect.

Setting a stage that fits your image

1 Touch [Staging] in the Audio Settings

menu.

2 Touch desired stage setting.

❒ The [Living Room] setting that empha-

sizes mid-range sound hardly has any

effect near the maximum volume level.

❒ When you set staging to an option other

than [Off], the high pass filter (HPF) set-

ting turns [Off].

➲ “Using the high pass filter” ➞ Page 152

Adjusting a position effect

You can select a listener position that you want to

make as the center of sound effects.

1 Touch [Staging] in the Audio Settings

menu.

2 Touch [Position].

3 Touch desired position.

Using balance adjustment

You can select a fader/balance setting that pro-

vides an ideal listening environment in all occu-

pied seats.

1 Touch [FAD/BAL] in the Audio Settings

menu.

The FAD/BAL screen appears. When Rear SP

(the subwoofer controller setting in System

Settings menu) is Sub.w, the Balance will

be displayed instead of FAD/BAL.

➲ “Setting the rear output and subwoofer

controller” ➞ Page 158

2 Touch  or  to adjust front/rear speaker

balance.

Each time you touch  or  moves the front/

rear speaker balance towards the front or the

rear.

Front: 15 to Rear: 15 is displayed as the

front/rear speaker balance moves from front

to rear.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 151 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

152

Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

When the rear output setting is Rear SP

Sub.w, you cannot adjust front/rear speaker

balance.

➲ “Setting the rear output and subwoofer

controller” ➞ Page 158

3 Touch  or  to adjust left/right speaker

balance.

Each time you touch  or  moves the left/

right speaker balance towards the left or the

right.

Left: 9 to Right: 9 is displayed as the left/

right speaker balance moves from left to right.

Using subwoofer output

The navigation system is equipped with a sub-

woofer output which can be turned on or off.

❒ When the subwoofer output is on, you can

adjust the cut-off frequency, the output level,

and the phase of the subwoofer.

1 Touch [Sub Woofer] in the Audio Settings

menu.

When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-

ting in System Settings menu) is Full, you

cannot select [Sub Woofer].

➲ “Setting the rear output and subwoofer

controller” ➞ Page 158

2 Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output on.

To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].

3 Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select the

phase of subwoofer output.

❒ If subwoofer output sound is not clear with

[Normal], change it to [Reverse].

4 Touch  or  to select cut-off frequency.

Each time you touch  or  selects cut-off fre-

quencies in the following order:

50 — 80 — 125 (Hz)

Only frequencies lower than those in the

selected range are output from the subwoofer.

5 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the output level

of the subwoofer.

+6 to –6 is displayed as the level is increased

or decreased.

Using non fading output

When the non fading output setting is on, the

audio signal does not pass through the naviga-

tion system’s low pass filter (for the subwoofer),

but is output through the RCA output.

1 Touch [Non Fading] in the Audio Settings

menu.

Only when Preout (the subwoofer controller

setting in System Settings menu) is Full,

you can select [Non Fading].

➲ “Setting the rear output and subwoofer

controller” ➞ Page 158

2 Touch [On] to turn non fading output on.

To turn non fading output off, touch [Off].

3 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the output level

of the non fading.

+6 to –6 is displayed as the level is increased

or decreased.

Adjusting loudness

Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the

low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.

1 Touch [Loudness] in the Audio Settings

menu.

2 Touch [On] to turn loudness on.

To turn loudness off, touch [Off].

3 Touch  or  to select a desired level.

Each time you touch  or  selects level in

the following order:

Low — Mid — High

Using the high pass filter

When you do not want low sounds from the sub-

woofer output frequency range to play from the

front or rear speakers, turn the HPF (high pass fil-

ter) on. Only frequencies higher than those in the

selected range are output from the front or rear

speakers.

1 Touch [HPF] in the Audio Settings menu.

2 Touch [On] to turn high pass filter on.

To turn high pass filter off, touch [Off].

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 152 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

153

AV Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

3 Touch  or  to select cut-off frequency.

Each time you touch  or  selects cut-off fre-

quencies in the following order:

50 — 80 — 125 (Hz)

When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-

ting in System Settings menu) is Sub.w,

the HPF function is effective for front speak-

ers only.

If you change the acoustic field after you set it

once, the high pass filter (HPF) setting turns Off.

Adjusting source levels

Source Level (source level adjustment) lets you

adjust the volume level of each source to prevent

radical changes in volume when switching

between sources.

❒ Settings are based on the FM tuner volume

level, which remains unchanged.

1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with

the level of the source you wish to adjust.

2 Touch [Source Level] in the Audio Set-

tings menu.

3 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the source vol-

ume.

+8 to –8 is displayed as the source volume is

increased or decreased.

Sources are set to same source level adjust-

ment volume automatically.

• CD and ROM (MP3)

• XM and SIRIUS

• EXT 1 and EXT 2

• AUX and AV INPUT

Customizing the System Set-

tings Items

System Settings lets you perform system set up

of different settings for navigation system.

How to view and operate the

System Settings

1 Press the AV button.

The Navigation screen changes to the Audio

source screen (of any source).

2 Touch [AV Settings].

The AV Settings screen appears.

3 Touch [System Settings].

4 Touch the item you want to change.

The setting change screen appears, or the set-

ting changes by toggling it.

❒ Touch or to move to the

next or previous page.

5 Change Setting.

❒ Touch [ESC] to return to the selected

source screen.

❒ To return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 153 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

154

Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

Setting up the built-in DVD

drive

You can change the preference for playing a DVD

on the built-in DVD drive.

You can use this menu to change audio, subtitle,

parental lock, and other DVD settings.

Some changes or settings which you have set

here may be invalid depending on the features of

the DVD disc. For details, see the disc’s instruc-

tions.

❒ You can enter this menu while [DVD] is

selected as audio source.

❒ If you can enter this menu during DVD play-

back, playback will be stopped and return to

the first chapter.

Setting the language

You can set each desired language for subtitle,

audio and menu. If the selected language is

recorded on the DVD, subtitles, audio, and menu

are displayed in that language.

1 Switch the audio source to [DVD].

2 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-

tings menu.

3 Touch [Subtitle Language], [Audio Lan-

guage] or [Menu Language].

Each language menu is displayed and the cur-

rently set language is selected.

4 Touch the desired language.

When you select [Others], the language code

input display is shown. Input the four digit

code of the desired language then touch

[Enter].

➲ “Language Code Chart for DVD” ➞

Page 161

❒ If the selected language is not recorded on

the disc, the default language specified on

the disc is output and displayed.

❒ You can also switch the subtitle and audio

language by touching [Subtitle] or

[Audio] during playback.

➲ Changing the subtitle language during

playback (Multi-subtitle) ➞ Page 112

➲ Changing audio language during play-

back (Multi-audio) ➞ Page 112

Setting assist subtitles on or off

Assist subtitles offer explanations for the aurally

impaired. However, they are only displayed if they

are recorded on the DVD.

You can turn assist subtitles on or off as desired.

1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-

tings menu.

2 Touch [Assist Subtitle].

Touching [Assist Subtitle] switches between

[On] and [Off].

Setting angle icon display

You can set to display the angle icon on

scenes where the angle can be switched.

1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-

tings menu.

2 Touch [Multi Angle].

Touching [Multi Angle] switches between

[On] and [Off].

Setting the aspect ratio

There are two kinds of display. A wide screen dis-

play has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect) of

16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of

4:3. If you use a regular rear display has a TV

aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect radio suit-

able for your rear display. (We recommend use

this function only when you want to fit it to rear

display.)

❒ When using a regular display, select either

Letter Box or Panscan. Selecting 16:9 may

result in an unnatural picture.

1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-

tings menu.

2 Touch [TV Aspect].

Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the set-

tings as follows:

• 16:9 — Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-

played as it is (initial setting)

• Letter Box — The picture is in the shape of

a letter box with black bands at the top and

bottom of the screen

• Panscan — The picture is cut short at the

right and left of the screen

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 154 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

155

AV Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

❒ When playing discs that do not have a pan-

scan system, the disc is played back with

[Letter Box] even if you select the [Pan-

scan] setting. Confirm whether the disc

package bears the mark.

Setting the parental lock

Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental lock

to set restrictions so that children cannot watch a

violent and adult oriented scenes. You can set the

parental lock level in steps as desired.

❒ When you set a parental lock level and then

play a disc featuring parental lock, code num-

ber input indications may be displayed. In this

case, playback will begin when the correct

code number is input.

Setting the code number and level

When you first use this function, register your

code number. If you do not register a code num-

ber, parental lock will not operate.

1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-

tings menu.

2 Touch [Parental Level].

3 Touch [0] — [9] to input a four digit code

number.

4 While the input number is displayed,

touch [Enter].

The code number is registered, and you can

now set the level.

5 Touch any of [1] — [8] to select the

desired level.

The parental lock level is set.

• Level 8 — Playback of the entire disc is

possible (initial setting)

• Level 7 — Level 2 — Playback of discs for

children and non-adult oriented discs is

possible

• Level 1 — Only playback of discs for chil-

dren is possible

❒ If you want to change the parental level,

enter the registered code number in the

Step 3.

❒ We recommend that you keep a record of

your code number in case you forget it.

❒ The parental lock level is recorded on the

disc. You can confirm it by looking at the

disc package, the included literature or the

disc itself. With discs that do not feature a

recorded parental lock level, you cannot

use parental lock.

❒ With some discs, parental lock operates to

skip certain scenes only, after which nor-

mal playback resumes. For details, refer to

the disc’s instructions.

❒ If you forget the registered code number,

touch [Clear] 10 times on the screen in the

Step 3. The registered code number is can-

celed, letting you register a new one.

Changing the wide screen mode

• For safety reasons, these functions are not

available while your vehicle is in motion.

To enable these functions, you must stop

in a safe place and put on the parking

brake before setting your route (see page

20 for details).

1 Touch [Wide Mode] in the System Set-

tings menu.

The Wide Mode screen appears.

On the Wide Mode screen, you can select the

following items:

Full, Just, Cinema, Zoom, or Normal

[Normal] (normal):

A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving you

no sense of disparity since its proportions are

the same as that of the normal picture.

[Full] (full):

A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal

direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 TV

picture (normal picture) without any omis-

sions.

[Just] (just):

The picture is enlarged slightly at the center

and the amount of enlargement increases

horizontally toward the ends of the picture,

enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without

sensing any disparity even on a wide screen.

16 : 9 LB

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 155 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

156

Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

[Cinema] (cinema):

A picture is enlarged by the same proportion

as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direction

and by an intermediate proportion between

Full and Zoom in the vertical direction; ideal

for a cinema-sized picture (wide screen pic-

ture) where captions lie outside the frame.

[Zoom] (zoom):

A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same propor-

tion both vertically and horizontally; ideal for a

cinema-sized picture (wide screen picture).

❒ Different settings can be memorized for

each video source.

❒ When video is viewed in a wide screen

mode that does not match its original

aspect ratio, it may appear differently.

❒ Remember that use of this system for com-

mercial or public viewing purposes may

constitute an infringement on the author’s

rights protected by the Copyright Law.

❒ Video may appear grainy when viewed in

Cinema or Zoom mode.

❒ The navigation map and the rear view cam-

era picture is always Full.

Setting for rear view camera

The following two functions are available. The

rear view camera feature requires a separately

sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC2). (For details,

consult your dealer.)

Camera for backing up

The navigation system features a function that

automatically switches to the full-screen rear

camera image installed on your vehicle. When

the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) position, the

screen automatically switches to full-screen rear

view camera.

Camera for Rear view mode

[Rear View] can be displayed at all times (e.g.

when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a

split screen where map information is partially

displayed. Please be aware that in this setting,

camera image is not resized to fit, and that a por-

tion of what is seen by the camera is not view-

able.

• Pioneer recommends the use of a camera

which outputs mirror reversed images,

otherwise screen image may appear

reversed.

❒ Immediately confirm whether the display

changes to a rear view camera image when

the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R) from

another position.

❒ When the screen changes to full-screen rear

view camera image during normal driving,

switch to the opposite setting in [Polarity].

❒ Initially, this function is set to [Off].

1 Touch [Camera Input] in the System Set-

tings menu.

2 Touch [On] to turn rear view camera set-

ting on.

❒ Unless this setting is [On], you cannot

switch to Rear View mode.

3 Touch [Polarity] to select an appropriate

setting for polarity.

Each time you touch [Polarity] switches

between the following polarity:

• Battery — When the polarity of the con-

nected lead is positive while the shift lever

is in the REVERSE (R) position

• GND — When the polarity of the connected

lead is negative while the shift lever is in the

REVERSE (R) position

Setting the video input

You can switch the setting according to the con-

nected component.

❒ Select [Video] to watch video of a connected

component as AV INPUT source.

1 Touch [AV Input] in the System Settings

menu.

Each touch of [AV Input] changes the set-

tings as follows:

• Off — No video component is connected

• Video — External video component

• EXT — Pioneer external unit connected

with an RCA video cable

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 156 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

157

AV Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

❒ When a Pioneer external unit is connected

with an IP-BUS cable, select [EXT]. When

the audio source is [EXT], the “Video

image” of the Pioneer external unit can be

displayed.

Switching the auxiliary setting

It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with the

navigation system as the one of sources. Activate

the auxiliary setting when using auxiliary equip-

ment connected to the navigation system.

1 Touch [AUX Input] in the System Set-

tings menu.

Touching [AUX Input] switches between

[On] and [Off].

➲ “Selecting [AUX] as the source” ➞

Page 147

Switching the muting/attenua-

tion timing

You can mute the audio source volume or attenu-

ate the output signal. This setting is invalid for the

mute signal has been received from the MUTE

lead connected to the navigation unit. (Even if

this setting is [Off], the navigation system will

mute or attenuate the audio source volume when

the signal is output via MUTE lead.)

1 Touch [Mute Set] in the System Settings

menu.

Each touch of [Mute Set] changes the set-

tings as follows:

• Guide/Tel/VR — The volume is muted or

attenuated according to the following con-

ditions

— When the navigation outputs the guidance

voice.

— When you use a cellular phone via Blue-

tooth technology (dialing, talking, incoming

call).

— When the voice recognition mode is acti-

vated.

• Tel/VR — The volume is muted or attenu-

ated according to the following conditions

— When you use a cellular phone via Blue-

tooth technology (dialing, talking, incoming

call).

— When the voice recognition mode is acti-

vated.

• Off — The volume does not change

❒ Operation returns to normal when the cor-

respond action is ended.

❒ The navigation voice guidance itself can-

not be attenuated or muted. If you want to

mute the navigation guidance voice tem-

porarily, use on the navigation map

screen.

Switching the muting/attenua-

tion level

You can select the muting/attenuation level of

[Mute Set]. This setting is also effective for a

mute signal that has been received from the

MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit.

❒ This menu is not available in the following

cases:

— Audio source is [OFF]

— During muting/attenuation

— [5.1Ch Setup] is [On]

1 Touch [Mute Level] in the System Set-

tings menu.

Each touch of [Mute Level] changes the set-

tings as follows:

• All — The volume becomes 0

• –20dB — The volume becomes 1/10

• –10dB — The volume becomes 1/3

❒ When you select [All], [Mute] is displayed

and no audio adjustments are possible

during the sound is turned off.

❒ When you select [–20dB] or [–10dB], no

audio adjustments, except volume control,

are possible during the sound is attenu-

ated.

❒ Operation returns to normal when the cor-

respond action is ended.

❒ Even when a mute signal has been

received from the MUTE lead connected to

the navigation unit, navigation voice guid-

ance cannot be attenuated or muted. If you

want to mute the navigation guidance

voice temporarily, use on the naviga-

tion map screen.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 157 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

158

Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

Changing the voice output of the

navigation guidance

You can set the speaker to output the navigation

guidance and phone voice, etc.

1 Touch [Guide/Tel SP] in the System Set-

tings menu.

Each touch of [Guide/Tel SP] changes the

settings as follows:

• Left SP — Uses only the front left speaker

• Right SP — Uses only the front right

speaker

• L+R SP — Uses both the front right and

left speakers

Switching the auto antenna set-

ting

If the blue lead of the navigation system is con-

nected to the antenna control terminal of the

vehicle, select either of the following settings.

• Radio — The antenna extends or turns on only

when the audio source is the FM or AM. The

antenna is stored or turned off when the

source is switched to another.

• Power — The antenna extends or turns on

when the ignition switch is turned on. The

antenna is stored or turned off when the igni-

tion switch is turned off.

1 Touch [Auto ANT] in the System Set-

tings.

Touching [Auto ANT] switches between

[Radio] and [Power].

❒ Regardless of whether [Radio] or [Power]

is selected, turning off the ignition switch

will cause the antenna to automatically

retract or turn off.

Setting the clock display on the

video image

You can select whether to display the clock on

the video image screen without touch keys, such

as DVD-Video, AV INPUT, or TV tuner.

1 Touch [Clock DISP] in the System Set-

tings menu.

Touching [Clock DISP] switches between

[All SCRN] and [Audio SCRN].

• All SCRN — The clock is overlaid on the

“Video image”

• Audio SCRN — The clock is not overlaid

on the “Video image”

Setting the CD recording mode

You can set whether to start recording tracks

automatically when you play a CD, or to manually

trigger recording.

1 Touch [REC Mode] in the System Set-

tings menu.

Each touch of [REC Mode] changes the set-

tings as follows:

• Auto — Records the tracks automatically

when a CD is played

• Manual — Lets you select the tracks you

want to record manually, and records them

• Single — Automatically records only the

first track of the CD

Setting the rear output and sub-

woofer controller

The navigation system’s rear output can be used

for full-range speaker or subwoofer connection. If

you switch the Rear SP setting to Sub.w, you

can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a sub-

woofer without using an auxiliary amp.

Initially, the navigation system is set for rear full-

range speaker connection. When rear output is

connected to full-range speakers (when Rear SP

setting is Full), you can connect the RCA sub-

woofer output (SUBWOOFER OUTPUT or NON-

FADING OUTPUT) to a subwoofer. In this case,

you can select whether to use the subwoofer con-

troller’s (low pass filter, phase) built-in amp of the

navigation system or the auxiliary amp or sub-

woofer.

❒ If you change the subwoofer controller [Rear

SP] or [Preout], [Sub Woofer] or [Non Fad-

ing] in the Audio Settings menu return to

the factory settings.

❒ Both rear speaker leads output and RCA rear

output are switched simultaneously in this

setting.

❒ Rear SP can be set only when the source is

[OFF].

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 158 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

159

AV Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

1 Touch [Rear SP] in the System Settings

menu.

2 Touch [Full] or [Sub.w] to switch the rear

output setting.

❒ When no subwoofer is connected to the

rear output, select Full. When a subwoofer

is connected to the rear speaker leads

directly, select Sub.w.

3 Touch [Preout] to switch the subwoofer

output or non fading output.

❒ When the [Rear SP] setting is Sub.w,

[Preout] is invalid.

❒ Even if you change this setting, there is no

output unless you turn [Non Fading] or

[Sub Woofer] in the Audio Settings

menu [On].

➲ “Using non fading output” ➞ Page 152

➲ “Using subwoofer output” ➞ Page 152

Switching the 5.1ch setting

When the navigation system is combined with

the multi-channel processor system (sold sepa-

rately), you can use the multi-channel sound.

Enter the following setting when combining the

multi-channel processor system.

• DO NOT enter this setting before you con-

nect the multi-channel processor system.

(If this setting is entered, the RCA (“SUB-

WOOFER OUTPUT or NON-FADING OUT-

PUT”) will output maximum volume for

the multi-channel processor system.) Pio-

neer is not responsible for any damage to

the speaker equipment caused by ignoring

this warning.

❒ This setting is possible only when the optical

cable connection box (supplied with the Multi-

channel processor) is connected to the navi-

gation system.

1 Touch the source icon and then touch

[OFF] to turn source off.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

2 Touch [5.1Ch Setup] in the System Set-

tings menu.

If you touch [5.1Ch Setup], it will be turned

[On]. If you touch [5.1Ch Setup] again to turn

[Off] the setting, [5.1Ch Setup] will disap-

pear. If you want to turn it [On] again, you

have to repeat the procedure from the Step1.

Other Functions

Selecting the video for “Rear

display”

You can choose either to show the same image

as the front screen or to show the selected

source on the “Rear display”.

1 Press the AV button to switch Audio oper-

ation screen.

2 Touch the source icon and then touch

[REAR SCREEN].

Each touch of [REAR SCREEN] changes the

settings as follows:

• MIRROR — The video on the front screen

of the navigation unit is output to the “Rear

display”

• DVD — The video and sound of the DVDs

are output to the “Rear display”

• AV — The video and sound of the AV

INPUT are output to the “Rear display”

❒ When MIRROR is selected, the following

restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.

— When the TV tuner is connected with AV-

BUS, its “Video image” cannot be output.

(Connect the TV tuner’s rear output to “Rear

display” directly.)

— When selecting [Rear View] in the map

display, nothing is displayed.

— All sounds cannot be output for “Rear dis-

play”.

— There is no picture on “Rear display” while

[Picture Adjust] for [Back-Camera] is car-

ried out.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 159 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

160

Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

— The map screen navigation images output

to the “Rear display” differ from standard

NTSC format images. Therefore, their quality

will be inferior to the images that appear on

the front screen.

❒ When DVD is selected, the following

restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.

— When a CD or MP3 disc is set in the built-in

DVD drive, nothing is output.

❒ When AV is selected, the following restric-

tions are applied to “Rear display”.

— The “Video image” and sound are output

only when the AV INPUT has both video and

sound.

— The “Video image” and sound are output

only when the appropriate setting on [AV

Input] is [Video].

Operating the picture adjust-

ment

• For safety reasons, these functions are not

available while your vehicle is in motion.

To enable these functions, you must stop

in a safe place and put on the parking

brake before setting your route (see page

20 for details).

You can adjust the picture for each source and

rear view camera.

1 Press the V button to display Picture

Adjust screen.

• Brightness — Adjusts the black intensity

• Contrast — Adjusts the contrast

• Color — Adjusts the color saturation

• Hue — Adjusts the tone of color (red is

emphasized or green is emphasized)

• Dimmer — Adjusts the brightness of dis-

play

•[Back-Camera] — Shows the picture

adjustment display for the rear view camera

❒ Touching [Source] while adjusting the

rear view camera image returns you to the

previous screen.

❒ The adjustments of Brightness, Contrast

and Dimmer are stored separately when

your vehicle’s headlights are off (daytime)

and when your vehicle’s headlight are on

(nighttime). These are switched automati-

cally depending on the vehicle’s head-

lights are on or off.

❒ You cannot adjust Color and Hue for the

source without a video and navigation map

display.

❒ The setting contents can be memorized

separately for the following screen and the

“Video image”.

— AM/FM/M-CD/iPod/AUX/XM/SIRIUS

screen

— LIBRARY (Music Library) screen

— Built-in DVD drive

— TV image

— AV INPUT/EXT

— Rear view camera image

— Navigation map and menu screen

❒ The picture adjustment may not be avail-

able with some rear view cameras.

❒ Because of the LCD screen characteris-

tics, you may not be able to adjust the

screen at low temperatures.

2 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the desired

item.

Each time you touch [+] or [–] increases or

decreases the level of the desired item.

3 Touch [ESC] to return to the previous

screen.

Switching the backlight on or off

By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,

you can turn off the screen display without turn-

ing off the voice guidance.

1 Press and hold the V button.

The backlight turns off, and the screen turns

off.

❒ Press the V button once again to turn on

the backlight, and the screen is displayed.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 160 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

161

AV Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

Language Code Chart for DVD

Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code

Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619

English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721

French (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813

Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814

German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Rumanian (ro), 1815

Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823

Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901

Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904

Portuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sango (sg), 1907

Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908

Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Shinghalese (si), 1909

Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911

Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912

Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913

Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914

Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915

Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917

Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918

Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919

Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920

Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921

Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923

Belorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Tamil (ta), 2001

Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 Telugu (te), 2005

Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 Tajik (tg), 2007

Bislama (bi), 0209 Laotian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008

Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214 Lithusnian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009

Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222 Turkmen (tk), 2011

Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Tagalog (tl), 2012

Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014

Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Tongan (to), 2015

Czach (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Turkish (tr), 2018

Welsh (cy), 0325 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Tsonga (ts), 2019

Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Tatar (tt), 2020

Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 Twi (tw), 2023

Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111

Estonian (et), 0520 Maltese (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118

Basque (eu), 0521 Burmese (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126

Persian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209

Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 Volapu˜k (vo), 2215

Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no), 1415 Wolof (wo), 2315

Faroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408

Frisian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Yoruba (yo), 2515

Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621

Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704 Panjabi (pa), 1601

Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 161 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

162

Chapter 16

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 162 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

163

Chapter 17 Operating Your Navigation System with VoiceNAVI/AV

Chapter 17

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

To Ensure Safe Driving

• For safety reasons, Voice Help menu

(Voice Recog.Help) is not available while

your vehicle is in motion. To enable this

function, you must stop in a safe place and

put on the parking brake before setting

your route.

Basics of Voice Operation

Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest in

voice recognition technology. You can use voice

commands to operate many of its functions. This

chapter describes where you can use voice com-

mands, and also what commands the system

accepts.

Flow of voice operation

You can start voice operation any time even when

the map screen is displayed or audio is operated.

(Some operations are not available.) The basic

steps of voice operation are as follows.

❒ The voice operation may not be operable for a

minute after the navigation system has booted

up.

❒ If you operate using the “CD-SR1” Steering

Remote Control (sold separately), the follow-

ing buttons can be used for operation:

VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button:

Same function as VOICE icon.

VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button:

Return to previous screen.

Depending on the selected languages, the

commands that you registered before may

not be available.

➲ About the relation for the language ➞

Page 167

1 Touch the VOICE icon to activate

voice operation.

2 Speak a command into the micro-

phone after the beep.

3 When the command is recognized, the

navigation system displays the

response message on the screen, and

pronounces it in some cases.

4 As necessary, repeat Step 3.

5 The requested operation will be car-

ried out.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 163 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

164

Chapter 17

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

To start voice operation

1 Touch the VOICE icon.

Navigation screen

Audio screen

❒ Depending on the operating state of the navi-

gation system, some commands displayed in

Voice Help may be unavailable. Available

commands are in white and unavailable com-

mands are in gray.

When using voice operation for the first

time

Until you are familiar with this system, it is rec-

ommended that you stop the vehicle in a safe

place and refer to the commands displayed in the

Voice Help menu (a list of the words you can

speak). When your vehicle is parked with the

parking brake on, see the Voice Help menu and

speak voice command on that menu (except for

some cases).

When voice command is possible

When voice command is not accepted

❒ When you say “Voice Help”, the navigation

system pronounces the displayed words that

can be vocalized.

❒ If no voice icon is displayed, check to see

whether the microphone is properly con-

nected and turn the power on again.

❒ If there are multiple pages, the voice help

menu can be switched by using or

on the screen. You can also switch the

page by saying “Next page” or “Previous

page”.

❒ If you say “Back” or touch [Back], the screen

returns to the previous screen.

To cancel voice operation

You can cancel voice operation features at any

time by saying “Cancel”. After you cancel voice

operation, the map is displayed.

❒ If no command is made in the next 6 seconds

or the recognition fails three times succes-

sively, the voice recognition switches to

standby mode. To reactivate voice operation,

touch the VOICE icon.

No sounds can be output during .

Voice Help menu

VOICE icon

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 164 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

165

NAVI/AV Chapter 17 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Tips for Voice Operation

For your voice commands to be correctly recog-

nized and interpreted, ensure that conditions are

suitable for recognition.

Reduce the volume setting on your

vehicle audio system

➲ “Switching the muting/attenuation timing” ➞

Page 157

Close the vehicle windows

Please note that wind through the vehicle win-

dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the

vehicle can interfere with voice operation.

Position the microphone carefully

For optimum pick-up, the microphone should be

fixed at a suitable distance directly in front of the

driver.

Pause before giving a command

Speaking too soon may cause the recognition to

fail.

Pronounce your commands carefully

Speak slowly, deliberately, and clearly.

❒ If the registered voice command and the

default voice command is the same, the regis-

tered voice command (e.g. the pronunciation

for the entry in “Address Book” and the playl-

ist in “Music library”) will take priority. In this

case, the default voice command will not

function. To use the default voice command,

change or delete the registered voice com-

mand that is identical to the default voice

command.

An Example of Voice Operation

Search for POI in vicinity

In this example, you want to search for the near-

est gas station and set it as your destination.

❒ Give the following verbal commands after

switching to the navigation screen.

➲ “Voice commands related to navigation” ➞

Page 168

1 Press the MAP button to display the navi-

gation map screen.

2 Touch the VOICE icon.

A list of commands for voice operation

appears. After the message, the beep indi-

cates that the system is ready to accept your

voice command. Say a command after this

beep.

3 Say “Destination”.

A message to prompt the next operation is

given.

❒ If you say “Back” or touch [Back], the screen

returns to the previous screen.

4 Say “Vicinity Search”.

Say the corresponding commands for the

function you want to operate. Here, the selec-

tion method of your destination is specified.

When you want to search the gas station near-

est to the current location, say “Vicinity

Search”.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 165 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

166

Chapter 17

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

The message “Vicinity search. Please

request POI category.” appears, and the

navigation system pronounces that message.

5 Say “GAS Station”.

The message “Vicinity search. Gas station”

appears.

The map of the nearest gas station is shown.

❒ For categories that can be used as the

voice commands, refer to “Category list for

vicinity search”.

➲ Refer to “Category list for vicinity search”

➞ Page 176

6 Touch the VOICE icon.

7 Say “Next” or “Previous” to select the

desired facilities.

8 After confirming the location, say “Set As

Destination”.

If there is no route, the system starts the route

calculation. If the route is already set, touch

the VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Search for the playlist

In this example, you want to search for a playlist

and play that playlist.

1 Touch the VOICE icon when the audio

source is “LIBRARY”.

2 Say “Music Search”.

3 Say the desired group.

❒ If the desired group is already selected,

you can skip this step.

4 Say the name of the playlist you want to

play.

❒ If there are multiple pages, voice help

menu can be switched by using or

on the screen. You can also switch

the page by saying “Next page” or “Previ-

ous page”.

❒ You can also search the track in the cur-

rent playlist by saying “Track Search”.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 166 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

167

NAVI/AV Chapter 17 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Available Voice Commands

This section describes the flow and available commands of each voice operation.

❒ When [Language] in [Regional Settings] is changed to another language, the commands that

you registered can be used only if the language is the same.

❒ For <City Name>, <Street Name>, <House number> shown on the following chart, say the real

name or number which you want to search for. For example, if the real city name is “Long Beach”

and you want to operate “Search by address,” say “Long Beach” instead of <City Name>.

❒ For <POI Name> shown on the following chart, say the real POI name that you want to search for.

For example, if the real POI name is “San Francisco International Airport” and you want to operate

“Go to <POI Name>,” say “Go to San Francisco International Airport” (or “Go to SFO”). You can

vocalize <POI Name> included in the following categories only.

—Railway Station, City Center, Airport, Ferry Terminal, Airline Access, Golf Courses, Shopping Cen-

ter, Parks, and Recreation Area

❒ For <Registered location’s pronunciation> shown on the following chart, say the registered pro-

nunciation. For example, if the registered pronunciation in address book is “My office” and you want

to operate “Search by entry on the address book”, say “My office”. You can hear and edit the pronun-

ciation.

➲“Changing a pronunciation” ➞ Page 65

❒ For <Registered phone book’s pronunciation> shown on the following chart, say the registered pro-

nunciation. For example, if the registered pronunciation in phone book is “My friend” and you want

to operate “Telephone Book”, say “My friend”. You can hear and edit the pronunciation.

➲“Editing the entry in “Phone Book”” ➞ Page 90

❒ For <Album playlist name>, <Artist playlist name>, <Track name> shown on the following chart,

say the name in the music library (if you edited their pronunciation, say their pronunciation). You

can hear and edit the pronunciation.

➲“Changing the pronunciation of a playlist name or track name” ➞ Page 125

❒ For <Category Name> and <Sub Category Name> in “Vicinity Search”, refer to “Category list for

vicinity search” and say the desired category in that list.

❒ You can skip the commands with the mark (*). For example, in case search by Point of interest, the

system can recognize the command even if you say “POI” without saying “Destination”.

❒ If some candidates have been found, the candidate list appears. Select the one from the list and pro-

ceed to next step.

❒ During the voice operation, location screen (A) or (B) may appear. In such a case, go to “Location

screen (A) and (B)” in the later section, and continue the voice operation.

➲“Location screen (A) and (B)” ➞ Page 171

❒ The voice operations related the telephone are available only using hands-free phoning feature of

this system and is unavailable during a call.

➲“Using Hands-free Phoning” ➞ Page 83

❒ Terms written in italics are voice commands.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 167 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

168

Chapter 17

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

Basic commands for voice operation

The following verbal commands can be used both in navigation screen and audio operation screen.

Voice commands related to navigation

Give the following verbal commands after switching to the navigation screen.

Basic commands

Back ➞ Return the previous screen.

Cancel ➞ Cancel the voice operation.

Current Location ➞ Return the current location map screen.

Voice Help ➞ Pronounces the display words that can be vocalised.

Next Page, Previous Page ➞ Switch the page of Voice Help Menu.

Search by address

Destination* ➞ Address ➞ <City Name> ➞ <Street Name> ➞ <House Number> ➞ Location Screen (A)

Notes:

• Select the state, province or territory manually before the voice operation.

• When you say the street name, say the street type together <e.g. XXXX street, xxxx avenue, xxxx road, xxxxx boule-

vard, etc. >

• Some operation may be skipped depending on the address.

• If you don’t know the street name or house number, you can say “Area” so that your destination can be set to the

main point of that city or street.

Search by Points of interest

Destination* ➞ POI ➞ <POI Name> ➞ Location Screen (A)

Destination* ➞ POI ➞ Go To <POI Name> ➞ If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. If

there is no route, the system starts the route calculation.

Destination* ➞ POI ➞ Waypoint <POI name> ➞ Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Making phone call to POI

Destination* ➞ POI ➞ Call <POI name> ➞ Touch VOICE icon to call that facility (Only when the phone number is

registered in the facility.)

Displaying the map of POI

Destination* ➞ POI ➞ Display <POI name> ➞ Display the map of that facility’s surroundings.

Search by telephone number

Destination* ➞ Telephone Number ➞ Say the telephone number you want to search. ➞ Location Screen (A) (If mul-

tiple facilities exist with the same phone number, the facilities you intend may not be displayed.)

Note:

You can say 10 digits telephone number only. 911 and the number other than 10 digits is not available.

Search by entry on the address book

Destination* ➞ Address Book* ➞ <Registered location’s pronunciation> ➞ Location Screen (A)

<Registered location’s pronunciation> ➞ Location Screen (A)

Destination* ➞ Go To <Registered location’s pronunciation> ➞ If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start

route calculation. If there is no route, the system starts the route calculation.

Destination* ➞ Waypoint <Registered location’s pronunciation> ➞ Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Making phone call to entry on the address book

Destination* ➞ Call <Registered location’s pronunciation> ➞ If the registered location has telephone number data,

touch VOICE icon to call the registered location.

Displaying the map of the entry on the address book

Destination* ➞ Display <Registered location’s pronunciation> ➞ Display the map of surroundings on that facility.

Search the facilities in vicinity

Destination* ➞ Vicinity Search ➞ <Category Name>, <Sub Category Name> ➞ Location Screen (B)

Displaying the destination history

Destination* ➞ Destination History ➞ Display the Destination History screen.

Setting the route to your home

Destination* ➞ Return Home ➞ If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. (If there is no

route, the system starts the route calculation.)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 168 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

169

NAVI/AV Chapter 17 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Making phone call to your home

Destination

➞

Call Home

➞

Touch

VOICE

icon to call your home (Only when the phone number is registered in your

home.)

Setting your home to waypoint

Destination* ➞ Waypoint Home ➞ Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. (This function is only available if you

have set the destination.)

Display the map of surroundings on your home

Destination* ➞ Display Home ➞ Display the map of surroundings on your home.

Display the map of surroundings on your destination

Destination* ➞ Display Destination ➞ Display the map of surroundings on your destination.

Set the map location as your destination

Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. ➞ Basic Operation* ➞ Set As Destina-

tion ➞ If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. If there is no route, the system starts the

route calculation.

Set the map location as your waypoint

Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. ➞ Basic Operation* ➞ Set As Way-

point ➞ Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Registering the map location to the address book

Basic Operation* ➞ Registration ➞ The system register that point and Information edit screen appears.

Operating the navigation map scale

Map Operation* ➞ Change Scale* ➞ XXXX <kilo> meter(s) Scale <25meters, 50meters, 100meters, 200meters,

500meters, 1kilometer, 2kilometers, 5kilometers, 10kilometers, 20kilometers, 50kilometers, 100kilometers,

200kilometers, 500kilometers, 1000kilometers, 2000kilometers> ➞ Map screen will be changed to selected scale.

Notes:

• These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [km].

• This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.

Map Operation* ➞ Change Scale* ➞ XXXX mile(s) Scale <0.02miles, 0.05miles, 0.1miles, 0.25miles, 0.5miles,

0.75miles, 1mile, 2.5miles, 5miles, 10miles, 25miles, 50miles, 100miles, 250miles, 500miles, 1000miles> ➞ Map

screen will be changed to selected scale.

Notes:

• These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [mile].

• This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.

Map Operation* ➞ Change Scale* ➞ XXXX mile/yards Scale <25yards, 50yards, 100yards, 0.25miles, 0.5miles,

0.75miles, 1mile, 2.5miles, 5miles, 10miles, 25miles, 50miles, 100miles, 250miles, 500miles, 1000miles> ➞ Map

screen will be changed to selected scale.

Notes:

• These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [Mile&Yard].

• This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.

Map Operation* ➞ Change Scale* ➞ Zoom Out, Zoom In ➞ Map screen will zoom out or zoom in.

Operating the view mode

Map Operation* ➞ Change View Mode* ➞ Map View, Driver’s View, 2D Twin Map View, 3D Twin Map View, Route View,

Guide View, Rear View, Vehicle Dynamics ➞ Map screen will be changed to selected view mode.

Operating the map orientation

Map Operation* ➞ Heading Up, North Up ➞ Map orientation will be changed.

Recalculating the route

Route Options* ➞ Change Route* ➞ Rerouting, Use Main Road, Use Fast Route, Use Short Route, Use Freeway, Avoid

Freeway, Use Ferry, Avoid Ferry, Use Toll Road, Avoid Toll Road ➞ If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to recal-

culate.

Checking the current route

Route Options* ➞ Route Profile ➞ Displaying the route profile screen.

Route Options* ➞ Next Guidance ➞ You can hear the information of next guidance point.

Canceling the route

Route Options* ➞ Cancel Route ➞ If the route is already set, touch VOICE icon to cancel the current route.

Route Options* ➞ Cancel Waypoint ➞ If the waypoint is already set, touch VOICE icon to cancel route until next way-

point.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 169 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

170

Chapter 17

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

Voice commands related to hands-free phoning

The following verbal commands can be used both in navigation screen and audio operation screen.

(Note 1): International call with using “+” is not available in the voice operation.

Voice commands related to AV operation

The following verbal commands can be used both in navigation screen and audio operation screen.

Give the following verbal commands after switching the correspond audio source.

Checking the traffic list

Traffic Information* ➞ Traffic Events List ➞ Displaying the traffic event list.

Traffic Information* ➞ Traffic On Route List ➞ Displaying the traffic event list on your route.

Traffic Information* ➞ Traffic Flow List ➞ Displaying the traffic flow list.

Erase the tracking

Other Operation* ➞ Erase Tracks ➞ Touch VOICE icon to delete the tracking.

Viewing the Emergency Info screen

Other Operation* ➞ Emergency Information ➞ Displaying the Emergency info screen.

Turning on or off the Overlay POI

Other Operation* ➞ Display Overlay POI ➞ Displaying the selected POI in Overlay POI.

Other Operation* ➞ Hide Overlay POI ➞ Turn off Overlay POI.

Operating the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology

Call*➞ Telephone Book ➞ <Registered phone book’s pronunciation> ➞ If the registered entry in phone book has

telephone number data, touch VOICE icon to call the entry.

Call* ➞ Call Registered Point ➞ <Registered location’s pronunciation> ➞ If the registered location has telephone

number data, touch VOICE icon to call the registered location.

Call* ➞ Redial ➞ Touch VOICE icon to redial.

Call* ➞ Call Phone Number ➞ Say the number you want to call. ➞ Touch VOICE icon to dial. (Note 1)

Call* ➞ Received Call ➞ Displaying the received call list.

Call* ➞ Call Favorite 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ➞ Touch VOICE icon to dial.

Call* ➞ Call Home ➞ Touch VOICE icon to call your home (Only when the phone number is registered in your

home.)

Call* ➞ Call <Registered location’s pronunciation> ➞ If the registered location has telephone number data, touch

VOICE icon to call the registered location.

Common AV commands

AV Operation* ➞ Change Display* ➞ Navigation Screen ➞ Switching to the navigation map or menu screen.

AV Operation* ➞ Change Display* ➞ AV screen ➞ Switching to the Audio source screen.

AV Operation* ➞ Source Off ➞ Turning the Audio source off.

AV Operation* ➞ Traffic Channel ➞ Recalling the memorized traffic channel for XM or SIRIUS satellite radio tuner.

AV Operation* ➞ Change Source* ➞ CD, DVD, AM, FM, TV, MCD, AV Input, AUX, Sirius, iPod, XM, EXTERNAL1,

EXTERNAL2, Music Library ➞ Switching to the desired audio source. (You cannot switch to an unavailable source.)

Operation for Multi-CD

AV Operation* ➞ Disc 1 to Disc 12 ➞ Selecting the disc for playback.

Operation for FM

AV Operation* ➞ Preset 1 to Preset 6 ➞ Switching to that preset station directly.

AV Operation* ➞ Change Band ➞ Switching the band.

Operation for AM

AV Operation* ➞ Preset 1 to Preset 6 ➞ Switching to that preset station directly.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 170 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

171

NAVI/AV Chapter 17 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

(Note 2):This operation is available only when that group is already selected.

(Note 3):This operation is available for the playlist currently playing.

After checking traffic information manually

If traffic congestion is found after checking the traffic information manually, “Do you want to reroute?”

appears on screen. In this time, you can say voice commands to operate.

Do you want to reroute?

Options:

Yes:

The route will be recalculated by touching the VOICE icon.

No:

The route will not be recalculated and the map screen of that location appears.

Location screen (A) and (B)

Location screen (A)

The following commands can be vocalized:

Set As Destination

If there is no route, the system starts the route calculation. If the route is already set, touch the VOICE

icon to start route calculation.

Operation for TV

AV Operation* ➞ Preset 1 to Preset 12 ➞ Switching to that preset station directly.

AV Operation* ➞ Change Band ➞ Switching the band.

Operation for XM, SIRIUS tuner

AV Operation* ➞ Preset 1 to Preset 6 ➞ Switching to that preset station directly.

AV Operation* ➞ Change Band ➞ Switching the band.

AV Operation* ➞ Category Mode ➞ Switching to the Category mode.

AV Operation* ➞ All Channel Mode ➞ Switching to the All Channel mode.

AV Operation* ➞ Memo ➞ Memorizing the title and artist information of that song to “My Mix”.

Operation for CD

AV Operation* ➞ Change Media ➞ Switching the CD-DA part and CD-ROM (MP3) part.

Operation for Music Library

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ Album ➞ <Album Playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected album playlist.

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ <Album Playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected album playlist. (Note 2)

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ Artist ➞ <Artist Playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected artist playlist.

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ <Artist Playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected artist playlist. (Note 2)

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ Genre ➞ <Genre name> ➞ Playback the selected genre playlist.

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ <Genre name> ➞ Playback the selected genre playlist. (Note 2)

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ My Favorites ➞ My Favorite 1, My Favorite 2, My Favorite 3, My Favorite 4, MyMix ➞

Playback selected playlist.

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ My Favorite 1, My Favorite 2, My Favorite 3, My Favorite 4, MyMix ➞ Playback

selected playlist. (Note 2)

AV Operation* ➞ Track Search ➞ <Track name> ➞ Playback the selected track. (Note 3)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 171 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

172

Chapter 17

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

Set as Waypoint

Touch the VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Display Map

Displays the map of surroundings on that location.

Call here

If the location has telephone number data, touch the VOICE icon to make a call to the location.

Location screen (B)

The following commands can be vocalized:

Set As Destination

Same as above.

Set As Waypoint

Same as above.

Display Map

Same as above.

See the next POI.

See the previous POI.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 172 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

173

NAVI/AV Chapter 17 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Other Voice Commands

The navigation system also can recognize the words in the following list.

Other voice commands for navigation operation

Preferential voice command Other voice command

Back Return, Before

Cancel Escape, Skip

Current Location My Location

Voice Help Recognition Help, Help

Next Page Next, Following

Previous Page Back Page

Basic Operation Basics, Basic

Set As Destination Set, Go, Route To Destination, Begin Guidance, Start

Set As Waypoint Set Waypoint, Waypoint

Registration Register, Store

Destination Go To, Search

POI Point Of Interest, Points Of Interest, Business Listing

Address Addresses, Address Search, Search By Address

Area Surrounding, Around

Telephone Number Telephone, Phone Number

Address Book Registered Points, My Addresses, Search By Address Book

Destination History Search History, Destination List

Vicinity Search Vicinity, Search Around, Search In Vicinity

Return Home Go Home, Drive Home

Waypoint Home Waypoint To Home, Registered Home As Waypoint

Call Home Phone Home, Dial Home

Display Home Show Home

Display Destination Destination Map, Show Destination

Map Operation Map, Map Option

Zoom Out Out, Higher

Zoom In In, Lower

Change Scale Scale, Zoom

25 meters Scale 25meters

50 meters Scale 50meters

100 meters Scale 100meters

200 meters Scale 200meters

500 meters Scale 500meters

1 kilometer Scale 1kilometer

2 kilometers Scale 2kilometers

5 kilometers Scale 5kilometers

10 kilometers Scale 10kilometers

20 kilometers Scale 20kilometers

50 kilometers Scale 50kilometers

100 kilometers Scale 100kilometers

200 kilometers Scale 200kilometers

500 kilometers Scale 500kilometers

1000 kilometers Scale 1000kilometers

2000 kilometers Scale 2000kilometers

0.02 miles Scale 0.02miles

0.05 miles Scale 0.05miles

0.1 miles Scale 0.1miles

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 173 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

174

Chapter 17

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

0.25 miles Scale 0.25miles

0.5 miles Scale 0.5miles

0.75 miles Scale 0.75miles

1 mile Scale 1mile

2.5 miles Scale 2.5miles

5 miles Scale 5miles

10 miles Scale 10miles

25 miles Scale 25miles

50 miles Scale 50miles

100 miles Scale 100miles

250 miles Scale 250miles

500 miles Scale 500miles

1000 miles Scale 1000miles

25 yards Scale 25yards

50 yards Scale 50yards

100 yards Scale 100yards

Change View Mode View Mode, Change View

Map View Normal Map, Flat Map

Driver's View Driver, 3D

2D Twin Map View 2D Twin, 2D Split

3D Twin Map View 3D Twin, 3D Split

Route View Turns, Turn View

Guide View Guide, Arrow

Rear View Rear, Back View

Vehicle Dynamics Dynamics, Meters

North Up North, Compass

Heading Up Head Up, Car Up

Route Options Change Route Options

Change Route Edit Route

Rerouting New Route, Update Route

Use Main Road Main Roads, Take Main Roads

Use Fast Route Fast Route, Fastest Route

Use Short Route Short Route, Shortest Route

Use Freeway Freeways, Highways

Use Ferry Ferry, Ferries

Use Toll Road Toll Road, Payroad

Avoid Freeway Avoid Highway, Avoid Interstate

Avoid Ferry Avoid Ferries, Skip Ferries

Avoid Toll Road Avoid Tolls, Avoid Pay

Cancel Route Delete Route, Cancel Guidance

Route Profile Profile

Cancel Waypoint Delete Waypoint, Take Away Waypoint

Next Guidance Following Guidance, Guidance After This

Traffic Information Traffic, View Traffic Info, Display Traffic Information, Current Traffic Informa-

tion, Display Traffic Condition

Traffic Events List Event List, Events, Traffic Events

Traffic On Route List On Route List, Route List, Traffic On Route

Traffic Flow List Flow List, Flows, Traffic Flow

Call Dial, Ring, Dial Out , Place A Call, Make A Call

Call Registered Point Call Address Book, Call Registered

Call Phone Number Call By Number, Call Number, Call By Phone Number, Call Using Phone Num-

ber

Preferential voice command Other voice command

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 174 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

175

NAVI/AV Chapter 17 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Other voice commands for AV operation

Telephone Book Tel Book, Phone Book

Redial Call Again, Phone Again

Call Favorite 1 Call 1, Phone 1

Call Favorite 2 Call 2, Phone 2

Call Favorite 3 Call 3, Phone 3

Call Favorite 4 Call 4, Phone 4

Call Favorite 5 Call 5, Phone 5

Received Call Received, Who Called

Call Home Phone Home, Dial Home

Other Operation Other, Others

Erase Tracks Delete Tracks, Remove Tracks

Display Overlay POI Show Overlay POI, Display POIs

Set As Destination Set, Go, Route To Destination, Begin Guidance, Start

Set As Waypoint Set Waypoint, Waypoint

Set As Destination Set, Go, Route To Destination, Begin Guidance, Start

Set As Waypoint Set Waypoint, Waypoint

Yes Ok, I Agree

No Not Ok, I Disagree

Preferential voice command Other voice command

Navigation Screen Navigation, Navi

AV Screen AV, Audio

Change Source Next Source, Source Change

CD Change To CD, Switch To CD

DVD Change To DVD, Switch To DVD

TV Change To TV, Switch To TV

AM Change To AM, Switch To AM

FM Change To FM, Switch To FM

AV Input Video Input

MCD CD Changer

Music Library Change To Music Library, Switch To Music Library

Music Search Search My Music, Search Music

Album Search By Album, Search Album

Artist Search By Artist, Search Artist

Genre Search By Genre, Search Genre

Rock/Pop Rock, Pop

Hip-Hop/Rap Hip-Hop, Rap

Soul/Urban Soul, Urban

Track Search Search By Track

iPod Change To iPod, Switch To iPod

XM Change To XM, Switch To XM

Sirius Change To Sirius, Switch To Sirius

Preferential voice command Other voice command

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 175 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

176

Chapter 17

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

Category list for vicinity search

❒ If you say the category name (category title), the system searches for vicinity POIs in that category

without taking the chain into consideration.

Category name: Gas Station

76, ARCO, BP-AMOCO, CHEVRON, CITGO, CLARK, CONOCO, ESSO, EXXON, FINA, GETTY, GULF, MOBIL, PETRO-

CANADA, PHILLIPS 66, SHELL, SINCLAIR, SUNOCO, TEXACO, ULTRAMAR, Gas Station-Others

Category name: Bank & ATM

B B & T, BANK OF AMERICA, BANK OF MONTREAL, BANK OF NEW YORK, BANK OF NOVA SCOTIA, CIBC BANK,

CITIBANK, HSBC BANK USA, J P MORGAN CHASE, KEY BANK, LA SALLE BANK, LAURENTIAN BANK OF CAN-

ADA, MELLON BANK, NATIONAL BANK OF CANADA, PNC BANK, REGIONS BANK, ROYAL BANK OF CANADA,

SUN TRUST BANK, TORONTO DOMINION BANK, UNION BANK OF CALIFORNIA, US BANK, WACHOVIA BANK,

WASHINGTON MUTUAL, WELLS FARGO BANK, Bank & ATM-Others

Category name: Restaurant

American, Asian, Barbecue, Café & Espresso, Chinese, Continental, Creole-Cajun, French, Greek, Indian, Italian, Jap-

anese, Mexican, Pizzeria, Seafood, Steak House, Thai, Restaurant-Others

Category name: Fast Food Chains

ARBY’S, AU BON PAIN, BAJA FRESH, BASKIN-ROBBINS, BOSTON MARKET, BRAUM’S ICE CREAM & DAIRY,

BURGER KING, CARL’S JR., CARVEL ICE CREAM BAKERY, CHURCH’S CHICKEN, COLD STONE CREAMERY, DAIRY

QUEEN, DUNKIN DONUTS, HAAGEN-DAZS ICE CREAM, HARDEE’S, HARVEY’S, IN-N-OUT BURGER, JACK IN THE

BOX, K F C, LONG JOHN SILVER’S, MC DONALD’S, PANDA EXPRESS, QUIZNOS, RUBIO’S, SECOND CUP, SONIC,

STARBUCK’S COFFEE, SUBWAY SANDWICHES & SALADS, TACO BELL, TACO JOHN’S, TCBY, TIM HORTON’S, TJ

CINNAMONS, TOGO’S, WENDY’S

Category name: Restaurant Chains

A & W FAMILY RESTAURANT, APPLEBEE’S, BENNIGAN’S, BONANZA, BONEFISH GRILL, CARRABBA’S ITALIAN

GRILL, CHILI’S GRILL & BAR, CHUCK E CHEESE PIZZA, CLAIM JUMPER, COCO’S, DOMINO’S PIZZA, FAZOLI’S,

GODFATHER’S PIZZA, GOLDEN CORRAL FAMILY STEAK HSE, IHOP RESTAURANT, KELSEY’S, LITTLE CAESARS

PIZZA, LONE STAR STEAKHOUSE, MARIE CALLENDER, OUTBACK STEAKHOUSE, PAPA JOHN’S PIZZA, PASTA

CONNECTION, PERKINS FAMILY RESTAURANT, PIZZA HUT, PONDEROSA STEAK HOUSE, RED LOBSTER, ROUND

TABLE PIZZA, RUBY TUESDAY, SHAKEY’S PIZZA, SIZZLER, SWISS CHALET, TGI FRIDAY’S, THE KEG

Category name: Supermarkets

ACME, ALBERTSONS, ALDI, ATLANTIC & PACIFIC TEA CO, BI-LO, CUB FOODS, FOOD LION, GIANT, GIANT EAGLE,

H-E-B, HY-VEE, IGA, JEWEL-OSCO, KROGER, MEIJER, PANTRY, PATHMARK, PIGGLY WIGGLY, PUBLIX, RALEY’S,

RALPH’S, SAFEWAY, SAVE-A-LOT, SHAW’S SUPERMARKET, STOP & SHOP, STOP N GO, TOPS FRIENDLY MAR-

KET, VON’S, WHOLE FOODS, WINN-DIXIE, Supermarkets-Others

Category name: Automotive

AAA, RV/TRUCK FACILITY, Automobile Club, Parking, Car Parts & Accessories, Car Repair Facility, Car Wash

Category name: Retailer Chains

BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY, COSTCO, FACTORY 2-U, KMART, KOHL’S, ROSS, SAM’S CLUB, STEIN MART, T J

MAXX, TARGET STORES, WAL-MART, Retailer Chains-Others

Category name: Hotel

AMERI HOST INN, BAYMONT INN & SUITES, BEST WESTERN, COURTYARD BY MARRIOTT, DAYS INN, DOUBLE

TREE, ECONO LODGE, EMBASSY SUITES, FAIRFIELD INN, HAMPTON INN, HILTON, HILTON GARDEN INN, HOLI-

DAY INN, HOMEWOOD SUITES, HOWARD JOHNSON, HYATT, KNIGHTS INN, LA QUINTA INN, MARRIOTT, MOTEL

6, QUALITY-COMFORT-CLARION, RAMADA INN, RED ROOF INN, RESIDENCE INNS, SCOTTISH INN, SHERATON,

STUDIO 6, SUPER 8, TRAVELODGE, WINGATE INN, Hotel-Others

Category name: Car Dealer

ACURA, AUDI, BMW, BUICK, CADILLAC, CHEVROLET, CHRYSLER, DAEWOO, DODGE, FORD, HONDA, HYUNDAI,

INFINITI, ISUZU, JAGUAR, JEEP, KIA, LAND ROVER, LEXUS, LINCOLN, MAZDA, MERCEDES-BENZ, MITSUBISHI,

NISSAN, OLDSMOBILE, PONTIAC, PORSCHE, SAAB, SATURN, SUBARU, SUZUKI, TOYOTA, VOLKSWAGEN,

VOLVO, Car Dealer-Others

Category name: Rental and Other Services

Rental Car, Video Rental, Laundromat, Dry Cleaners

Category name: Electronics Retailer

BEST BUY, CIRCUIT CITY, COMP USA, FRY’S ELECTRONICS, RADIO SHACK, ULTIMATE ELECTRONICS, Electronics

Retailer-Others

Category name: Groceries

Liquor Store, Bakery, Butcher, Convenience Store, Delicatessen, Groceries-Others

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 176 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

177

NAVI/AV Chapter 17 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Category name: Shopping

Shopping Center, Beauty & Barber, Book Store, Music Store, Fashion, Florist, Furniture, Home Improvement, Glass-

ware, House & Office, Optometrist, Shoes & Bags, Sporting Goods, Toys, Cellular Phone Shop, Shopping-Others

Category name: Entertainment

Stadium & Arena, Brewery, Casino, Cinema, Night Club, Theater & Play, Winery, Pub

Category name: Leisure

Museum, Art Gallery, Zoo, Amusement Park, Fair Ground, Beach, National Park & Forest, Camping & Hiking, Ski

Resort, Bowling, Golf Course, Gym, Pool & Tennis, Travel Agency, Tourist Information, Tourist Attraction, Park & Rec-

reation

Category name: Public Service & Facility

Police Station, Government Office, Post Office, Court House, Convention Center, City Center, Library

Category name: Transportation

Airline Access, Airport, Ferry Terminal, Train Station, Rest Area

Category name: Medical

Doctor, Dentist, Veterinarian, Emergency Medical Service, Hospital, Pharmacy

Category name: School

University & College, Nursery School, Elementary School, Junior High School, High School, Vocational School

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 177 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

178

Chapter 17

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 178 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

179

AppendixNAVI/AV

Appendix

Returning the Navigation Sys-

tem to the Default or Factory

Settings

You can return settings or recorded contents to

the default or factory settings. There are four

methods to clear user data, and the situations

and the cleared contents are different for each

method. For the contents that are cleared in each

method, see the list presented later.

❒ The map data and the system data are not

cleared from the hard disk drive by any clear-

ing method.

Method 1: RESET button

Pressing the RESET button clears almost all set-

tings of the audio function.

The system becomes the same state when the

battery of the vehicle is removed or the yellow

lead of the navigation system is disconnected.

Method 2: [Restore Factory Settings]

Clears some items in the [Map] menu and in the

[Settings] menu.

➲ “Restoring the Default Setting” ➞ Page 102

Method 3: [Reset] on start-up

Clears the setting values stored in the hard disk

drive.

➲ “If system errors frequently occur” ➞

Page 181

Method 4: [Clear user information from hard

disk] on start-up

Clears all user data (including Music Library)

stored in the hard disk drive.

➲ “Completely returning the navigation system”

➞ Page 181

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 179 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

180

Appendix NAVI/AV

Setting items to be deleted

The items to be deleted vary depending on the reset method. The items listed in the following table

return to the default or factory settings. The items not listed below will be retained.

However, if you carry out [Clear user information from hard disk], all the settings related to

the navigation function including the items not listed below are deleted.

— : The setting will be retained.

✓ : The setting will be cleared and returned to the default or factory settings.

Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4

Navigation functions

Map function View mode and scale setting on the map —— ✓✓

Direction of the map —— ✓✓

Last cursor position on the map screen —— ✓✓

Route Setting Current route —— ✓✓

Guidance state of the current route —— ✓✓

Vehicle position information ——✓✓

Route conditions — ✓✓✓

[Destina-

tion] menu

Auto fill-in function for cities and streets ——✓✓

Point registered in [Address Book] ———✓

Sorting order selected in [Address Book] —— ✓✓

[Informa-

tion] menu

Sorting order selected in [Traffic Events],

[Traffic On Route], and [Traffic Flow]

—— ✓✓

[Traffic Settings] —— ✓✓

[Phone Settings] ([Phone Menu]) ——✓✓

[Phone Book], [Dial Favorites], [Dialed

Numbers], [Received Calls] ([Phone Menu])

———✓

[Stock Info] ———✓

[My Favorites] ———✓

[Emergency Info] —— ✓✓

[Map] menu [Short-Cut Selection], [View Mode]

—— ✓✓

[Displayed Info], [Overlay POI], [Day/Night

Display], [AV Guide Mode], [Road Color]

— ✓✓✓

[Settings]

[Language] ([Regional settings]), [Time]

([Regional settings]), [Installation Angle

Setup] ([Hardware]), [Defined Locations],

[Modify Current Location], [Background

Picture Setting]

—— ✓✓

Items other than above — ✓✓✓

[Learning Status] ([Hardware]),

[3D Calibration Status] ([Hardware])

————

[Vehicle

Dynamics]

Right and left gauge type, [Adjust Look] —— ✓✓

[Audio Set-

tings]

All items ✓ ———

[System

Settings]

[Mute Set], [Clock DISP], [REC Mode] ✓ — ✓✓

Other items ✓ ———

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 180 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

181

AppendixNAVI/AV

If system errors frequently occur

If system errors frequently occur and the power

to the navigation system turns off, inappropriate

content may have been recorded in the memory

or the hard disk drive. In such a case, normal

operations may be restored by clearing the set-

ting values stored in the hard disk drive. For the

contents that are cleared, see the list presented

later.

1 Start the engine.

After a few moments, the start-up screen

comes on for a few seconds.

2 Touch and hold the MAP button while the

start-up screen is displayed.

“Clear memory” screen appears.

3 Touch [Reset].

4 Touch [Yes].

The setting values stored in the hard disk drive

return to the default or factory settings. After

that, the navigation splash screen appears.

Completely returning the navi-

gation system

To return the entire navigation system to the

default or factory settings, initialize the naviga-

tion system in the following order:

1 Turn the ignition switch off.

2 Press the RESET button.

3 Start the engine.

After a few moments, the start-up screen

comes on for a few seconds.

4 Touch and hold the MAP button while the

start-up screen is displayed.

“Clear memory” screen appears.

5 Touch [Clear user information from hard

disk].

❒ This reset operation clears all music data

recorded in the music library. Note that the

cleared data cannot be restored.

6 Touch [Yes].

The user area in the hard disk drive is initial-

ized. After that, the navigation system restarts.

Audio functions

Music Library

[LIBRARY]

Repeat, Random settings ✓ — ✓✓

Track data ——— ✓

Playlist ——— ✓

Last playback position ——— ✓

[XM] Alert on/off for My Mix ✓ — ✓✓

[DVD] All settings ✓ ———

[CD] All settings ✓ ———

[ROM](MP3) All settings ✓ ———

[FM] Preset memory and the other settings ✓ ———

[AM] Preset memory and the other settings ✓ ———

[TV] Preset memory and the other settings ✓ ———

[REAR

SCREEN]

Rear Screen setting ✓ ———

Others Picture Adjust ✓ ———

Display Tilt ✓ ———

Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4

1. Press the RESET button on the hard-

ware.

2. Initialize the user data area on the hard

disk drive.

3. Clear the learned data in the sensor.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 181 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

182

Appendix NAVI/AV

7 Press the MENU button and then touch

[Settings].

The setting menu appears.

8 Touch [Hardware] and then touch [3D

Calibration Status].

9 Touch [Learning Status] and then touch

[Reset All].

Adjusting the Response Posi-

tions of the Touch Panels

(Touch Panel Calibration)

If you feel that the touch keys on the screen devi-

ate from the actual positions that respond to your

touch, adjust the response positions of the touch

panel. There are two adjustment methods: 4-point

adjustment, in which you touch four corners of

the screen; and 16-point adjustment, in which

you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen.

❒ Make sure to use the supplied stylus for

adjustment, and gently touch the screen. If

you press the touch panel forcefully, the touch

panel may be damaged. Do not use a sharp

pointed tool such as a ballpoint pen or a

mechanical pen. Otherwise the screen is

damaged.

Stylus (supplied with navigation system)

1 Press the V button.

The Picture Adjust screen appears.

2 Press and hold the V button for two sec-

onds or more.

The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen

appears.

3 Touch and hold each of the arrows on the

four corners of the screen with the touch

panel adjustment pen.

Hold the pen on the arrow until each one of

the four arrows turns red.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 182 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

183

AppendixNAVI/AV

4 Press the V button.

The adjusted position data is saved.

❒ Do not turn off the engine while saving the

adjusted position data.

❒ Press the MAP button to complete the 4-

point adjustment.

5 Press the V button.

The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen

appears.

6 Gently touch the center of the + mark dis-

played on the screen with the touch panel

adjustment pen.

After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-

tion data is saved.

❒ Do not turn off the engine while saving the

adjusted position data.

❒ Press the V button to return to the previ-

ous adjustment position.

❒ To cancel the adjustment, press the MAP

button.

7 Press the MAP button.

The adjustment is complete.

❒ If touch panel adjustment cannot be per-

formed properly, consult your local Pio-

neer dealer.

Positioning Technology

The navigation system accurately measures your

current location by combining the positioning by

GPS and by Dead Reckoning.

Positioning by GPS

The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a net-

work of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each of the

satellites, which orbit at a height of 68 900 000

feet (21 000 km), continually broadcasts radio sig-

nals giving time and position information. This

ensures that signals from at least three can be

picked up from any open area on the ground’s

surface.

The accuracy of the GPS information depends on

how good the reception is. When the signals are

strong and reception is good, GPS can determine

latitude, longitude, and altitude for accurate posi-

tioning in three dimensions. But if signal quality

is poor, only two dimensions, latitude and longi-

tude, can be obtained and positioning errors are

somewhat greater.

Positioning by dead reckoning

The 3D Hybrid Sensor in the navigation system

also calculates your position. The current loca-

tion is measured by detecting driving distance

with the speed pulse, the turning direction with

the Gyrosensor, and inclination of the road with

the G sensor.

The 3D Hybrid Sensor can even calculate

changes of altitude, and corrects for discrepan-

cies in the distance traveled caused by driving

along winding roads or up slopes. Also, the navi-

gation system learns the driving conditions and

stores information in the memory; thus, as you

drive more, the precision of the positioning

becomes more accurate.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 183 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

184

Appendix NAVI/AV

The method of positioning changes as follows

depending on whether the speed pulse of your

vehicle is detected or not:

3D hybrid mode

This is active when the speed pulse is detected.

Inclination of a street can be detected.

Simple hybrid mode

When the speed pulse is not detected, position-

ing is performed in this mode. Only horizontal

movement is detected, so it becomes less accu-

rate. Also, when the positioning by GPS is not

available, such as when your vehicle enters a

long tunnel, the discrepancy between your actual

and calculated position may become bigger.

❒ The speed pulse data comes from the speed

sensing circuit. The location of this speed

sensing circuit depends on your vehicle

model. In some cases, it is impossible to

make a connection to it, and in such a case

we recommend that the ND-PG1 speed pulse

generator (sold separately) be used.

How do GPS and dead reckon-

ing work together?

For maximum accuracy, your navigation system

continually compares GPS data with your esti-

mated position as calculated from the data of 3D

Hybrid Sensor. However, if only the data from the

3D Hybrid Sensor is available for a long period,

positioning errors are gradually compounded

until the estimated position becomes unreliable.

For this reason, whenever GPS signals are avail-

able, they are matched with the data of the 3D

Hybrid Sensor and used to correct it for improved

accuracy.

To ensure maximum accuracy, the dead reckon-

ing system learns with experience. By comparing

the position it estimates with your actual position

as obtained using GPS, it can correct for various

types of error, such as tire wear and the rolling

motion of your vehicle. As you drive, the dead

reckoning system gradually gathers more data,

learns more, and the accuracy of its estimates

gradually increases. So, after you have driven

some distance, you can expect your position as

shown on the map to show fewer errors.

❒ If you use chains on your wheels for winter

driving or put on the spare wheel, errors may

suddenly increase because of difference in

wheel diameter. The system detects the fact

that the tire diameter has changed, and auto-

matically replaces the value for calculating

distance.

❒ If the ND-PG1 is used or if your vehicle is oper-

ating in Simple hybrid mode, the distance cal-

culation value cannot be replaced

automatically.

Map matching

As mentioned, the GPS and dead reckoning sys-

tems used by this navigation system are suscepti-

ble to certain errors. Their calculations may, on

occasion, place you in a location on the map

where no road exists. In this situation, the pro-

cessing system understands that vehicles travel

only on roads, and can correct your position by

adjusting it to a nearby road. This is called map

matching.

With map matching

Without map matching

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 184 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

185

AppendixNAVI/AV

Handling Large Errors

Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by com-

bining GPS, Dead Reckoning, and map match-

ing. However, in some situations, these functions

may not work properly, and the error may become

bigger.

When the positioning by GPS is

impossible

• If signals cannot be received from more than

two GPS satellites, GPS positioning does not

take place.

• In some driving conditions, signals from GPS

satellites may not reach your vehicle. In this

case, it is impossible for the system to use GPS

positioning.

• If a car phone or cellular phone is used near

the GPS antenna, GPS reception may be lost

temporarily.

• Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray paint

or car wax, because this may block the recep-

tion of GPS signals. Snow buildup can also

degrade the signals, so keep the antenna

clear.

❒ If, for any reason, GPS signals cannot be

received, learning and error correction are not

possible. If GPS positioning has been operat-

ing for only a short time, your vehicle’s actual

position and the current location mark on the

map may diverge considerably. Once GPS

reception is restored, accuracy will be recov-

ered.

Vehicles that Cannot Obtain

Speed Pulse Data

❒ The speed pulse data comes from the speed

sensing circuit. The location of this speed

sensing circuit depends on your vehicle

model. In some cases, it is impossible to

make a connection to it, and in such a case

we recommend that the ND-PG1 speed pulse

generator (sold separately) be used.

Conditions Likely to Cause

Noticeable Positioning Errors

For various reasons such as the state of the road

you are traveling on and the state of reception of

the GPS signal, the actual position of your vehicle

may differ from the position displayed on the map

screen.

• If you make a shallow turn.

In tunnels or enclosed parking garages

Under elevated roads or similar structures

When driving among high buildings

When driving through a dense forest or tall trees

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 185 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

186

Appendix NAVI/AV

• If there is a parallel road.

• If there is another road very nearby, such as in

the case of an elevated freeway.

• If you take a recently opened road that is not on

the map.

• If you drive in zig-zags.

• If the road has connected hairpin bends.

• If there is a loop or similar road configuration.

• If you take a ferry.

• If you are driving on a long, straight road or a

gently curving road.

• If you are on a steep mountain road with many

height changes.

• If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot or

similar using a spiral ramp.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 186 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

187

AppendixNAVI/AV

• If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or simi-

lar structure.

• If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a

gravel road or in snow.

• If you put on chains, or change your tires for

ones with a different size.

• If trees or other obstacles block the GPS sig-

nals for a considerable period.

• If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-stop

manner, as in a traffic congestion.

• If you join the road after driving around a large

parking lot.

• When you pass around a traffic circle.

• When starting driving immediately after start-

ing the engine.

• If you turn your navigation system on while

driving.

Some types of vehicles may not output a speed

signal while driving at just a few kilometers per

hour. In such a case, the current location of your

vehicle may not be displayed correctly while in a

traffic congestion or in a parking lot.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 187 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

188

Appendix NAVI/AV

Troubleshooting

If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common prob-

lems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. While this list is not comprehensive, it

should answer your most common problems. If a solution to your problem cannot be found here, con-

tact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.

Problems in the screen

Symptom Cause Action (See)

Power doesn’t turn on. The naviga-

tion system doesn’t operate.

Leads and connectors are incorrectly

connected.

Confirm once more that all connec-

tions are correct.

The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blow-

ing, then replace the fuse. Be very

sure to install a correct fuse with the

same rate.

Noise and other factors are causing

the internal memory to operate incor-

rectly.

Refer to “Returning the Navigation

System to the Default or Factory Set-

tings” and carry out appropriate mea-

sures. (➞ Page 179)

The hard disk drive is not working

because the temperature is

extremely low or high.

Wait until the temperature inside the

vehicle falls or rises.

When the ignition switch is turned

ON (or turned to ACC), the motor

sounds.

This system confirms whether a disc

is loaded or not.

This is a normal operation.

The navigation does not boot up. The power cable is not wired cor-

rectly.

Turn the system off and the check

the wiring.

The hard disk drive is not running

because the temperature is too low.

Wait until the inside of the vehicle

warms up.

The hard disk drive is defective. Consult your authorized Pioneer

dealer.

You cannot position your vehicle on

the map or the positioning error is

large.

The quality of signals from the GPS

satellites is poor, causing reduced

positioning accuracy. Such a loss of

signal quality may happen for the fol-

lowing reasons:

• The GPS antenna is in an unsuit-

able location.

• Obstacles are blocking signals

from the satellites.

• The position of satellites relative to

your vehicle is bad.

• Signals from the GPS satellites

have been modified to reduce

accuracy. (GPS satellites are oper-

ated by the US Department of

Defense, and the US government

reserves the right to distort posi-

tioning data for military reasons.

This may lead to greater position-

ing errors.)

• If a vehicle phone or cellular phone

is used near the GPS antenna, GPS

reception may be lost temporarily.

• Do not cover the GPS antenna with

spray paint or vehicle wax, because

this may block the reception of

GPS signals. Snow buildup can

also degrade the signals.

Check the GPS signal reception (➞

Page 97) and the position of the GPS

antenna if necessary, or continue

driving until reception improves.

Keep the antenna clear.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 188 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

189

AppendixNAVI/AV

Signals from the vehicle’s speed

pulse are not being picked up prop-

erly.

Check that the cables are properly

connected. If necessary, consult the

dealer that installed the system.

The navigation system may not be

mounted securely in your vehicle.

Check that the navigation system is

securely mounted and, if necessary,

consult the dealer that installed the

system.

Your vehicle is operating in Simple

hybrid mode.

Connect the speed signal input (pink

lead wire) of the power cable cor-

rectly, and reset the 3D Hybrid Sen-

sor memory ([Learning Status]).

The navigation system is installed

with an extreme angle exceeding the

limitation of the installation angle.

Confirm the installation angle. (The

navigation system must be installed

within the allowed installation angle.

For details, refer to “Installation Man-

ual” and [Installation Angle Setup]

on page 99.)

Indication of the position of your vehi-

cle is misaligned after a U-turn or

reversing.

Check whether or not the reverse

gear signal input lead (purple) is con-

nected properly. (The navigation sys-

tem works properly without the lead

connected, but positioning accuracy

will be adversely affected.)

The map continually reorients itself. The traveling direction is always set

to Heading Up.

Touch on the screen and change

the map display.

The daylight display is used even

when the vehicle lights are on.

[Day] is selected to [Day/Night Dis-

play].

Check the [Day/Night Display] set-

ting (➞ Page 51) and make sure

[Automatic] is selected.

The orange/white lead is not con-

nected.

Check the connection.

The display is very dim. The vehicle’s light is turned ON, and

[Automatic] is selected on [Day/

Night Display].

Read about the [Day/Night Dis-

play] setting (➞ Page 51) and, if

desired, select [Day].

The vehicle cabin temperature is

extremely low.

A Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is

used, and such displays tend to

darken when cold. Wait for the vehi-

cle to warm up.

Picture quality adjustment of the dis-

play is not correct.

Refer to “Operating the picture

adjustment” (➞ Page 160) to adjust

the picture quality.

Display tilt is not at the proper set-

ting.

Press and hold the EJECT button to

adjust the tilt.

No sounds are heard.

The volume level will not rise.

The volume level is low. Adjust the volume level.

The attenuator or mute is on. Turn the attenuator or mute off.

The speaker lead is disconnected. Check the connection.

The volume of beeps and navigation

guidance cannot be adjusted.

You cannot adjust these parameters

with the VOL (/) button.

Turn the volume up or down with

[Volume] in the [Settings] menu.

Adjusting the volume of navigation

guidance and beeps is not possible.

You cannot adjust them with the

VOL (/) button.

Turn the volume up or down accord-

ing to [Volume] (➞ Page 95) in the

[Settings] menu.

A strange sound is heard when the

vehicle comes close to a certain

place. (E.g. Dog barking)

The sound for the entry of [Address

Book] is set.

Set the sound setting of that entry to

[No Sound]. (➞ Page 66)

An alarm sounds when you approach

the registered location and the set

image pops up, regardless of

whether [Address Book Icon] is set

to [Off].

This is a normal operation and not a

malfunction.

To turn off the sound output and

image pop up, select [No Sound]

and [No Picture].

Symptom Cause Action (See)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 189 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

190

Appendix NAVI/AV

Slope is not displayed on the Vehi-

cle Dynamics screen. Inclination

does not move on the 3D Calibra-

tion Status screen.

The speed pulse lead is not con-

nected.

Connect the speed pulse lead.

No sound, no voice. “Guide Mute” has been set, or sound

volume is reduced to 0.

Adjust the volume of the guidance or

turn “Guide Mute” off.

Refer to “Setting the Volume for

Guidance and Phone” (➞ Page 95).

The person on the other end of the

phone call cannot hear the conversa-

tion due to an echo.

The voice from the person on the

other end of the phone call is output

from the speakers and then picked

up by the microphone again, creat-

ing an echo.

Use the following methods to reduce

the echo.

— Lower the volume on the receiver

— Have both speakers pause

slightly before speaking

The registered phone cannot be

deleted.

Normally, the registered phone can-

not be deleted.

• Overwrite the old registered phone

with a new phone.

• Clear [Phone Settings] by refer-

ring to “Returning the Navigation

System to the Default or Factory

Settings”.

When the screen is frozen...

Park your vehicle in a safe place, and cut off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Acc off”. Then

start the engine again, and turn the power to the navigation system back on. If this does not solve the

problem, press the RESET button on the navigation system.

Symptom Cause Action (See)

CD or DVD playback is not possible. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert the disc with the label upward.

The disc is dirty. Clean disc.

The disc is cracked or otherwise

damaged.

Insert a normal, round disc.

The files on the CD are an irregular

file format.

Check the file format.

The CD format cannot be played

back.

Replace disc.

The loaded disc is a type this system

cannot play.

Check what type the disc is. ( Also

see “Handling and Care of the Disc”

in the Hardware Manual and “Detail

Information for Playable Media” for

more cautions about handling each

type of media.)

No picture. The parking brake lead is not con-

nected or applied.

Connect a parking brake lead cor-

rectly, and apply the parking brake.

Parking brake interlock is activated. Park your vehicle in a safe place and

apply the parking brake.

➲ “Parking brake interlock” ➞

Page 20

The [AV Input] setting is incorrect. Please read the following page and

set the setting correctly.

➞ Page 156

The audio skips. The navigation system is not firmly

secured.

Secure the navigation system firmly.

Failure hard disk drive. Consult your Pioneer dealer.

“Rear display” picture disappears. The setting for [REAR SCREEN] is

incorrect.

Please read the following page and

set the rear screen setting correctly.

➞ Page 159

There was a problem with the “Rear

display” or a faulty wiring connec-

tion, for example.

Check the “Rear display” and its con-

nection.

Symptom Cause Action (See)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 190 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

191

AppendixNAVI/AV

When the shift lever is in [R], the rear

view camera images are displayed.

(When [MIRROR] is selected in

[REAR SCREEN] menu.)

Select [DVD] or [AV] in [REAR

SCREEN] menu. When you move

the shift lever to a position other than

[R], the screen will be returned to the

previous display.

[DVD-V Setup] is carried out. You can not display the video image

to “Rear display” during [DVD-V

Setup] menu.

Nothing is displayed and the touch

panel keys cannot be used.

The setting for the rear view camera

is incorrect.

Connect a rear view camera cor-

rectly.

The shift lever was placed in [R]

when the rear view camera was not

connected.

Press the AV button to return to the

source display and then select the

correct polarity setting for [Camera

Input].

➲ About [Camera Input] setting ➞

Page 156

The back light of the LCD panel is

turned off.

Press the V button to turn on the

back light.

Touch panel key is not responding or

a different key is responding.

Touch keys deviate from the actual

positions that respond to your touch

for some reason.

Perform the touch panel calibration.

“Adjusting the Response Positions of

the Touch Panels (Touch Panel Cali-

bration)” ➞ Page 182

CD recording is not possible. A disc that cannot be recorded, such

as MP3 disc or DVD-video, is

inserted.

A disc other than a normal music CD

cannot be recorded.

CD recording doesn’t stop though

the record progress indicator shows

100%.

Music Library recording will be can-

celed after playback of the current

track is finished. (The recording

mode stops at the interval of the

tracks.)

Wait until the current track has

ended or change the source manu-

ally.

“NO SIGNAL” is displayed at the right

corner on the map.

While waiting for a response from

the XM tuner.

Wait for a while and try the operation

again.

You are in an area that cannot

receive XM tuner reception.

Move into an area that can receive

XM tuner reception.

Your current location provides very

poor reception.

Change your location.

“UPDATING” is displayed at the right

corner on the map.

Service subscription is either

XM audio only

or XM NavTraffic

stand alone.

Since the GEX-P10XMT is capable of

receiving both XM audio and XM

NavTraffic service, if you are sub-

scribed to only one or the other, the

system checks to see if you have

added another service to your

account since you last powered on

the navigation system. When you

subscribe to both services, this mes-

sage will stop appearing when you

turn the ignition ON (ACC ON).

No sounds are heard.

The volume level will not rise.

Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.

The system is performing still, slow

motion, or frame-by-frame playback

with DVD-video.

There is no sound during still, slow

motion, or frame-by-frame playback

with DVD-video.

The system is paused or performing

fast rewind or forward during the

MP3 disc playback.

For an MP3, there is no sound on fast

rewind or forward.

“DTS” is selected for the DVD-Video

disc sound track.

Switch to a non “DTS” sound track.

The icon

is displayed, and opera-

tion is not possible.

The operation is not compatible with

the DVD’s configuration.

This operation is not possible. (For

example, the DVD playing does not

feature that angle, audio system,

subtitle language, etc.)

Symptom Cause Action (See)

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 191 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

192

Appendix NAVI/AV

Messages and How to React to Them

Messages for navigation functions

The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system.

❒ There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a

case, follow the instructions given on the display.

The picture stops (pauses) and the

unit cannot be operated.

Reading of data has become impos-

sible during DVD playback.

After touching  once, start play-

back once more.

The picture is stretched, the aspect is

incorrect.

The aspect setting is incorrect for the

display.

Select the appropriate setting for that

image.

➲ “Changing the wide screen

mode” ➞ Page 155

➲ “Setting the aspect ratio” ➞

Page 154

A parental lock message is displayed

and DVD playback is not possible.

Parental lock is on. Turn parental lock off or change the

level (➞ Page 155).

Parental lock for DVD playback can-

not be canceled.

The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number. (➞

Page 155).

Playback is not with the audio lan-

guage and subtitle language settings

selected in [DVD-V Setup].

The DVD playing does not feature

dialog or subtitles in the language

selected in [DVD-V Setup].

Switching to a selected language is

not possible if the language selected

in [DVD-V Setup] is not recorded

on the disc.

Dialing is not possible because the

touch keys for dialing are inactive.

Your phone is out of range for serv-

ice.

Retry after entering within range for

service.

The connection between cellular

phone and the Bluetooth unit (sold

separately) (navigation system) can-

not be established now.

Perform the connection process.

The cellular phone is not registered

to the navigation system yet.

To use the cellular phone featuring

the Bluetooth wireless technology

with this navigation system, the reg-

istration process is necessary.

Symptom Cause Action (See)

Message When What to do

Irregular speed pulse signal

detected. Please power off the sys-

tem and check the installation. Then,

please re-boot the system and press

“OK”.

If the navigation system does not

receive the vehicle speed pulse.

Consult your Pioneer dealer.

Speed pulse not connected. Calibra-

tion will start without speed pulse.

Accuracy is not fully ensured without

speed pulse.

The speed signal input (pink lead

wire) of the power cable is not con-

nected.

To operate with 3D hybrid mode, con-

nect the speed signal input (pink

lead wire) of the power cable cor-

rectly.

Although it can be operated in Sim-

ple hybrid mode without connecting

the speed signal input, the precision

of the positioning will be less accu-

rate.

Vibration detected. Please power off

the system and check the installa-

tion. Then, please re-boot the system

and press “OK”.

The navigation unit is installed in a

place where it may be affected by a

large vibration.

Re-install the navigation unit in a

place where the unit will not be

affected by vibration.

Direction of G sensor is not correct.

Please power off the system and

check the installation. Then, please

re-boot the system and press “OK”.

Direction of G sensor is set incor-

rectly.

See the Installation Manual and set

the direction of the navigation unit

correctly.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 192 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

193

AppendixNAVI/AV

Gyro Sensor is not working properly.

Please consult your dealer or Pioneer

service center.

Abnormal Gyrosensoroutput is

detected.

Write down the error code shown on

the screen. Turn off the power, and

then contact your nearest Pioneer

service facility.

Positioning is not possible due to the

hardware. Please contact your dealer

or Pioneer service center.

The location display is not possible

due to hardware failure.

Consult your dealer.

GPS antenna problem detected.

Please contact your dealer or Pioneer

service center.

The location display is not possible

due to failure of the GPS antenna.

Consult your dealer.

This function is not available now. The screen cannot be displayed with

Vehicle Dynamics Display. The sen-

sor has not been taught so the sen-

sor information cannot be acquired.

If the sensor learning status reaches

the Sensor Initializing, the system is

ready to be used.

The vertical installation angle is

changed. Gyro Sensor calibration is

re-initialized.

If the mounting angle of the naviga-

tion unit has been changed.

The system initializes the sensor in

order to operate it with the maximum

performance and automatically

starts re-learning.

Excess vertical installation angle

detected. Please install the naviga-

tion unit correctly.

The navigation system is installed

with an extreme angle exceeding the

limitation of the installation angle.

Confirm the installation angle. (The

navigation system must be installed

within the allowed installation angle.

For details, refer to Installation Man-

ual.)

No data available at this time. No data is available that can be used

with the XM tuner.

Wait for a while and try the operation

again.

UPDATING (Updating) The selected channel is not included

in your subscription.

Select another channel.

Radio is being updated with the lat-

est encryption code.

Wait until the encryption code is fully

updated.

Route calculation was not possible. Route calculation has failed because

of a malfunction in map data, soft-

ware, or hardware.

• Change the destination.

• Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if

this message persists.

Route calculation not possible

because destination is too far.

The destination is too far. • Set a destination closer to the start-

ing point.

• Set one or more waypoints.

Route calculation not possible

because destination is too close.

The destination or waypoint(s) are

too close.

Set a destination and waypoint(s) far-

ther from the starting point.

Route calculation not possible due to

traffic regulations.

• The destination or waypoint(s) are

in a Control Traffic Zone (CTR) and

the route calculation is hampered.

• Your vehicle is currently in a Con-

trol Traffic Zone (CTR) and the

route calculation is hampered.

• Set a destination and waypoint(s)

outside the CTR if you know where

the restricted area is.

• Try a destination or waypoint(s)

away from the currently set points

to some extent.

• Drive your vehicle to an unre-

stricted area and reset the destina-

tion and waypoint(s).

Route calculation not possible

because navigation cannot be pro-

vided around destination or starting

point.

The destination, waypoint(s), or start-

ing point are in an area where no

road exists (e.g. a mountain) and the

route calculation is impossible.

• Set a destination and waypoint(s)

on roads.

• Reset the destination after you

drive the vehicle to any road.

Route to destination cannot be cal-

culated.

The destination or waypoint(s) are in

an isolated island, etc. without a ferry

and the route calculation is impossi-

ble. If there is no road connected to

your starting point or destination,

this message will appear.

Change the destination.

Message When What to do

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 193 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

194

Appendix NAVI/AV

• Ferry could not be avoided.

• Toll roads could not be avoided.

• Freeway could not be avoided.

• Ferry, toll roads and freeways could

not be avoided.

• Ferry and toll roads could not be

avoided.

• Toll roads and freeways could not

be avoided.

• Ferry and freeway could not be

avoided.

These messages appear when a ferry

route, toll roads, or freeways are

included in the route to the destina-

tion or waypoints even though a

route is set to avoid them.

You can identify these condition by

the icons.

➲ “Checking and modifying the

route” ➞ Page 32

If the current route is not desired, set

destination or waypoints that do not

pass through a ferry route, toll roads,

or freeways.

The address does not exist.

Do you want to continue?

The house number entered does not

exist in the database for the specified

street.

Re-enter the existing house number.

Or, proceed to the next step without

entering the house number and set

the main point of that street as your

destination.

This area does not contain any POI of

the selected type.

Facilities of the selected category do

not exist in the surrounding areas.

Use another search method or move

to another location and perform the

[Vicinity Search] again.

Failed to make the route profile. In rare cases, a route calculation

error may occur.

•Retry.

• Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if

this message persists.

There is no Traffic List. There is no available traffic informa-

tion now.

Move to the location where you can

receive the XM NavTraffic informa-

tion, and then try the operation

again.

There is no pictures folder. Please

create /Pictures/ folder and store

JPEG files in that Folder.

Cannot load the image because the

Pictures folder is not found in the

inserted disc.

Use the appropriate data after read-

ing “Limitations for importing pic-

tures” on page 101.

Data Read error. Failed to read the data because the

CD-R is damaged or dirty. Or, the

pick-up lens of the DVD drive is dirty.

Try re-reading the data by inserting a

clean CD-R.

Clean the pick-up lens with a com-

mercially available cleaning kit for

DVD, then try to reading again.

The Pictures folder exists on the CD-

R but no data in JPEG format exists.

Use the appropriate data after read-

ing “Limitations for importing pic-

tures” on page 101.

JPEG file is corrupt. The data is damaged or an attempt

was made to set a JPEG image that

was not made to specifications as

the background picture.

Use the appropriate data after read-

ing “Limitations for importing pic-

tures” on page 101.

CAUTION!

System detected improper connec-

tion of Parking Brake lead.

Please check your configuration for

safety. Please see Operation Manual

for more information regarding safe

operation.

Parking brake lead is incorrectly con-

nected.

Confirm once more that their con-

nections are correct.

Message When What to do

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 194 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

195

AppendixNAVI/AV

Connection failed. The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire-

less technology is turned off .

Turn the target phone’s Bluetooth

wireless technology on.

The cellular phone is paired (con-

nected) with another device.

Cancel the pairing (connection) and

retry.

Rejection has been received from the

cellular phone.

Operate the target phone and accept

the connection request from the nav-

igation system. (Furthermore, check

the connection settings on your cel-

lular phone.)

The target cellular phone can not be

found.

Check whether your cellular phone is

turned off and whether the distance

to your cellular phone is too far.

Registration step has been success-

ful but connection has failed for

some reason.

Retry the registration and if a con-

nection still cannot be established,

try connecting using your cellular

phone.

Registration failed. The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire-

less technology is turned off during

the registration step.

Keep turning the target phone’s

Bluetooth wireless technology on

during the registration.

Rejection by the cellular phone has

received.

Operate the target phone and accept

the registration request from the nav-

igation system. (Furthermore, check

the connection settings on your cel-

lular phone.

Registration step has failed for some

reason.

Retry the registration and if the regis-

tration still fails, try registering using

your cellular phone.

Automatic connection in progress.

Please try again later.

If you try to perform another opera-

tion during automatic connection by

the system.

• Wait for a while and retry.

• Establish that connection tempo-

rarily and retry that later.

Automatic connection in progress.

Please try manually later.

If you try to connect another phone

during automatic connection by the

system.

Establish that connection tempo-

rarily and retry it later.

Could not find any available phone. No available phone exist in the sur-

roundings when the system searches

for the cellular phone featuring Blue-

tooth wireless technology for regis-

tration.

• Turn the target phone’s Bluetooth

wireless technology on.

• Check whether your cellular phone

is turned off and whether the dis-

tance to your cellular phone is too

far.

Bluetooth unit error. It is not possible

to find any cell phones.

If the Bluetooth unit (sold separately)

is disconnected from this navigation

system or Bluetooth unit carries out

another processing when the system

search the cellular phone featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology for

registration.

• Check the connection and retry.

• Establish that connection tempo-

rarily and retry later.

Bluetooth unit error. The device

name could not be set.

If the Bluetooth unit (sold separately)

is disconnected from this navigation

system or the Bluetooth unit carries

out another process when you

change the device name.

• Check the connection and retry.

• Establish that connection tempo-

rarily and retry later.

Registration is not available. If you try to perform another opera-

tion immediately after connection

failure.

Wait for a while and retry.

Reading failed. If you transferred the data from your

cellular phone in a format can not be

received with navigation system.

Select just a suitable item, format,

and then retry.

Disconnection has been made dur-

ing transfer for some reason.

Connect your cellular phone again

and retry.

Message When What to do

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 195 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

196

Appendix NAVI/AV

Messages for Audio Functions

When problems occur in the audio source, a message may appears on the display. Refer to the table

below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error persists, contact

your dealer or your nearest PIONEER Service Center.

Built-in DVD drive

Calibration failed.

Please refer to the owner’s manual.

The touch panel calibration has not

been carried out with appropriate

steps.

Please read the instruction of touch

panel calibration and retry.

➞ Page 182

The HDD is not connected. Failure of the built-in hard disk drive

has occurred, such as internal elec-

trical problem or file system error.

Consult your dealer.

Cannot use HDD. Failure of the built-in hard disk drive

has occurred, such as internal elec-

trical problem or file system error.

Consult your dealer.

There is no applicable program. Failure of the built-in hard disk drive

has occurred, such as internal elec-

trical problem or file system error.

Consult your dealer.

The HDD cannot be operated due to

excessive heat.

Please move your vehicle to a safe

place and turn the power off until the

temperature goes down.

Hard disk drive cannot run due to

high temperature.

Park your vehicle to safe place, turn

the ignition switch off, and wait until

the temperature inside the vehicle

drops.

Message When What to do

Unreadable disc. If you try to use a disc which is incom-

patible with this system.

Insert a suitable disc.

If you insert a disc upside down. Insert the disc with the label upward.

If the disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

If the disc is cracked or otherwise dam-

aged.

Insert a normal, round disc.

Mechanical failure of DVD drive occurs. Consult your Pioneer dealer.

Playback error.

Please remove the disc.

Electrical or mechanical error has

occurred.

Press the RESET button. (“Hardware

manual” after reading page 179 in this

manual.)

Region code error The disc does not have the same region

number as the navigation system.

Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing

the correct region number.

Playback error due to irregu-

lar temperature. Please

remove the disc.

The temperature of the built-in DVD

drive exceeds the operating limits.

Park your vehicle in safe place, turn the

ignition switch off, and wait until the

built-in DVD drive’s temperature returns

to within normal operating limits.

ATTENTION!

Viewing of front seat video

source while driving is strictly

prohibited.

Parking brake interlock is activated. Park your vehicle in the safe place and

apply the parking brake.

➲ “Parking brake interlock” ➞ Page 20

Search error The title number, chapter number, time,

or 10 key command that you enter in

[10Key Search] do not exist. (This mes-

sage will appear when the DVD drive

cannot accept that command.)

Enter the available numbers or 10 key

command or use another search

method.

Message When What to do

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 196 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

197

AppendixNAVI/AV

Hard disk drive (Music Library)

Other sources

Message When What to do

This CD cannot be recorded If you insert a CD which prohibits sec-

ond-generation copies or duplicate.

Use another CD and retry.

• Recording error.

Switching to CD playback

mode

• Recording error.

Recording is stopped

• The recording was unsta-

ble. Restart the recording

from the beginning of the

track.

If recording can not be carried out due

to continuous skipping on certain part of

the disc because the disc is dirty,

scratched, or otherwise damaged, the

pick-up lens of the DVD drive is dirty, or

extreme vibration occurs continuously.

• Clean the disc and retry.

• Clean the pick-up lens with a commer-

cially available cleaning kit for DVD, then

retry.

• Retry in vibration-free condition.

Exceeded playlist maxi-

mum. No more playlists can

be recorded.

If you try to record a new CD but the

maximum number of playlists are

already recorded. (The album playlist

can be stores up to 400.)

Delete some playlists and retry.

Playback error. Music

Library cannot be played

The music library component is abnor-

mal.

Consult your dealer.

This playlist cannot store

more than 99 tracks.

If you try to add tracks but the My Mix or

My Favorite playlists are maximum num-

ber. (The My Mix and My Favorite playl-

ists can store the tracks up to 99.)

Delete some tracks and retry.

This track cannot be added

to MyMix

The music library component is abnor-

mal.

Consult your dealer.

Name cannot be used for

voice recognition. Try again.

Some invalid characters have been

entered and the system cannot convert

it to the appropriate pronunciation.

Enter different characters so that the sys-

tem can pronounce it.

Single recording mode will

only record the first track of

Recording tracks other than the first

track of CD when the recording mode is

[Single].

When you set [Single] in [REC Mode], the

system only can record the first track of

CD. Set [Auto] or [Manual] in [REC

Mode] and retry. (➞ Page 158)

HDD is full. This CD cannot

be recorded

There is no free space for recording in

the hard disk drive.

Delete some tracks or playlists and try

again if you want to record that CD.

Unable to select appropriate

Track info due to multiple

entries in the database.

Some corresponding data is found in

the Gracenote

Database, but the sys-

tem cannot select one to append a title.

Enter the title manually, or try to retrieve

the title by touching [Update title].

All artist names in the playl-

ist have been deleted

because no character has

been entered. Do you want

to proceed?

If you try to delete the artist name

entirely. The artist will not be displayed

in the artist group and artist name on

the information plate also will not be dis-

played.

If you enter the artist name again, the artist

name appears.

Message When What to do

Search failed. iPod is preparing playback.

Therefore, the operation is invalid now.

Wait until [Ready] disappears and try the

operation.

Invalid command - the

memo has not been stored.

• If you try to memorize 000 Channel to

My Mix.

• If you try to memorize a channel that is

OFF AIR to My Mix.

• If you try to memorize a channel to My

Mix while an XM tuner error occurs.

Tune an appropriate channel and memo-

rize it.

Invalid command - the CH

has not been stored.

• If you try to memorize 000 or 001 Chan-

nel to T button’s preset.

• If you try to memorize a channel that is

OFF AIR to T button’s preset.

• If you try to memorize a channel to T

button’s preset while an XM tuner

error occurs.

Tune an appropriate channel and memo-

rize it.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 197 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

198

Appendix NAVI/AV

When the hard disk drive is dis-

connected

If there is no hard disk drive because of repair or

service, you can operate only the Radio source

without the hard disk drive.

The following screen also may appear because

the hard disk drive can not run due to low temper-

ature. In such a case, park your vehicle in a safe

place and turn the ignition switch off. After the

temperature inside the vehicle returns to normal,

turn the ignition switch on.

Only the following operations are available. Other

functions cannot be operated.

• Only the FM and AM sources can be operated.

(Preset station select cannot be operated.)

• If the selected source before ejecting the hard

disk drive is [AV], the [AV INPUT] source is

available on “Rear display”. (If the selected

source is [DVD], nothing is output to “Rear

display”. If the selected source is [MIRROR],

the same image as “Front display” is output to

“Rear display”.)

• Rear view camera is available only when the

vehicle is backing up. ([Rear View] is not

available.)

Route Setting Information

Route search specifications

Your navigation system sets a route to your desti-

nation by applying certain built-in rules to the

map data. This section provides some useful

information about how a route is set.

• When a route is calculated, the route and

voice guidance for the route is automati-

cally set. Also, for day or time traffic regu-

lations, only information about traffic

regulations at the time when the route was

calculated is shown. One-way streets and

street closures may not be taken into con-

sideration. For example, if a street is open

during the morning only, but you arrive

later, it would be against the traffic regula-

tions so you cannot drive along the set

route. When driving, please follow the

actual traffic signs. Also, the system may

not know some traffic regulations.

• The calculated route is one example of the

route to your destination decided by the navi-

gation system whilst taking the type of streets

or traffic regulations into account. It is not nec-

essarily an optimum route. (In some cases, you

may not be able to set the streets you want to

pass. If you need to pass a certain street, set

the waypoint on that street.)

• The route set by your navigation system may

not use the streets known to local drivers, such

as small streets or special roads.

• Some route options may become the same

route. If waypoints are set, only one route is

calculated.

• If the destination is too far, there may be

instances where the route cannot be set. (If

you want to set a long-distance route going

across several areas, set waypoints along the

way.)

• During voice guidance, turns and intersections

from the freeway are announced. However, if

you pass intersections, turns, and other guide

points in rapid succession, some may not be

announced.

• It is possible that guidance may direct you off a

freeway and then back on again.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 198 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

199

AppendixNAVI/AV

• In some cases, the route may require you to

travel in the opposite direction to your current

heading. In such cases, you are instructed to

turn around, so please turn around safely by

following the actual traffic rules.

• In some cases, guidance may direct you past

your destination and then indicate a U-turn to

get back to it.

• In some cases, a route may begin on the oppo-

site side of a railway or river from your actual

current location. If this happens, drive towards

your destination for a while, and try route cal-

culation again.

• When there is a traffic congestion or closure

ahead, if driving through the traffic congestion

or closure is better than taking the detour, a

detour route may not appear.

•There may be instances when the starting

point and the destination point are not on the

highlighted route.

• The number of traffic circle exits displayed on

the screen may differ from the actual number

of roads.

Auto Reroute

• Auto Reroute is used when you deviate more

than 0.02 mile (Approx. 30m) from the route.

• The Auto Reroute function does not work in the

following cases:

- when your vehicle is not on a street

- when you are too close to your destination

- when your vehicle is on a ferry

- when driving on a road inside a facility

- when driving on a traffic circle

- when driving on the routes are described in

“Roads not used in calculations”

• The system assumes the driver deviated either

intentionally or inadvertently from the route

and searches for another route (intelligent

rerouting). Depending on the situation, the sys-

tem may search a new route that does not

return to the original one.

Route highlighting

• Once set, the route is highlighted in bright

green or light blue on the map.

• The immediate vicinity of your starting point

and destination may not be highlighted, and

neither will areas with particularly complex

road layouts. Consequently, the route may

appear to be cut off on the display, but voice

guidance will continue.

Roads not used in calculations

Even though displayed on screen, the following

roads are not included in route calculations.

• Walkway

• Public vehicle only

• Non access road

➲ “Viewing the Map Color Legend” ➞ Page 50

Tracking

• Your navigation system marks your course on

the map in certain increments. This is called

tracking. It is handy when you want to check a

route traveled without guidance or if returning

along a complex route.

• A maximum of about 155 miles (250 km) is

marked and, as you travel beyond this limit,

tracking marks are erased in order from the

most distant. Tracking display shows about

100 miles (160 km) tracking of your vehicle

with white dots.

➲ Tracking can also be set for automatic erasing

whenever the navigation system is switched

off ➞ Page 47

Displaying POI

Points of Interest (POI) that can be displayed on

the enlarged map of the intersection or [Driver’s

View] (left screen) are only the special Points of

Interest (POI) that contain the position informa-

tion. Not all of Points of Interests (POI) are dis-

played.

Detail Information for Playable

Media

DVD discs and other DVD media

types

• It may not be possible to use certain functions

with some DVD-Video discs.

• It may not be possible to play back some DVD

video discs.

• When DVD-R/DVD-RW discs are used, play-

back is possible only for discs that have been

finalized.

• When DVD-R/DVD-RW discs are used, play-

back is possible only for discs that have been

recorded in Video format (video mode). It is not

possible to play back DVD-RW discs which

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 199 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

200

Appendix NAVI/AV

have been recorded in Video Recording format

(VR mode).

• It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/

DVD-RW discs that have been recorded in

Video format (video mode) because of disc

characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc,

or dirt, scratches or condensation on the lens

of this product.

• It is not possible to play back general DVD-

ROM discs or DVD-RAM discs. Only DVD-ROM

discs authorized by Pioneer can be read.

• Playback of discs recorded on a personal com-

puter may not be possible depending on the

environment and the application settings.

Please record with the correct format. (For

details, contact the manufacturer of the appli-

cation.)

About playing Dual Disc

• Dual Discs are two-sided discs that have a

recordable CD for audio on one side and a

recordable DVD for video on the other.

• Playback of the DVD side is possible with this

unit. However, since the CD side of Dual Discs

is not physically compatible with the general

CD standard, it may not be possible to play the

CD side with this navigation system.

• Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual Disc

may result in scratches on the disc.

• Serious scratches can lead to playback prob-

lems on this navigation system. In some cases,

a Dual Disc may become stuck in the disc

loading slot and will not eject. To prevent this,

we recommend you refrain from using Dual

Disc with this navigation system.

• Please refer to the manufacturer for more

detailed information about Dual Discs.

CD-R/CD-RW discs

• When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, playback

is possible only for discs that have been final-

ized.

• It may not be possible to play back CD-R/CD-

RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or

a personal computer because of disc charac-

teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,

scratches or condensation on the lens of this

product.

• Playback of discs recorded on a personal com-

puter may not be possible, depending on the

environment and the application settings.

Please record with the correct format. (For

details, contact the manufacturer of the appli-

cation.)

• Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become

impossible with direct exposure to sunlight,

high temperatures, or depending on the stor-

age conditions in the vehicle.

• Titles and other text information recorded on a

CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this

product (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)).

• If you insert a CD-RW disc into this product, it

will take more time to play back than when you

insert a conventional CD or CD-R disc.

• Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW discs

before using them.

MP3 files

• When naming an MP3 file, add the corre-

sponding filename extension (.mp3).

• This navigation system plays back files with the

filename extension (.mp3) as MP3 files. To pre-

vent noise and malfunctions, do not use this

extension for files other than MP3 files.

• MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and

refers to an audio compression technology

standard.

• This product allows playback of MP3 files on

CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs. Recorded

discs can be played back if they are compatible

with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with the

Romeo and Joliet file system.

• It is possible to play back multi-session com-

patible recorded discs.

• MP3 files are not compatible with packet write

data transfer.

• The maximum number of characters for the file

and folder name is 32 characters, including

extension (.mp3). However the navigation sys-

tem uses proportional font. Therefore, the

number of the characters that you can display

varies according to the width of each charac-

ter.

• When playing discs with both MP3 files and

audio data (CD-DA), such as CD-EXTRA and

MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played

only by switching the mode between MP3 and

CD-DA.

• The folder selection sequence for playback and

other operations is the writing sequence used

by the writing software. For this reason, the

expected sequence at the time of playback

may not coincide with the actual playback

sequence. However, there also are some writ-

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 200 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

201

AppendixNAVI/AV

ing software that permit the setting of the play-

back order.

• Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge

into one another without a pause. When these

discs are converted to MP3 files and burned to

a CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM, the files will be

played back on this player with a short pause

between each one, regardless of the length of

the pause between tracks on the original audio

CD.

• Files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0

and Ver. 1.1 formats for displaying album (disc

title), track (track title) and artist (track artist).

• The emphasis function is valid only when MP3

files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequencies are

played back. (16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz

sampling frequencies can be played back.)

• There is no m3u playlist compatibility.

• There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3

interactive) or MP3 PRO formats.

• The sound quality of MP3 files generally

improves with an increased bit rate. This prod-

uct can play recordings with bit rates from

8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to be able to

enjoy sound of a certain quality, we recom-

mend only using discs recorded with a bit rate

of at least 128 kbps.

• Playing MP3 file on the DVD-R (-RW) is not

supported.

About folders and MP3 files

An outline of a CD-ROM with MP3 files on it is

shown below. Subfolders are shown as folders in

the folder currently selected.

❒ The following figure is an example of the tier

structure in the CD. The numbers in the figure

indicate the order in which folder numbers

are assigned and the order to be played back.

Indicates the order in which folder numbers

are assigned.

Indicates each file. The number is assigned in

the order of the track to be played back.

1 First tier

2 Second tier

3 Third tier

Notes:

• This product assigns folder numbers. The user

can not assign folder numbers.

• If you are using a folder that does not contain

an MP3 file, the folder itself will display but you

will not be able to see any files in the folder.

• MP3 files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be

played back. However, there is a delay when

starting playback on discs with numerous

tiers. For this reason we recommend creating

discs with no more than 2 tiers.

• It is possible to play back up to 253 folders on

one disc.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 201 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

202

Appendix NAVI/AV

Glossary

This glossary explains some of the terms used in

the manual.

3D Hybrid sensor

The built-in sensor which enables the system to estimate

your vehicle’s position. A learning function increases its

accuracy and its learning data can be stored in memory.

Address Book

A list of locations registered manually.

Aspect ratio

This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen. A regular

display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays

have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture

for exceptional presence and atmosphere.

Bit rate

This expresses data volume per second, or bps units

(bits per second). The higher the rate, the more informa-

tion is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same

encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the

better the sound.

Chapter

DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are

numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book.

With DVD-Video discs featuring chapters, you can

quickly find a desired scene with chapter search.

Current location

The present location of your vehicle; your current loca-

tion is shown on the map by a red triangle mark.

Default setting

A factory setting which applies when you first switch on

the system; you can customize default settings to suit

your own needs in the menu.

Destination

A location you choose as the end point of your journey.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to

5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby

Digital surround sound system used in theatres.

Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trade-

marks of Dolby Laboratories.

DTS

This stands for Digital Theatre Systems. DTS is a sur-

round system delivering multi-channel audio from up to

6 independent channels.

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trade-

marks of DTS, Inc.

Favorite Location

A frequently visited location (such as your workplace or

a relative’s home) that you can register to allow easy

routing.

GPS

Global Positioning System. A network of satellites that

provides navigation signals for a variety of purposes.

Gracenote

Music recognition service

Music recognition technology and related data are pro-

vided by Gracenote

. Gracenote is the industry standard

in music recognition technology and related content

delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.

Guidance mode

The mode in which guidance is given as you drive to your

destination; the system automatically switches to this

mode as soon as a route has been set.

Guidance point

These are important landmarks along your route, gener-

ally intersections. The next guidance point along your

route is indicated on the map by the yellow flag icon.

Home location

Your registered home location.

ID3 tag

This is a method of embedding track-related information

in a MP3 file. This embedded information can include

the track title, the artist’s name, the album title, the

music genre, the year of production, comments and

other data. The contents can be freely edited using soft-

ware with ID3 Tag editing functions. Although the tags

are restricted to the number of characters, the informa-

tion can be viewed when the track is played back.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 202 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

203

AppendixNAVI/AV

ISO9660 format

This is the international standard for the format logic of

CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there

are regulations for the following two levels.

Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (the name consists of up to

8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-

byte numerals and the “_” sign, with a file-extension of

three characters.)

Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 characters (including

the separation mark “.” and a file extension). Each folder

contains less than 8 hierarchies.

Extended formats

Joliet:

File names can have up to 64 characters.

Romeo:

File names can have up to 128 characters.

Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation

This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is

the signal recording system used for music CDs and

DVDs. Generally, DVDs are recorded with higher sam-

pling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs

can provide higher sound quality.

m3u

Playlists created using the “WINAMP” software have a

playlist file extension (.m3u).

A list of options shown on the display; choices are

selected touching the display.

MP3

MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio com-

pression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the

ISO (International Standards Organization). MP3 is able

to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a

conventional disc.

MPEG

This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an

international “Video image” compression standard.

Some DVDs feature digital audio compressed and

recorded using this system.

Multi-angle

With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras

are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images

from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV.

Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles,

letting you choose your viewing angle as desired.

Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)

Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multiple lan-

guages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on

a single disc, letting you choose as desired.

Multi-session

Multi-session is a recording method that allows addi-

tional data to be recorded later. When recording data on

a CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW, etc., all data from begin-

ning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-

session is a method of recording more than 2 sessions

in one disc.

Multi-subtitle

Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be recorded on a sin-

gle DVD, letting you choose as desired.

Optical digital output

By transmitting audio signals in a digital signal format,

the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of

transmission is minimized. An optical digital output is

designed to transmit digital signals optically.

Packet write

This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R,

etc. at the time required for a file, just as is done with

files on floppy or hard discs.

Parental lock

Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-oriented

scenes feature parental lock which prevents children

from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you

set the unit’s parental lock level, playback of scenes

inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these

scenes will be skipped.

Point of Interest (POI)

Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations stored in

the data, such as railway stations, shops, restaurants,

and amusement parks.

Region number

DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indi-

cating the area in which they were purchased. Playback

of a DVD is not possible unless it features the same

region number as the DVD player. The navigation sys-

tem’s region number is displayed on the bottom of the

navigation unit.

Route setting

The process of determining the ideal route to a specific

location; route setting is done automatically by the sys-

tem when you specify a destination.

Set route

The route marked out by the system to your destination.

It is highlighted in bright green on the map.

Title

DVD-Video discs have high data capacity, enabling

recording of multiple movies on a single disc. If, for

example, one disc contains three separate movies, they

are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you

enjoy the convenience of title search and other func-

tions.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 203 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

204

Appendix NAVI/AV

Tracking

Marks on the map indicating the route you have traveled.

TV system (NTSC, PAL, SECAM)

Different areas of the world use different TV systems.

North America uses NTSC, Europe uses PAL and

SECAM, and South America uses PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL

and NTSC.

Almost all are incompatible with each other. To display

the video image, such as TV or DVD-video correctly, you

may need to coordinate your system at the same TV sys-

tem or use a multisystem equipment.

VBR

VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking

CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexi-

bly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio

compression, it is possible to achieve compression prior-

ity sound quality.

Voice guidance

The giving of directions by a recorded voice while in

guidance mode.

Voice recognition

The technology that allows the system to understand the

driver’s voice commands.

Waypoint

A location that you choose to visit before your destina-

tion; a journey can be built up from multiple waypoints

and the destination.

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 204 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

205

AppendixNAVI/AV

Display Information

Navigation menu

[Destination] menu

[Information] menu

P.28

P.58, 61

P.57, 61

P.57

P.53

P.55

P.34

P.33

P.57, 61

P.58, 67

P.70

P.75

P.69

P.76

P.71

P.76

P.72

P.77 P.77

P.87

P.87, 90

P.88, 90 P.89 P.87, 92

P.87, 92

P.84

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 205 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

206

Appendix NAVI/AV

[Map] menu

P.49

P.51

P.50

P.51

P.50

P.51

P.47

P.48

P.47

P.48

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 206 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

207

AppendixNAVI/AV

[Settings] menu

P.97 P.98 P.99 P.99 P.99

P.95

P.96

P.97

P.95

P.102 P.102

P.61

P.102

P.100

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 207 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

208

Appendix NAVI/AV

Shortcut menu

❒ The shortcuts displayed on screen can be customized.

❒ Items marked with an asterisk (*) can not be removed from the shortcut menu.

➲ Changing a shortcut ➞ Page 49

: Registration

P. 56

: Vicinity Search

P. 50

: Overlay POI

P. 95

: Volume

: Dial Favorite 1 to 5

: Phone book

: Whole Route Overview

: Stock Info

: Set My Favorites

: My Favorites

: Traffic On Route

P. 35

Time restrictions

Avoid Freeway

Avoid Ferry

P. 34

Avoid Toll Road

P. 34

Route Condition

: Destination*

P. 45

: Route Options*

: Traffic Events

: Day/Night Display

P. 62

P. 87, 90

P. 88, 90

P. 36

P. 76

P. 70

P. 75

P. 69

P. 51

Shortcut menu

P. 34

: Address Book Icon Display

P. 48

P. 35

Learning Route

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 208 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

209

AppendixNAVI/AV

Menu in the Audio Screen

[Audio Settings] menu

[System Settings] menu (Page 1)

[System Settings] menu (Page 2)

P.149

P.152

P.151

P.153

P.151

P.152 P.152

P.154

P.157

P.155

P.157

P.156

P.158

P.156

P.158

P.157

P.158 P.158 P.158 P.159

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 209 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

210

Appendix NAVI/AV

Index

Numerics

10key Mode 113

10Key Search 112, 196

2D Twin Map View 40

3D detection 98

3D hybrid mode 184, 192

3D Hybrid Sensor 183, 202

3D Landmark 48

3D POI 40

3D Twin Map View 40

5.1ch setting 159

Active touch key 27

Address Book 58, 61, 62, 63, 66, 88, 202

Address Book entry 61, 63

Address Book Icon 48

Address Search 28

Album group 120

Albums 120, 121

AM 115

angle icon 154

Artist group 120

Artists 120, 122

Aspect ratio 154, 202

assist subtitles 154

Audio 103

audio language 112

Audio operation screen 103, 105

Audio Settings 105, 149, 209

auto antenna 158

Auto fill-in function 29

Auto Reroute 21, 199

auto service 79

AUX 147

AUX Input 147, 157

AV Background 100

AV Guide Mode 51

AV Input 145, 156

AV Setting 105, 149

Average Speed 97

Avoid Ferry 34

Avoid Freeway 34

Avoid Toll Road 34

Background Picture 100

Backlight 160

best stations memory 114, 116

Bit rate 108, 202

Bluetooth Connected icon 43

Bluetooth unit 43, 83

BSM 114, 116

BSSM 144

Business card 89

Cancel Route 33

CD 106, 118, 158

CD-DA 109

CD-R (-RW) 91, 100, 101

CD-TEXT 106, 117

cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology 83

Chapter 111, 202

clock display 158

Close Up View 41, 47

Connecting icon 86

Contacts 89

Current location 33, 42, 202

Current location key 44

dead reckoning 183, 184

Default or Factory Setting 179, 180, 181

Demo Mode 102

Destination 42, 202

Destination History 58, 67

Destination menu 26, 205

Detail 36

device and version information 99

device name 83, 86

Dial Favorites 90

dialed number history 87

Dialed Numbers 92

Direct scale key 44

Distance study 99

Distance to the destination 32, 33, 42

Dolby D 112

Dolby Digital 202

Driver’s View 40

DTS 202

DVD 110, 154, 161, 196

DVD menu 111, 112

Emergency Info 77, 80

Emergency TOW service 78

Enlarged map of the intersection 41

equalizer 149

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 210 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

211

AppendixNAVI/AV

equalizer curves 150

Errors 185

Estimated time of arrival 33, 42, 97

EXT 145

External Unit 145

fader/balance 151

favorite browsable Information 76

Favorite Location 57, 61, 63, 100, 202

FM 113

Frame-by-frame playback 111

Front Display 4, 198

Game Alert 135

Genre group 120

Genres 120, 122

GPS 183, 184, 202

GPS antenna 97

Gracenote® Database 106, 117, 120, 128

Gracenote® Music recognition service 202

Group 120

Guidance mode 202

Guidance point 42, 202

Guide Mode 39

Hands-free Phoning 83, 92

Hard Disk 22, 196, 198

hard disk information 99

hard disk recording 106

Heading up 42

high pass filter 152

Home location 57, 61, 63, 100, 202

ID3 tag 109, 202

Illumination 98

Inactive touch key 27

incoming call 86

Information menu 26, 205

Information plate 105

installation angle 99

Installation Position 97

Instant Traffic & Weather 133

insurance policy number 78

iPod 141

iPod adapter 141

ISO9660 format 203

Joliet 203

JPEG 101

keyboard 29, 96

Language 95, 154, 167

Learning Route 35

Learning Status 98

Linear PCM 203

Location confirmation screen 31

loudness 152

m3u 203

Map Color 50, 51

Map Legend 50

Map matching 184

Map Menu 26, 47, 206

Map Mode 39

Memo 132, 136

Memo Edit 132, 137

Messages 192

Modify Location 66

MP3 108, 109, 203

MPEG 203

Multi-Angle 154, 203

Multi-audio 203

Multi-CD 139

multiple routes 32

Multi-session 203

Multi-subtitle 203

Music Library 117, 119

MUTE lead 157

Mute Voice Guidance icon 43

muting/attenuation 157

My Favorite group 120

My Favorites 76, 120, 122

My Mix 122, 132, 136

Navigation Background 100

Navigation menu 26, 205

non fading 152, 159

North up 42

Notification icon 72

NTSC 204

Optical digital output 203

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 211 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

212

Appendix NAVI/AV

Options 34

Pacific Standard Time 96

Packet write 203

PAL 204

Parental lock 155, 203

Parking Brake 98

Parking brake interlock 20

Phone Book 87, 89, 90, 93

phone call 86, 87

Phone Connection Status 97

Phone Menu 83

phone number 65

Phone Ringtone 95

Phone Voice 95

Picture 66, 91

picture adjustment 160

playlist 119, 121, 122, 123, 125, 126, 166

playlist edit mode 124

POI 21, 43, 45, 50, 53, 55, 165, 199, 203

POI Search 53, 54, 55, 88

POI shortcut 55, 58

position effect 151

Power Voltage 98

Profile 35

profile for the Bluetooth unit 83

pronunciation 65, 125, 167

Q 150

Radio 113, 115

Radio ID 77, 131

Rear Display 4, 159, 190, 198

Rear View 21, 40, 156

Rear view camera 21, 156, 160

received call history 87

Received Calls 92

recording 117, 118, 119, 158, 191

Region number 203

Regional Settings 95

Restore Factory Settings 102

Roads without turn-by-turn instructions 43

Romeo 203

ROOT 109, 110

Route Calculation Condition 32, 34

Route Condition 34

Route confirmation screen 32

route guidance 33

Route View 39

Scroll cursor 44, 56

Scroll mode 44

Scroll the map 44

SECAM 204

Second Maneuver Arrow 43, 48

Sensor 98, 183, 184, 192

Set My Favorites 76

Settings menu 27, 95, 207

Shortcut menu 45, 49, 208

Short-Cut Selection 49

Shuffle Albums 142

Shuffle Songs 142

Simple hybrid mode 184, 192

simulated sound stage 151

single-session 101

SIRIUS Satellite Radio 133

slow-motion playback 111

Sound 66

source 103

source level adjustment 153

speaker balance 151, 152

Speed Pulse 97, 98, 185

Splash Screen 100, 102

Steering Remote Control 84, 104, 163

stock prices 75

street list screen 31

street name or city name input screen 29

Stylus 182

subtitle language 112

subwoofer 152, 158

Summer Time 96

System Settings 105, 149, 153, 209

Telephone Search 57

Text box 29

Time difference 96

Time Restrictions 35

Title display 106, 117, 120

Touch Panel Calibration 182

track edit mode 124

Tracking 199, 204

Tracking Display 47

Tracking dot 42

Traffic & Weather channel 137

traffic congestion 69

Traffic event icon 70

traffic flow information 70, 71

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 212 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

213

AppendixNAVI/AV

Traffic Information 69

traffic list 69

Traffic On Route 70

Traffic Settings 72

travel time 42

Travel time to destination 32

Troubleshooting 188

TV 143

TV system 204

unit of distance and speed 97

VBR 110, 204

Vehicle Dynamics Display 40, 80

Vicinity Search 55, 56, 88, 176

Video image 4, 160, 203

video input 156

View Mode 39, 51

viewing angle 112

VIN number 78

Voice Commands 167, 173, 175

Voice guidance 204

Voice Help menu 164

VOICE icon 164, 165

Voice Operation 163

Voice recognition 204

Volume 95, 157

Waypoint 36, 42, 204

wide screen mode 155

XM NavTraffic 22, 69

XM Satellite Radio 129

XM Tuner 77

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 213 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

PIONEER CORPORATION

4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU, TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.

TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium

TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936

TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia

TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada

TEL: 1-877-283-5901

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.

Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso

Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000

TEL:55-9178-4270

Published by Pioneer Corporation.

Printed in China

<CRB2297-A/U> UC

CRB2297A_U_English.book Page 2 Friday, January 5, 2007 2:51 PM

Pioneer AVIC Z2 Powerful HDD Navigation and Advanced Multimedia System

Product's Documents

Operation Manual

Specifications

Pioneer AVIC-Z2 Questions and Answers

Related Products

Pioneer AVIC U280 Add on Navigation System

Pioneer AVIC F500BT Advanced Multimedia On Dash Navigation System

Vevor 742 GPS Navigator for Car, 7 inch Touch Screen 16GB GPS Navigation System

Vevor Q10 GPS Navigator for Car, 7 inch Touch Screen 8GB GPS Navigation System

Vevor T31 GPS Navigator for Car, 9 inch Touch Screen 16GB GPS Navigation System

Kenwood DNX-997XROB eXcelon Reference GPS Navigation System DVD Receiver 6.8-Inch Wireless CarPlay Open Box